The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About1831 Rinehart Rd (3)s ti C 1, PERMIT ADDRESS 1 CONTRACTOR ADDRESS c) C!)v - PHONE NUMBER PROPERTY OWNER ADDRESS PHONE NUMBER ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MECHANICAL CONTRACTO PLUMBING CONTRACTOR MISCELLANEOUS CONTRACTOR PERMIT NUMBER FEE _ DATE 1 DESCRIPTION, VALUATION 00 . CK x0 FOOTAGE `00 CITY OF S_JNFORD PERMIT APPLICATION Permit # : n ` g� Date: t + 3j c (F Job Address: / / R ► r �� -r o � r-o r�,�, �'e a -7 1 Description ofWork--J"'STt}C_( jCiTC rZ�J FiooG>1 F [-� l 2'�yST �VC7" Historic District: Zoning: Value of Work: S t Q . (7.09. Permit Type: Building, Ele--tical Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Electrical: New Service. - # of AivmPS Addition/fi lterattion Change of Service Temporary Pole Mechanical: Residential Non- Residential X Replacement New (Dart Layout & Energy Cale. Rtgmred) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures. # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbinoew Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair - Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial X Industrial. Total Square Footage: Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: blood Zone.(FEMA form required for other than X) Parcel ff: Owners Name & Address: Contractor Name & Address: L,20. f=C.. Phone & Fam 2/ Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender - Address: Architeet/E;ngineer. Address: (Attack Proof of Ownership & Legal Description) Phone: O- J/ / State License Number. C r"C Q s% y j_U ontactYersoaAX1_� ? S Yhone: t Phone: Fax: Application is hereby made W obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated_ I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. 1 understand that a separate pert must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OIA'NER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in complianceBath all applicable laws regulating - construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVE TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTENT) TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT_ NOT1C1 : In addition to the requirements of tills permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional pemrits required from other govemme=l entities such as water managemem districts, state agencies or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the property of the requirements ofi4orida Len Law, FS 713. Signature of Owner/Agent Date Sipature III-bb Date �J v �. Dh I- r t I IV U. X� Print Q�caer/Agert's -NamePrurt Co actor/A-_ear's N2me ' 1 Sr�ature of N zz -State of Florida Date Signature oata F_ w - , y'� ry-S ate o F1 Date % UNNETH W. BRAY Owner/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Contractorii4stat is V Pcro- T' �Y SSION # DID499173 Produced lu — _ Produced ill EX l Dxrndx* 14, 2009 9.01•3•NOTARY Fr -Notary DircmMt Aa M CO. APPLICATION APPROVED BY: Bld_a: (Initial & Date) Species Conditions: Zoning: (In-Tial & Date.) udilties: FD: (Initial & Date) (lu ai & Date) CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION % ] Permit # : ` 91s;— P Date: Job Address: 1814% R1 flie-l 1►\4kr n. 3a-%71 Description of Work: lip-28T14CC A(- 7f, ok k �s/ZbILt 4 R,R 15-k4 (+A 1J5T Historic District: Zoning: Value of Work: $ Permit Type: Building Electrical Mechanical 1, Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm . Pool Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole _ Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential X Replacement New (Duct layout & Energy Cale. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial _ Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial X Industrial Total Square Footage: Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone (FEMA form required for other than X) Parcel #: Owners Name & Address: a:ff Bonding Company: Address: (Attach Proof of Ownership & Legal Description) Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect/Engineer: Phone: Address: Fax: ,C Tmg-t Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. 1 certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. 1 understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: in addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water m ement districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that 1 will notify the owner of the property of the requirements o Florida L' n Law, FS 713,/ Signature of Owner/Agent Print Owner/Agent's Name Signature of Notary -State of Florida Owner/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Produced1D r r—) APPLICATION APPROVED BY: Bldg: (Initial & Date) Special Conditions: Date Signature of Date Zoning: 3-)'A-o6 Date Z-,Oyx t<�' P, Orals Print Con ctor/Agef s Name Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date �JIY P ' �` `% KENNETH W. BRAY Contractor/Agent is ✓ Persomll I to NV QpMI,QSSION # DD499373 _ Produced Ill : December 14, 2009 1-1(0-3•NOTARY FI. Notary Discamt Aasx Co.. Utilities: FD: (Initial & Date) (Initial & Date) (Initial & Date) Page 1 of 1 DEBORAH BLANTON - Re: Big Boy's Restaurant Address Change From: MARY MUSE To: DEBORAH BLANTON Date: 1/17/2006 7:54 AM Subject: Re: Big Boy's Restaurant Address Change Debbie: Old: 1821 Rinehart Road New: 1831 Rinehart Road >>> DEBORAH BLANTON 1/13/2006 3:32:10 PM >>> Mary, what is the old and new address? Debbie >>> MARY MUSE 1/9/2006 9:26:06 AM >>> FYI: I have changed the address for Big Boy's Restaurant (per memo dated Dec. 27, 2005) in HTE. You may want to contact the contractor in regards to getting a new permit card with the new address so later on there are no complications or problems when inspections are performed. MM file://C:\Documents and Settings\BLANTOND\Local Settings\Temp\GW}0000LHTM 1/17/2006 �6P COUNTY OF SEMINOLE IMPACT FEE STATEMENT STATEMENT -NUMBER: 05100011 DATE: September 23, 2005 BUILDING APPLICATION #: 05-10001189 BUILDING PERMIT NUMBER: 05-10001189 UNIT ADDRESS: RINEHART ROAD 1821 28-19-30-506-0000-024 TRAFFIC ZONE:022 JURISDICTION: bib 4 SEC: TWP: RNG: SUF: PARCEL: SUBDIVISION: TRACT: PLAT BOOK: PLAT BOOK PAGE: BLOCK: LOT: OWNEERRDRESSNNAME: ^ APPLICANT NAME: TRV LICHTENWALD OF SANFORD ADDRESS: 1131 CLAY STREET SAN FRANCISCO o� LAND USE: RESTAURANT TYPE USE: WORK DESCRIPTION: CITY-SANFORD ------------------------------------------------ FEE BENEFIT RATE UNIT CALC UNIT TOTAL DUE TYPE DIST SCHED RATE UNITS TYPE ------------------------------------------------------- ROADS-ARTERIALS CO -WIDE Restaurant - Sit Down* ROADS -COLLECTORS NORTH Restaurant - Sit Down* FIRE RESCUE N/A LIBRARY N/A SCHOOLS N/A PARKS N/A LAW ENFORCE N/A DRAINAGE N/A 5.600 1000nsft 24,304.00 5.600 1000nsft 4,916.80 .00 .00 .00 .00 .00 00 AMOUNT DUE 29,220.80 STATEMENT , r RECEIVED BY: �11C SIGNATURE: (PLEASE PRINT NAME) DATE: NOTE TO RECEIVING SIGNATORY APPLICANT: FAILURE TO NOTIFY OWNER AND ENSURE TIMELY PAYMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR LIABILITY FOR THE FEE. *** DISTRIBUTION: 1-BLDG DEPT 3-APPLICANT 2-FINANCE 4-LAND MANAGEMENT ORD ORD 4,340.00 878.00 **NOTE** PERSONS ARE ADVISED THAT THIS IS A STATEMENT OF FEES DUE UNDER THE SEMINOLE COUNTY ROAD, FIRE/RESCUE, LIBRARY AND/OR EDUCATIONAL ISSUANCE OF A BUILDING PERMIT. PERSONS ARE ALSO ADVISED THAT ANY RIGHTS OF THE APPLICANT, OR OWNER, TO APPEAL THE CALCULATION OF ANY OF THE ABOVE MENTIONED IMPACT FEES MUST BE EXERCISED BY FILING A WRITTEN REQUEST WITHIN 45 CALENDAR DAYS OF THE RECEIVING SIGNATURE DATE ABOVE, BUT NOT LATER THAN CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY OR OCCUPANCY. THE REQUEST FOR REVIEW MUST MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE COUNTY LAND DEVELOPMENT CODE: COPIES OF RULES GOVERNING APPEALS MAY BE PICKED UP, OR REQUESTED, FROM THE PLAN IMPLEMENTATION OFFICE: 1101 EAST FIRST STREET, SANFORD FL, 32771; 407-665-7356. PAYMENT SHOULD BE MADE TO: SEMINOLE COUNTY OR CITY OF SANFORD BUILDING DEPARTMENT 1101 EAST FIRST STREET SANFORD, FL 32771 PAYMENT SHOULD BE BY CHECK OR MONEY ORDER, AND SHOULD REFERENCE THE COUNTY BUILDING PERMIT NUMBER AT THE.TOP LEFT OF THIS STATEMENT. ***THIS STATEMENT IS NO LONGER VALID IF A BUILDING PERMIT IS NOT*** ISSUED WITHIN 60 CALENDAR DAYS OF THE RECEIVING SIGNATURE DATE ABOVE * DETAIL OF CALCULATION AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST. CALL 407-665-7356. 4 �(j_Dc00 r This instrument prepared by and after recording return to: A. Guy Neff, Esq. Holland & Knight LLP 200 South Orange Avenue Suite 2600 Orlando, Florida 32801 Property Appraiser's Parcel I.D. Nos: 28-19-30-506-0000-024A SPECIAL WARRANTY DEED THIS SPECIAL WARRANTY DEED made the 14th day of December, 2005, by FLAGSHIP DEVELOPMENT LLC, a Florida limited company, whose address is 916 Highland Avenue, Orlando, FL 32803, and PMJS DEVELOPMENT, INC., a Florida corporation, whose address is 605 East Robinson Street, Suite 450, Orlando, FL 32801 (hereinafter referred to as "Grantor") to IRV H. LICHTENWALD, trustee of the IRV H. LICHTENWALD REVOCABLE TRUST DATED APRIL 1, 1994, a California Trust, whose post office address is 1131 Clay Street, San Francisco, California 94108, (hereinafter referred to as "Grantee"): (wherever used herein the terms "Grantor" and "Grantee" include all the parties to this instrument as so designated and the heirs, legal representatives and assigns of individuals, and the successors and assigns of corporations of said parties) WITNESSETH: THAT, for and in consideration of the sum of Ten Dollars ($10.00), and other good and valuable considerations, the receipt and sufficiency of which is acknowledged by Grantor, Grantor hereby grants, bargains, sells, conveys and confirms unto Grantee all that certain real property together with the improvements thereon (hereinafter collectively referred to as the "Real Property") in Seminole County, Florida, more particularly described as follows: SEE EXHIBIT "A" ATTACHED HERETO TOGETHER, with all the tenements, hereditaments and appurtenances thereto belonging or in anywise appertaining. TO HAVE AND TO HOLD, the same in fee simple forever. AND the Grantor hereby covenants with said Grantee that the Grantor is lawfully seized of said Real Property in fee simple; that the Grantor has good right and lawful authority to sell and convey said Real Property, and hereby warrants the title to said Real Property and will defend the same against the lawful claims of all persons claiming by, through or under the said Grantor; subject to taxes accruing subsequent to December 31, 2005, and those matters set forth on EXIIIBIT `B" attached to this Special Warranty Deed and incorporated herein by this reference. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said grantor has hereunto set their hands and seals the day and year first above written. Signed, sealed and delivered in our presence: �i Name: A. 6,w, Nafl rtl/ STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF ORANGE FLAGSHIP DEVELOPMENT, LLC, a Florid ra 1' ted bility company BY: THEODORE BOLIN Manager The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this /0—day of December, 2005, by THEODORE BOLIN as Manager of FLAGSHIP DEVELOPMENT, LLC, a Florida limited liability company, on behalf of the company, who is personally known to me or❑ has produced as identification. )A /2'-'�� r o No ub Print ame: N ary Public -State of Florida My Commission Expires: Commission No: # 3309755_vl ip tee.. �• _ * •• 3 #DDM0632 , '. /q9y • ... p�c �� {Signatures continued on foll 2 Name: W: 11 ; a.,u hr .lr, Name: (`sT Neff STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF ORANGE PMJS DEVELOPMENT, INC., a Florida c ation BY: PHILL C. HOLLIS President At The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this ho day of December, 2005, by PHILLIP C. HOLLIS as President of PMJS DEVELOPMENT, INC., a Florida corporation, on behalf of the corporation, who Wis personally known to me or ❑ has produced as identification. I L6'6� Signature of Notary Public (NOTARY SEAL) Print Name: Notary Public - State of Florida My Commission Expires: Commission No: # 3309755_vl A Guy Neff r MY COMMISSION # pp279903 EXPIRES :?4 7anuary 8, 2008 >,, 11 d •` WNDED THRU TROY FAIN INIIURANCF, INC E EXHIBIT "A" Tract C-2, FLAGSHIP PARK, according to the plat thereof, recorded in Plat Book 69, Page 1-3, Public Records of Seminole County, Florida. (Parcel C-2 #2356563_vl) # 3309755_v2 4 U EXHIBIT "B" Right of Way Agreement by and between Ernest A. Londenberg and Nonie I. Londenberg, his wife, and Florida Power & Light Company recorded June 7, 1957 in Official Records Book 124, Page 401; Supplement to Right of Way Agreement recorded August 26, 1958 in Official Records Book 183, Page 141, all of the Public Records of Seminole County, Florida. 2. Rinehart Road Perpetual Right of Way Easement by and between James W. McCall and Carole McCall, his wife, (Grantors) and Seminole County, a political subdivision of the State of Florida, (Grantee) recorded August 13, 1991 in Official Records Book 2325, Page 1685, Public Records of Seminole County, Florida. 3. City of Sanford Development Order recorded March 22, 2000 in Official Records Book 3820, Page 464, Public Records of Seminole County, Florida. 4. City of Sanford Development Order recorded March 16, 2005 in Official Records Book 5650, Page 1181, Public Records of Seminole County, Florida. 5. Cross Access and Drainage Easement between Flagship Development, LLC and PMJS Development, Inc. and D R Horton, Inc., recorded in Official Records Book 6003, Page 524, Public Records of Seminole County, Florida. 6. Declaration and Grant of Easements between PMJS Development, Inc. and Flagship Development, LLC, recorded in Official Records Book 6003, Page 540, Public Records of Seminole County, Florida. # 3309755_v2 '61 RECEIVED CITY l OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION Permit 0(-0 U C T ® 6 2009 # : Date: Job Address: IM li�Yi� � V fRn Description of Work: kyw Cy?6¢¢l!�y�i of o g i 6o sf fpPJ`Jfamoffi Historic District: Zoning: a6 Value of Work: Sr S, GG 0 Permit Type: Building ►/ Electrical Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Calc. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Q Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial ✓ Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Industrial Total Square Footage: Construction Type: ,n # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required for other than X) Parcel #: 2&' tg - ow -- +A— C Q (Attach Proof ofOwnership& Legal Description) ,0 Owners Name & Address:. w 0 c I1 e_P to 1 d n 1 I 1 �J ( Gl ar/ � � ( 7l t y / !" (�t�fXf.75(10 , 0101 14-1 0) _ rMsl 4;,51- igov, Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect Address: Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this this county, andAhere may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water man of r it is veri at'o I ill no fy the o ner of the property of the requirements of I � It a! "1 JA(M � '� F� �"I l � l5/l%� ignature•.,a LY I: may be found in the public records of cts, state agencies, qr federal agencies. FS 713. Date rEOF �0OP Bonded Thru Budget Notary Services iJE GRAVE , OOMMISSION # DD 164280 Owner/Agent is Personall own to Me or C ge f)(i"sIR "iisu 101V n to M r Produced II :1 Eedn.�Otat J rr APPLICATION APPROVED BY: Bldg: � Z I�+ tilities: �� Y �� FDw 1 (Initial & ate) nitial & Date (Initia & Date) (Initial & Date) Special Conditions: DID` IWACT FEES 0e3 CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION Permit # : 0 6 - S111)-S Job Address: I DI% /� � %� Date: C;� — / (1. — D (11 Description of Work: l_ O K% S Z cTo w D L A e ,,.., F2S74 ,t ,4,Ae3l Historic District: Zoning: Value of Work: $ %. -S-?;) d.00 Permit Type: Building Electrical Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Electrical: New Service - # of AMPS Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Cale. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixture3 9 # of Water & Sewer Lines / # of Gas Lines _/ Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair - Residential or Commercial _ Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Industrial Total Square Footage: Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required for other than X) Parcel #: Owners Name & Address: (Attach Proof of Ownership & Legal Description) —�� Phone: Contractor Name & Address: `J INk P � ( o O t o �- 0 r-C 1'6 :3lZ, ?0? -- State License Number: C C© S' 7 5 YD %- 2-31-1 61572- � ZFZ 3 7 Q(oC tact Person: .,J 6 2 � t PAC, /o Phone: �� % %a Z - Fo 3 o Phone &Fax on Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect/Engineer: Phone: Address: Fax: Application is hereby made to obtain a pennit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a pen -nit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the properly of the Signature of Owner/Agent Date Print Owner/Agent's Name Signature of Notary -State of Florida Owner/Agent is Personally Known to Me or Produced ID APPLICATION APPROVED BY: Bldg: (Initial & Date) Special Conditions: s of Florida Lien,"w, FA-T13. Signatui ofContract r gent U Date Print C tractor/Aeent`s Name Date Signature ofNotaly-Statc off„Widii fir /+1� I�t� Date \4 D❑ 18E-351 Conl aclor/Agcnt is Personally Known to Me a' Produced ID FQ Zoning: Utilities: FD: (Initial & Date) (Initial & Dale) (Initial & Date) I CITY OF SANFORD FIRE DEPARTMENT FEES FOR SERVICES PHONE # 407-302-1091 * FAX #: 407-330-5677 DATE: PERMIT #: QL — b @, 7 BUSINESS NAME / PROJECT: ADDRESS: S__ �_ P—L% —+— ryA PHONE NOC_ .%NCO.: (��1 C3—Z Can�— ?(a C/ CONST. INSP. [ ] C / O INSP.:[ ] REINSPECTION [ ] PLANS REVIEW Yy F. A. [ ] F.S. [ ] HOOD [ ] PAINT BOOTH [ ]� BURN PERJ�IIT [ ] TENT PERMIT ,t ] TANK PERMIT (] OTHER [ f}x e TOTAL FEES: $ ©� (PER UNIT SEE BELOW) COMMENTS: Address / Bldg. # / Unit # Square Footage Fees per Bldg. / Unit 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Fees must be paid to Sanford Building Department, 300 N. Park Ave., Sanford, FI. 32771 Phone # -407- 330-5656. Proof of Payment must be made to Fire Prevention division before any further services can take place. I certify that the above is true and correct and that I will comply with all applicable codes and ordinances of the City of Sanford, Florida. Sanford Fire Preleention Division Applicant's Sign August 16, 2005 Reference: Iry H. Lichtenwald 1131 Clay Street San Francisco, CA 94108-1405 Big Boy Restaurant 11 ags111r D[nul., Sanford To Whom It May Concern: OCT 8 2 'nterplan CCC Please accept this letter as authorization for Interplan LLC, to act as agent in correspondence and representation of all approval and permitting matters required for Big Boy Restaurants at the location referenced above. If you have any questions, please contact me at (415) 931-7983. Sincerely, ON I Iry H. Lichtenwald Owner Subscribed and sworn to before me this,2Sr N day of Notary Public wm'�A Seal SHUBERT YEE _ Commission # 1349347 Notary Public - Califomia My Commission Expires: Aflelt 2q �e�� Z sir Fr nciaco County My Gc-wn. Expires Air 29, 2(JU6'. C:\Docmrents and SettLtgs\IMLocal Setthigs\Temporary Intemet Files\ContentlE5\C9I789MI\authorization lettendoc 1 Plans Review Sheet Date: October 13, 2005 Business Address: 1831 Rinehart Road Assembly Business Name: Big Boy PH (407) 645-5008Fax (407) 645-5008 Contractor: . Unknown at time of submittal Architect: Interplan Ph. (407) 645-5008 Fax (407) 629-9124 Reviewed[ ]3.€w(114T '�1eT1�, � Rejected [ ] Reviewed by: Timothy Robles, Fire Protection Inspector/Plans Examiner Comment: Plans reviewed as Assembly Occupancy. FD reserves right to require applicable code requirements if occupancy use changes. Hood system and Hood and Duct will require a liquid weld test prior to hanging on wall or ceiling per N.F.P.A #96, CALL (407) 302-2520, PRIOR TO READING THESE PLANS. Additional plans and permits required for • Hood and Duct work • Fire Suppression System .................................................................................................................................................................................................... . ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... . p`:rtinGali €dvze<: <:eaci ::.' >eato >l>:;:...n......... ......::::.::::..............::.:::. .I............:::::.............:::::::::::::::::::::.....::.p...... : • Sign stating "Occupancy load 192 see blue prints in the lobby prior to building final. 1.1 Application — New Assembly area 1.2 Mixed — N/A 1.3 Special Definitions — N/N 1.4 Classification of Occupancy — Assemblies, 1.5 Classification of Hazard of Contents — Class `B" 1.6 Minimum Construction — (shall comply with Sanford Building Department) 1 2.2 Means of Egress Components — O.K. three (3) 2.3 Capacity of Egress — O.K. 2.4 Number of Exits — O.K. Three In assembly area one (1) in kitchen 2.5 Arrangement of Egress — O.K., will field verify 2.6 Travel Distance — O.K. 2.8 Illumination of Means of Egress —will field verify One candela power at the feet 2.7 Discharge from Exits — will field verify 2.9 Emergency Lighting —will field verify 2.10 Marking of Means of Egress — will field verify 2.11 Special Features — O.K. 3.1 Protection of Vertical Openings — N/N 3.2 Protection from Hazards — N/N 3.3 Interior Finish — Class "A& B" 3.4 Detection, Alarm and Communications Systems — as per NFPA 72 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. . .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. . 3 Epgus>qng Re:gir rants rise 1'1;1;. prpvi fr�ur�Yng��s one 1 K Rated in kitchen, one 10 pound CO 2 in electrical room, two (2) 4A 60BC fire extinguishers in assembly area 3.6 Corridors — N/A - 4 Special Provisions - 5 Building Services 5.1 Utilities — as per LSC 9-1 5.2 HVAC — as per LSC 9-2 5.3 Elevators, Escalators, Conveyors (4A-47) — N/A 5.4 Rubbish Chutes, Incinerators, and Laundry Chutes — N/A Sanford City Code — Chapter 9 Fire Sprinklers: Monitoring: 2 3'> a FIRE PREVENTION DIVISION 300 N. Park Ave., Sanford, Fl. 32771 / P. O. Box 1788, Sanford, Fl. 32772 (407 302-2520 / FAX (407) 302-2526 Other: NFPA 1 3-5.1 Fire Lanes — Required see site plane 3-6.1 Key Box — Required see application _....__ _ .............................. .........................e.....�.......................a.....c...l............. 3-7.1 Bldg. Address Number Posted and Legible — ::� :::( .:..:. ...G..... .............::::<.:............... ................................................... ................................................... .................... August 16, 2005 Reference Iry H. Lichtenwald 1131 Clay Street San Francisco, CA 94108-1405 Big Boy Restaurant Flagship Park, Sanford To Whom It May Concern: Please accept this letter as authorization for Interplan LLC, to act as agent in correspondence and representation of all approval and permitting matters required for Big Boy Restaurants at the location referenced above. If you have any questions, please contact me at (415) 931-7983. Sincerely, ; � � �'Zle Iry H. Lichtenwald Owner Subscribed and sworn to before me this y of day 200 6 S Notary Publ Y44ujp�-� eal 0 My Commission Expires: 3 ( ( I b ( KENDRA ME— ' MY COMMISSION # DD 069338 �• EXPIRES: March 1 2006 (3onded Thru Notary Public Undam tars F:W-ABigBoy\2005.0097\Correspondences\authorization letter.doc Seminole County Property Appraiser Get Information by Parcel Number Page 1 of 1 PARCEL DETAIL 1.A 3A s3.03A 4A 5.A 1.0 3.H 4.A DAviD Jo HH5om, CFA, ASA 3 1IA I S - ;. Tl; TP' 5.0 PROPERTY 2.0 3 F3 1 p APPRAISER za.A— 3 4 SEMINOLE COUNTY FL. 1101 E. FI RsT sT 3 7 G 24 . B 5ANFORD,FL32771-1468 407-665-7506 8 25.A . 2006 WORKING VALUE SUMMARY GENERAL Value Method: Market Parcel Id: 28-19-30-506-0000-024A Number of Buildings: 0 Owner: FLAGSHIP DEV LLC & Depreciated Bldg Value: $0 Own/Addr: PMJS DEV INC Depreciated EXFT Value: $0 Mailing Address: 605 E ROBINSON ST STE 450 Land Value (Market): $593,286 City,State,ZipCode: ORLANDO FL 32801 Value Ag: $0 Va Land Va Property Address: 1821 RINEHART RD SANFORD 32771 Value: $593,2$0 Just/Market 86 Facility Name: Assessed Value (SOH): $593,286 Tax District: S1-SANFORD Exempt Value: $0 Exemptions: Taxable Value: $593,286 Dor: 10-VAC GENERAL-COMMERCI Tax Estimator SALES 2005 VALUE SUMMARY Deed Date Book Page Amount Vac/Imp Qualified 2005 Tax Bill Amount: $11,839 WARRANTY DEED 10/2004 05511 1208 $2,701,200 Vacant No 2005 Taxable Value: $593,286 DOES NOT INCLUDE NON -AD VALOREM Find Sales within this DOR Code ASSESSMENTS LEGAL DESCRIPTION PLATS: Pick... 3 LAND LEG PT OF LOT 24 DESC AS BEG 15 FT E & Land Assess Land Unit Land 79.79 FT N OF W 1/4 COR RUN N 186.37 FT Method Frontage Depth Units Price Value E 547.12 FT S 131.54 FT S SQUARE FEET 0 0 98,881 6.00 $593,286 63 DEG 06 MIN 27 SEC W 121.72 FT W 438.49 FT TO BEG (2.27 AC) SMITHS 3RD SUBD PB 1 PG 86 NOTE: Assessed values shown are NOT certified values and therefore are subject to change before being finalized for ad valorem tax purposes. *** Ifyou recently purchased a homesteaded property your next ear's property tax will be based on Just/Market value. http://www. scpafl.org/pls/web/re_web.seminole_county_title?PARCEL=2819305060000O... 10/4/2005 Map Output Page 1 of 1 SEtiW,,F GQIVI7'1tF1. ' , DAV1DJ G A,, Q� a %b STAT1`JNL-L TR4G "f �s sD � A TF14 B 99.A� - s$.o DapnJo soMtGFA,ASA . TR D � 5.0 � PROPERTY 2 g ��{ �� 1 5C TRACT G 99.0 ` APPRAISER 1 gA 2 a 4 K 2 SEMINOLE COUNTY FL 6B = f101E.FII�TST _ 9MIF0RD, FL 32771.1 d88 407685.7508 �f .A 1.0 3A 3 3.0 ' 4.0 5A 6.0 3.J 4.A 4 3 1A 4 5 Legend `TRACT L 5.0 3.1 4.8 6.A Selected Features TRACT B 2.0 3.G County Boundary 24.0 23.0 sireels 3 249 23 22 urology 37G 24.B 1004/ Subdivision Lines EjParcels Parcel Anna 25 2$ 27 � 25.0 5 ' ;37HF25. 27.0 TRAGT D 40.0 39.A�-I I� 39.D 39.B 'F 37E f"I F 37F �JTRAGT E '�. 37.A s TRAG'T A (-r "I ' 42.0 SeminoleCountY_ Prop LYaPPrm�r-CopyryhijCjN1062DD9 Rec Parcel Owner Owner Addr city State I Zi 1 12819305060000024A IFLAGSHIP DEV LLC & 1605 E ROBINSON ST STE 450 JORLANDO JFL 1328011 http://simon03. scpafl.org/servleticom.esri.esrimap.Esrimap?ServiceName=overview small... 10/4/2005 INTERPLAN 1,112 933 LEE ROAD, FIRST FLOOR ORLANDO, FL 32810 PH 407.645.5008 FX 407.629.9124 TRANSMITTAL This message contains confidential Information only for the use of the person named below and may contain communications protected by the architect -client privilege. If you have received this facsimile In error, you are hereby notified that any distribution or copying of this facsimile is prohibited and you are requested to notify the sender Immediately by telephone and to return the original message to us at the above address. COMPANY NAME: City of Sanford Planning and Community PROJECT#: 02005.0097 Development COMPANY ADDRESS: 300 North Park Avenue DATE: October 4, 2005 Sanford, FL 32772 SHIPPING VIA: Hand Carry ATTN: Commercial Plans Reviewer PHONE #: 407-330-5657 PROJECT NAME: Big Boy E-MAIL: SUBJECT: Building Submittal Date Description 10/05/05 Two (2) sets of signed and sealed plans 10/05/06 Building Application 10/05/06 Property Appraiser's Card 10/05/06 Letter of Authorization Enclosed please find the required materials needed for the building submittal for the above referenced project. If you have any further questions or need any additional answers, please feel free to contact me at 407-645-5008. Thank you. Warm Regards, YOUR NAME: Megan Gilbert CC RECIPIENTS: I. Lichtenwald, T. Gee, M. Ransom, File ARCHITECTURE . ENGINEERING . PROJECT MANAGEMENT . INTERIOR DESIGN � AA003420 . CA 8660 ORLANDO ■ DALLAS ■ CHICAGO ■ ATLANTA development services for restaurant, retail, hospitality and commercial programs ■ www.interplanorlando.com F:�4-J\BigBoy\2005.0097\Transmittals\050097tra 14.doc Project Name: R) Owner/Contact Person:_ Address: t r� 1) TYPE OF DEVELOPMENT: Res idential ❑ Non -Residential LSJ : Single Family ❑ Multi -Family ❑ Commercial; Industrial . 2) TYPE OF ITNIT (s ) 3) TOTAL NUMBER OF UNITS or.BUILDINGS: U 4) TYPE OF UTILITY CONNECTION: a Meter: Individual n Master ❑ Tap Required �❑ Tap Existing ❑ ,�— ommon El Tap Existing ❑ b) Sewer Tap:. Individual � C ❑ Tap Required 5 WATER METER SIZE: %-inch ❑ 1-inch ❑ 1 '/z-inch ❑ 2-inch ❑ Supplied by Contractor 6) AWS METER: None Individual ❑ Master ❑ Supplied by �1 (Alternative water supply) Meter Meter Contractor a Meter Size: 3/<-inch 1-inch 1 %2-inch ❑ 2-inch ❑ Supplied by ❑ ❑ ❑ Contractor f�l— 0 of ' SUMMARY OF IMPACT FEES METER SET and TAP CHARGES Water impact fees........ $ 9/57gy COMMENTS: Sewer impact fees........ $ v� , Water Meter set .......... $ Water Meter set and tap $ Meter deposit and S/C.- $ Sewer tap ................ $ AWS Meter Set .......$ AWS Meter Tap & Set..$ Phone: TOTAL DUE .......... $ Signature - Utility Director or Engineer Date: h �% Page 1 of 2 City of Sanford Utility Department Updated: July, 2005 P.O. Box 1788, Sanford, Fl. 32772 Phone (407) 330-5641 City Of Sanford Utility Department DEVELOPMENT FEE WORKSHEET (cont.) Water System Impact Fees Equivalent Residential Connection (ERC) - 309 Gallons Per Day (GPD) Residential $1193/Unit - Single family structure, or multi -family unit containing three (3) bedrooms or more. $894.50/Unit - Multi -family unit or Mobile Home unit containing less than three (3) bedrooms. (This category is based on judgment/assumption, estimation that such family units on average require 75% - 225 GPD single family unit.) Commercial — Industrial.— Institutional $1193 /ERU - Fixture unit schedule from Southern Plumbing Code will be used. One ERU will be charged for connection and up to twenty (2) fixture units. For projects having more than twenty (20) fixture units, the Impact Fee will be determined by increments.. of.25% based on multiples of five (5) fixture units .above 'the ;twenty (20) fixture unit base for the first ERU. (Example: twenty-five (25) fixture units will be rated as 1.25 ERU; twenty-six (26) fixture units will be rated as 1.5ERU.) Sewer System Impact Fees Equivalent Residential Connections = 300 Gallons Per Day (GPD) Residential Residentia -Single family structure or multi -family unit containing three (3) bedrooms or, more. $2016/Unit - Multi -family unit or Mobile Home unit containing less than three (3) bedrooms. (This category is based on judgment/assumption/estimation that. such family units on,average require 75% of water and sewer service of an average single family unit.) Commercial — Industrial.— Institutional $2688/ERU - Fixture unit schedule from Southern Plumbing Code will be used. One ERiJ'wiil be charged for connection and up to twenty. (20) fixture units. For projects having more than twenty (20) fixture Units the Impact Fee will be increments of 25% based on multiples of five (5) fixture uniMabove the twenty (20) :fixture: unit .base for the first ERU. (Example: twenty-five (25) fixture units will be rated as 1.25 ERU; twenty-six (26) fixture units will be rated as 1.5 ERU.) TABLE 709.1 DRAINAGE FIXTURE UNITS FOR FIXTURES A1-41) Unv rrzo M SIZE FIXTURE TYPE AGE FIX VALUE AS LOAD FACTORS OF TRAP inches Automatic clothes washers, commercial 3 22 Automatic clothes washers, residential 2 Bathroom group consisting of water closet, lavatory, bidet and 6 - bathtub or shower 2 1 ''/2 Bathtub (with or without overhead shower or whirlpool attachments) 2 1 '/, Bidet 2 1 '/2 Combination sink and tray 1 1 ,/. Dental Lavatory 1 1 '/, Dental unit of cus idor 2 1 %2 Dishwashing machine` domestic '/2 1 'h Drinkingfountain 0 2 Emergency floor drain 2 2, Footnote' Standard Floor drains 2 1 '/2 Kitchen sink, domestic Z 1:'/2 . Kitchen sink, domestic with food waste indei.andlor.dishwasher, : . i /2 Laundry tray 1 or 2 compartments) 2 1 1 '/• LavatoryS 2 2 Shower compartment, domestic 1 %2 Sink 2 4 Footnote Urinal 2e Footnote Urinal, 1 gallon per flush or less 2 1 %2 Wash sink circular or multiple) each set of faucets Water closet, flush-o-meter tank, p2blic or'private 4c Footnote Water closet, private installation 4 6 Footnote Footnote Water closet, public installation Fnr Sr. 1 inch = 25.4 min, I gallon = 3. 785 L. ' For traps larger than 2 inches, trench type drains and floor sinks use Table 709.2. A showerhead over a bathtub or whirlpool bathtub attachments does not increase the drainage fixture unit value. See section 709.2 through 709.4 for methods of computing unit value of fixtures not listed in Table 709.1 or for rating of devices intermittent flows. a Trap size will be consistent with the fixture outlet size. `For the purpose of computing loads on building drains and sewers, water closets or urinals shall not be rated at a lower drainage fixture unit unless the lower values are confirmed by testing. For the purpose of computing loads on building drains and sewers, water closets or urinals shall not be rated at a lower drainage fixture unit unless the lower values are confirmed by testing. TABLE 709.2 DRAINAGE FIXTURE UNITS FOR FIXTURE DRAINS OR TRAPS FIXTURE DRAIN OR TRAP SIZE (inches) DRAINAGE FIXTURE UNIT VALUE 1 '/+ 1 1 vs 2 2 3 ti% 23 = 5 5t6 acx1.— DlQ_A, ►us j,iXf five 1l COMMERCIAL.— INDUSTRIAL —INSTITUTIONAL FEE CALCULATION: Total Fixture Units (F.U.): Total ERU(s) : Total F.U.1 S-t divide by 20 = S_ ERU(s) (F.U. / 20 = ERU) Water Impact Fee: $1193 x $ ERU(s) _ $ C6 4 i 04 in SewerImpactFee: $2688 x S ERU(s) = $ 2-1, _ D4 Si��CS ZqeS- 15 F.U. Updated: July, 2005 Page 2 or 2 Standard Plumbing Code 1997 10 Permit No. _ 0 5 -10 0 0118 9 State of Florida County of Seminole �•u nni�.o ��i. �+iigj VVL/VVL NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT :s Tax Folio No. 28-19 30-506-0000-0? rY' (Parcel. Id#) ±a The undersigned hereby gives notice that improvement will be made to certain real property, and in accordance with Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, the following information is provided in this Notice of Commencement. L . il{ rfl 1. Description of p property: (legal description of the property and street address if available) 1$ 21 Rinehart -, Road Sanford, F L . Legal l)—Osrrit'�a; L FP OF IC>P 24 DFSC Ag BqC 15 FT E & 79.79 FT N OF "� 1. 1/ 4 (IR RUN N 186.37 FT E 547.12 FT S 131.54 FT S :;r.•i 2. General description of improvement: Construction of a Big Boy Restaurant 3. Owner information ..; - a. Name and address Mr. Iry Lichtenwald 1131 ClayStreet San Francisco CA 94108-1405 b. Interest in property wn e r c. Name and address of fee simple titleholder (if other than Owner) N A Contractor a, Name and address C.W. Hayes Construction Company PO Box 621294 Oviedo_. FL 3276.2-1.2 b.Phone number 0-7--S 66 -15 6 4 Fax number 4 0 5. Surety a. Name and address The Ohio Casualty Insurance Companv .4 -366-3835 M .n:l. 9450 Seward Road Fairfield, OR 45014 b. Phone number 415 - 9 31- 7 9 8 3 Fax number ; c. Amount of bond 6. Lender a. Name and address _ N / A b. Phone number Fax number ;. 7. Persons within the State of Florida designated by Owner upon whom notices or other documents may be served as �p provided by Section 713.13(t)(a)7., Florida Statutes: a. Name and address N / A rn b. Phone number Fax number 8. In addition to himself or herself, Owner designates N / A of , ' to receive a copy of the Lienor's Notice as provided in Section 713.13(1)(b), Florida Statutes - a. Phone number Fax number :XI r 9. Expiration date of notice of commencement (the expiration date is 1 year from the da a of re rdin ss a different date is specified) Iti:+ Signature of OwnerCD f�'L-� Mr.Iry Lichtenwald worn t (orr umed) and ubscribed before me this V day of (' 20 b J' L Personally Known X OR Produced Identification Type of Identificatio uced '0�1 - �V i ature of Notary Public, State of Florida 4 CERTIFIED Copy' MORSE MARYANNE �� r 7 CLERK OF CIRCUIT COURT 17 S M . E COUNTY, F]-ORID. ', Co ission Expires: January 26, 2008 THIS INSTRUMENT PREPARED BY: ........By E...........0................UJAME R. NAME CER( :=? q •��"",•, Comm# DO0270814 HT � � *�= E)pIres 1rz6n008 e ADDR. a c Bonded thru (800)432-4254 �—a Fr �Z'/ (, 1 DEC r 200 Florida Notary Assn Inc v v ( L . .......................................I ..... I THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS Bond No.: 3-882-264 Executed in 2 Counterparts nom AIA Document A311 Performance Bond KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that C W Hayes Construction Company ---- 821-Executive Drive -- - - -- Oviedo, Florida 32765 (407) 366-1564 as Principal, hereinafter called Contractor, and, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company 9450 Seward Road Fairfield, Ohio 45014 (513) 603-2400 as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto Mr. Irv. Lichtenwald, Big Boy Restaurant 1131 Clay Street San Francisco, CA 94108-1405 (415) 931-7983 as Obligee, hereinafter called Owner, in the amount of ONE MILLION FOUR HUNDRED EIGHTY NINE THOUSAND NINE HUNDRED FORTY EIGHT AND 00/100 (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Contractor) (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety) (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner) Dollars (---$1,489,948.00--- ), for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Contractor has by written agreement dated December 07, 2005 entered into a contract with Owner for (Here insert full name and address and description of project) Big Boy Sanford, Lot 2 Rinehart Road, Sanford, FL; scope of work - construction of a new restaurant. in accordance with Drawings and Specifications prepared by (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Architect) Interplan LLC, 933 Lee Road, I" Floor, Orlando, FL 32810 which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract. AIA DOCUMENT A311 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND- • AIA ® 1 FEBRUARY 1970 ED. • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 ORIdA 417 CenterPointe Circle, Suite 1701 Altamonte Springs, FL 32701 S RE s (407) 786-7770 I NdINC. PERFORMANCE BOND NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. Whenever Contractor shall be, and declared by Owner to be in default under the Contract, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly 1) Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, or defaults under the contract or contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the contract price; but not exceeding, including other costs and damages for which the Surety may be liable hereunder, the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the contract price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. 2) Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in Any suit under this bond must be instituted before accordance with its terms and conditions, and upon de- the expiration of two (2) years from the date on which termination by Surety of the lowest responsible bidder; final payment under the Contract falls due. or, if the Owner elects, upon determination by the Owner and the Surety jointly of the lowest responsible No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, the use of any person or corporation other than the make .__available. -._ -as ___ Work- _ progresses---(even--Owner named herein or the heirs,- executors, adminis- -- though there should be a default or a succession of trators or successors of the Owner. THIS BOND IS GIVEN TO COMPLY WITH SECTION 255.05 OR SECTIONS 713.23 AND 713.245 FLORIDA STATUTES, AND ANY ACTION INSTITUTED BY A CLAIMANT UNDER THIS BOND FOR PAYMENT MUST BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOTICE AND TIME LIMITATION PROVISIONS IN SECTION 255.05(2) OR SECTIONS 713.23 AND 713.245 FLORIDA STATUTES. jz THE ATTACHED TERRORISM RIDER FORMS AND BECOMES A PART OF THIS BOND' Signed and sealed this 20th day of December, 2005 . 14 ?'�ajwu (Witness) C W Hayes Construction Company .'y apt 'r) (Principal) .(Seal)'' The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company � pry (Surety) (Seal) III I II ll U, (,IiCEVc (Witness) art . `ll ; fa AS Deborah Mahl, (Title) Attorney -in -Fact;& Florida Licensed Resident Agent9=. Inquiries: (407) 786-7770 AIA DOCUMENT A311 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND. • AIA ® 2 FEBRUARY 1970 ED.. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 N.Y. AVE-, N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 THIS BOND ONLY COVERS CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, SUB -SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND LABORERS TO THE EXTENT THE CONTRACTOR HAS BEEN PAID FOR THE LABOR, SERVICES OR MATERIALS PROVIDED BY SUCH PERSONS. THIS BOND DOES NOT PRECLUDE YOU FROM SERVING A NOTICE TO OWNER OR FILING A CLAIM OF LIEN ON THIS PROJECT. THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS Bond No.: 3-882-562 Executed in 2 Counterparts A/A Document A311 Conditional Labor and Material Payment Bond THIS BOND IS ISSUED SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH PERFORMANCE BOND IN FAVOR OF THE OWNER CONDITIONED ON THE FULL AND FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that C W Hayes Construction Company 821 Executive Drive Oviedo, Florida 32765 (407) 366-1564 as Principal, hereinafter called Principal, and, The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company 9450 Seward Road Fairfield, Ohio 45014 (513) 603-2400 as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound untc Mr. Irv. Lichtenwald, Big Boy Restaurant 1131 Clay Street San Francisco, CA 94108-1405 (415) 931-7983 (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Contractor) (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety) (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner) as Obligee, hereinafter called Owner, for the use and benefit of claimants as herein below defined, in the amount of ONE MILLION FOUR HUNDRED EIGHTY NINE THOUSAND NINE HUNDRED FORTY EIGHT AND 00/100 (Here insert a sum equal to at least one-half of the contract price) Dollars (----- $1,489,948.00----- ), for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has by written agreement date December 07, 2005 entered into a contract with Owner for (Here insert full name and address and description of project) Big Boy Sanford, Lot 2 Rinehart Road, Sanford, FL; scope of work - construction of a new restaurant. in accordance with Drawings and Specifications prepared by (Here insert full name and address or legal title of Architect) Interplan LLC, 933 Lee Road, I" Floor, Orlando, FL 32810 which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract. AIA DOCUMENT A311 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND- • AIA 0 3 FEBRUARY 1970 ED, • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 ORIdA i 417 CenterPointe Circle, Suite 1701 S RETV Altamonte Springs, FL 32701 (407)786-7770 Nds INC. LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if Principal shall promptly make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and material used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the fol- lowing conditions: 1. A claimant is defined as one having a direct con- tract with the Principal or with a Subcontractor of the Principal for labor, material, or both, used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Contract, labor and material being construed to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil gasoline, telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the Contract. 2. The above named Principal and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with the Owner that every claimant as herein defined, who has not been paid in full before the expiration of a period of ninety (90) days after the date on which the last of such claimant's work or labor was done or performed, or materials were furnished by such claimant, may sue on this bond for the use of such claimant, prosecute the suit to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant, and have execution thereon. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit. 3. No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by —_--any claimant: a) Unless claimant, other than one having a direct contract with the Principal, shall have given written notice to any two of the following: The Principal, the Owner, or the surety above named, within ninety (90) days after such claimant did or performed the last of the work or labor, or furnished the last of the materials for which said claim is made, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished, or for whom the work or labor was done or performed. Such notice shall be served by mailing the same by registered mail or certified mail, postage prepaid, in an envelope ad- dressed to the Principal, Owner or Surety, at any place where an office is regularly maintained for the trans- action of business, or served in any manner in which legal process may be served in the state in which the aforesaid project is located, save that such service need not be made by a public officer. b) After the expiration of one (1) year following the date on which Principal ceased Work on said Contract, it being understood, however, that if any limitation em- bodied in this bond is prohibited by any law controlling the construction hereof such limitation shall be deemed to be amended so as to be equal to the minimum period of limitation permitted by such law. c) Other than in a state court of competent jurisdiction in and for the county or other political subdivision of the state in which the Project, or any part thereof, is situated, or. in the United States District -Court for. the. district in which the Project, or any part thereof, is sit- uated, and not elsewhere. 4. The amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or payments made in good faith hereunder, inclusive of the payment by Surety of mechanics' liens which may be filed of record against said improvement, whether or not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this bond. THIS BOND IS GIVEN TO COMPLY WITH SECTION 255.05 OR SECTIONS 713.23 AND 713.245 FLORIDA STATUTES, AND ANY ACTION INSTITUTED BY A CLAIMANT UNDER THIS BOND FOR PAYMENT MUST,BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOTICE AND TIME LIMITATION PROVISIONS IN SECTION 255105(2)gOR SECTIONS 713.23 AND 713.245 FLORIDA STATUTES. ,, � cif ''•. THE ATTACHED TERRORISM RIDER FORMS AND BECOMES A PART OF THIS BOND Signed and sealed this 20th da �?J L L21 (Witness) (WitneAg) y of December, 200.8 e f C W Hayes Construction Company ( rincipal) (Seal),' itle The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company (Surety) el .-J e orah Mahl, (Title) Attorn -in-Fact Florida Licensed Resident Agent Inquiries: (407) 786-7770 ` .%; tti`•w •r,. AIA DOCUMENT A311 • PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND- • AIA FEBRUARY 1970 ED. • THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D.C. 20006 ASWROW The member companies of ®hio Casualty Group r G H I G CASUALTY GROUP 9450 Seward Road, Fairfield, Ohio 45014 www.ocas.com BOND NUMBER: 3-882-264 DISCLOSURE NOTICE OF TERRORISM INSURANCE COVERAGE After the September 11, 2001 collapse of the World Trade Center, some insurance and reinsurance companies excluded coverage for terrorist events from their policies. The economy was affected, to the extent that $15 billion dollars of new construction was cancelled or delayed. As an economic aid, the Federal Government has enacted the Terrorism.. Risk Insurance Act of 2002. As part of the act, we are required to notify you that subject to the terms and conditions as stated in your applicable bond forms, coverage for losses sustained by acts of terrorism is already included in your current bond. Effective November 26, 2002, under your existing bond, losses caused by certified acts of terrorism as defined in the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002 would be partially reimbursed by the Federal Government under a formula established by federal law. Under this formula, the Federal Government pay 90% of covered terrorism losses exceeding the statutorily established deductible paid by the insurance company providing the coverage: _ _ _. Under the current bond, that portion of your premium that is attributable to coverage for acts of terrorism is $0. We strongly urge you to contact your independent insurance agent if you have any questions regarding this matter. r. CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY THE OHIO CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WEST AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY No. 36-791 Know A7.1 Men by These presents : That THE OHIO CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY, an Ohio Corporation, and WEST AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, an Indiana Corporation, in pursuance of authority granted by Article VI, Section 7 of the By -Laws of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company and Article VI, Section I of West American Insurance Company, do hereby nominate, constitute and appoint: Jeffrey W. Reich, Susan L. Reich, Kim E. Niv, Teresa L. Robinson, Leslie M. Donahue, Patricia L. Slaughter, J. Gregory Mac Kenzie, Walter N. Myers or Deborah Mahl of Altamonte Springs, Florida its true and lawful agent (s) and attorney (s)-in-fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, and as its act and deed any and all BONDS, UNDERTAKINGS, and RECOGNIZANCES, not exceeding in any single instance SIX MILLION ($6,000,000.00) DOLLARS, excluding, however, any bond(s) or undertaking(s) guaranteeing the payment of notes and interest thereon And the execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Companies, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the Companies at their administrative offices in Hamilton, Ohio, in their own proper persons. The authority granted hereunder supersedes any previous authority heretofore granted the above named attomey(s)-in-fact. In WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned officer of the said The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company and West American Insurance Company has hereunto subscribed his name and affixed the Corporate Seal of each Company this 19th day of March, 2003. \,tY INSy `',11N9�q� „J. ...o tvp•' �rP of SEAL i= �: SEAL �; Sam Lawrence, Assistant Secretary STATE OF OHIO, COUNTY OF BUTLER On this 19th day of March, 2003 before the subscriber, a Notary Public of the State of Ohio, in and for the County of Butler, duly commissioned and qualified, came Sam Lawrence, Assistant Secretary of THE OHIO CASUALTY INSURANCE COMPANY and WEST AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, to me personally known to be the individual and officer described in, and who executed the preceding instrument, and he acknowledged the execution of the same, and being by me duly sworn deposeth and saith, that he is the officer of the Companies aforesaid, and that the seals affixed to the preceding instrument are the Corporate Seals of said Companies, and the said Corporate Seals and his signature as officer were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the said Corporations. -- - -- - - IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my Official Seal at the City of Hamilton, State of Oliio, the day and year first above written. dp„Ilmllpr ��rNpnRtt1M"- Notary Public in and for County of Butler, State of Ohio My Commission expires August 6, 2007. This power of attorney is granted under and by authority of Article VI, Section 7 of the By -Laws of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company and Article VI, Section I of West American Insurance Company, extracts from which read: Article VI, Section 7. APPOINTMENT OF ATTORNEYS -IN -FACT, ETC. "The chairman of the board, the president, any vice-president, the secretary or any assistant secretary of each of these Companies shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint attorneys -in -fact for the purpose of signing the name of the Companies as surety to, and to execute, attach the corporate seal, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, stipulations, undertakings or other instruments of suretyship and policies of insurance to be given in favor of any individual, firm, corporation, or the official representative thereof, or to any county or state, or any official board or boards of county or state, or the United States of America, or to any other political subdivision." Article VI, Section 1. APPOINTMENT OF RESIDENT OFFICERS. "The Chairman of the Board, the President, any Vice President, a Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint attorneys in fact for the purpose of signing the name of the corporation as surety or guarantor, and to execute, attach the corporate seal, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, stipulations, undertakings or other instruments of surety -ship or guarantee, and policies of insurance to be given in favor of an individual, firm, corporation, or the official representative thereof, or to any county or state, or any official board or boards of any county or state, or the United States of America, or to any other political subdivision." This instrument is signed and sealed by facsimile as authorized by the following Resolution adopted by the respective directors of the Companies (adopted May 27, I970-The Ohio. Casualty Insurance Company; adopted April 24, 1980-West American Insurance Company): "RESOLVED that the signature of any officer of the Company authorized by the By -Laws to appoint attorneys in fact, the signature of the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary certifying to the correctness of any copy of a power of attorney and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attomey or copy thereof issued on behalf of the Company. Such signatures and seal are hereby adopted by the Company as original signatures and seal, to be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed." CERTIFICATE I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company and West American Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing power of attorney, the referenced By -Laws of the Companies and the above Resolution of their Boards of Directors are true and correct copies and are in full force and effect on this date. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and the seals of the Companies this20th day ofDPr,-_mh,-r inn S . \�\,, (r - �• i1yyl 1 I'`tY�IN/9l/ `�,X IN]U�hC of SEAL' is W:. SEAL W .l ; . •t S-4300 Assistant Secretary Seminole County Property Appraiser Get Information by Parcel Number Page 1 of 1 rIARCIELL, ULTA. 1.A 3A �3.03A 4.0 5.A 1.0 H 3.4 f.r DAVID JOHNSON, C>'A, ASA +J I II 'iA ' 1 PROPERTY 2.0 3.F3.1 4. fj 5.0 Y ; APPRAISER 2a.o 23.9 3 4 "r 24.A SEMINOLE COU NTY FL. s 1101 E.FIRSTsT 37G 24 B SANFORD, FL 3=1-1468 407-665-7546 6 37J 2 AA .� 2006 WORKING VALUE SUMMARY GENERAL Value Method: Market Parcel Id: 28-19-30-506-0000-024A Number of Buildings: 0 Owner: FLAGSHIP DEV LLC & Depreciated $0 Bldg Value: Own/Addy: PMJS DEV INC Depreciated EXFT Value: $0 Mailing Address: 605 E ROBINSON ST STE 450 Land Value (Market): $593,286 City,State,ZipCode: ORLANDO FL 32801 Land Value Ag: $0 Property Address: 1821 RINEHART RD SANFORD 32771 Just/Market Value: $593,286 Facility Name: Assessed Value (SOH): $593,286 Tax District: S1-SANFORD Exempt Value: $0 Exemptions: Taxable Value: $593,286 Dor: 10-VAC GENERAL-COMMERCI Tax Estimator SALES 2005 VALUE SUMMARY Deed Date Book Page Amount Vac/Imp Qualified 2005 Tax Bill Amount: $11,839 WARRANTY DEED 10/2004 05511 1208 $2,701,200 Vacant No 2005 Taxable Value: $593,286 DOES NOT INCLUDE NON -AD VALOREM Find Sales within this DOR Code ASSESSMENTS LEGAL DESCRIPTION PLATS: Pick... LAND LEG PT OF LOT 24 DESC AS BEG 15 FT E & Land Assess Land Unit Land 79.79 FT N OF W 1/4 COR RUN N 186.37 FT Method Frontage Depth Units Price Value E 547.12 FT S 131.54 FT S SQUARE FEET 0 0 98,881 6.00 $593,286 63 DEG 06 MIN 27 SEC W 121.72 FT W 438.49 FT TO BEG (2.27 AC) SMITHS 3RD SUBD PB 1 PG 86 NOTE: Assessed values shown are NOT certified values and therefore are subject to change before being finalized for ad valorem tax purposes. *** If you recently purchased a homesteaded property your next ear's property tax will be based on Just/Market value. http://www.scpafl.orglplslweblre_web. seminole_county_title?parcel=281930506000O024... 12/22/2005 Division of Corporations Page 1 of 2 t7 1Al a 1 At �-P � k *A Florida Limited Liability FLAGSHIP DEVELOPMENT, LLC PRINCIPAL ADDRESS 916 HIGHLAND AVENUE ORLANDO FL 32803 Changed 04/20/2005 MAILING ADDRESS 916 HIGHLAND AVENUE ORLANDO FL 32803 Changed 04/20/2005 Document Number FEI Number L02000014871 753069443 State Status FL ACTIVE Total Contribution 0.00 Reizistered Agent Name & Address BOLIN, THEODORE A 916 HIGHLAND AVENUE ORLANDO FL 32803 Address Changed: 04/20/2005 Manager/Member Detail Date Filed 06/14/2002 Effective Date NONE Name & Address Title BOLIN, THEODORE A 916 HIGHLAND AVENUE MGRM ORLANDO FL 32803 http://www.sunbiz.org/scripts/cordet.exe?al=DETFIL&nl=LO2000014871 &n2=NAMF... 12/21/2005 Division of Corporations Page 2 of 2 Annual Reports Report Year Filed Date 2003 06/13/2003 2004 01/24/2004 2005 04/20/2005 Previous Filing Return to List Next Filing No Events No Name History Information Document Images Listed below are the images available for this filing. 04/20/2005 -- ANNUAL REPORT 01/24/2004 -- ANNUAL REPORT 06/13/2003 -- ANN REP/- NIFORM BUS REP 06/14/2002 -- Florida Limited Liabilites THIS IS NOT OFFICIAL RECORD; SEE DOCUMENTS IF QUESTION OR CONFLICT Corporations Enquiry Carporatzoris Help► http://www. sunbiz.org/scripts/cordet. exe?a 1=DETFIL&nl=LO2000014871 &n2=NAMF... 12/21 /2005 Division of Corporations Page 1 of 2 atq,-K"' - . Florida Profit PMJS DEVELOPMENT, INC. PRINCIPAL ADDRESS 605 E. ROBINSON STREET, STE 210 ORLANDO FL 32801 Changed 04/26/2004 MAILING ADDRESS 605 E. ROBINSON STREET, STE 210 ORLANDO FL 32801 Changed 04/26/2004 Document Number FEI Number P03000075766 030448585 State Status FL ACTIVE Re istered Agent Name & Address HOLLIS, MARY ELLEN 605 E. ROBINSON STREET, STE 210 ORLANDO FL 32801 Name Changed: 02/14/2005 Address Changed: 04/26/2004 Officer/Director Detail Date Filed 07/03/2003 Effective Date NONE Name & Address Title HOLLIS, PHILLIP C 1164 OVERBROOK DRIVE P ORLANDO FL 32804 HOLLIS, MARY ELLEN 1164 OVERBROOK DRIVE V ORLANDO FL 32804 HOLLIS, JENNIFER M IF 1164 OVERBROOK DRIVE http://www.sunbiz.org/scripts/cordet.exe?al =DETFIL&nl=PO3000075766&n2=NAME.. 12/21 /2005 Division of Corporations Page 2 of 2 ORLANDO FL 32804 I�S� HOLLIS, SARAH R 1164 OVERBROOK DRIVE T ORLANDO FL 32804 Annual Re orts Report Year F Filed Date 2004 11 04/26/2004 2005 02/14/2005 Previous Filing Return to List Next Filing No Events No Name History Information Document Images Listed below are the images available for this filing. 02/14/2005 -- ANNUAL REPORT 04/26/2004 -- ANN REP/UNIFORM BUS REP 07/03/2003 -- Domestic Profit THIS IS NOT OFFICIAL RECORD; SEE DOCUMENTS IF QUESTION OR CONFLICT http://www.sunbiz.org/scripts/cordet.exe?al =DETFIL&nl=PO3000075766&n2=NAMF... 12/21 /2005 CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION Permit # : o(, I ) V q Date Job Address: i d--Q1 i K (ni•` A f< i �P l , 7� 2 `7 '7 Description of Work: C'nn)--"r QPC- Ice Zc� ti T to a 2 Historic District: Zoning: Value of Work: $ Permit Type: Building Electrical Electrical: New Service - # of AMPS Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets _ Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Construction Type: NEra # of Stories: I Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Calc. Required) # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing Repair - Residential or Commercial _ Industrial Total Square Footage: SC)i� # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required for other than X) Parcel #: 2.9 Iq io _ S e) c— — non — U '�— 44 (Attach Proof of Ownership & Legal Description) Owners Name&Address: =Cy' LIC.�,-i-PtUtwmCtLJ 1131 CIRV S'r. �AtJ�2ANr1� a C'14i08 Phone: '�J I S q 31 'I Q Contractor Name & Address: ON s'T Co, 1 ,2 q A nV le'60 FA State License Number: AG", 03 A A SS Phone & Fax: 'qO—1 36L,-I S 336. - 3S:Q S Contact Person: Wyl)E W ALit a Phone: '`iD1 364 15LA- Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect/Engineer: Address: I.0 Phone: 401 64 S, AnP Fax: eit)71 62A Q 1 1 A Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all ol'the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the property of the requirements of Florida Lien Law, FS 713 1- 31-o-6 Signature of Owner/Agent Date Signature of Contractor/Agent Date soma W-1ss -�l-o_ Print Owner/Agent's Name tin ontra or/A r t Name ? Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date atu e of Notary State of Florida Date fL0RENCEA.0EGRK4L MY COMMISSION # DD 16428( * t EXPIBES: November 12, 200E Owner/Agent is _ Personally Known to'Me-or QASash „RudnR�Gesn 1 `Known Me or Produced ID -Pr `oduced ID u) �-� APPLICATION APPROVED BY: B Zoning: 31)06Utilities: FD: (Initial & Date) (Initial & ate) (initial & Date) (Initial & Date) Special Conditions: re 1®. CW HAYES CONSTRUCTION COMPANY Power ofAttorney January 23, 2006 I hereby appoint Mr. Tom Weiss of C.W. Hayes Construction Company to be my lawful attorney in fact to act for me and apply to the City of Sanford Building Department for permits necessary for work to be performed at Big Boy 1821 Rinehart Road and to sign my name and do all things necessary to this appointment. Signed:�� Mr. Char Hayes — President C.W. Hayes Construction Company License Number CGC034855 Signed by Charles Wayne Hayes on January 23, 2006, personally known to me. !' Signed: Jaim R. Pearce — Notary """""',MuiyiE R'PEARCE Commf OD0270814 EVires 1128 M DmW ftu (800)432-425 Fkw Notwv Assn., Inc Witness: Jadetstock Florida CGC0348%tries . P'. "-)dC' Georgia Kellye avett North Carolina 32474 South Carolina G15674 Tennessee 35336 Kentucky Alabama 20946 Mississippi 10027 Virginia 2705031930A Texas Louisiana 33376 P. 0. Box 621294 Oviedo, Florida 32762-1294 Phone (407) 366-1564 Fax (407) 366-3835 CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION / RECEIVED Permit # Date: Z S /©sP BAN 2��+ Job Address: (�� ( I AID./- 91q 7 �OAa U Description of Work: 1 At STI3LL 205 FT of t/'/ F/2t MA/9 AND 1 'y �/ rEXrGCfZtx✓ �/LFvL >�!L Historic District: Zoning: Value of Work: $ 111300,00 Permit Type: Building Electrical Mechanical Plumbing �SpnrinkOerAlarm}Pool Electrical: Ne�v Service — # of AMPS Addition/Alteration Change Temporary Pole Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Occupancy Type: Residential _ Commercial Construction Type: # of Stories: Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Calc. Required) # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial Industrial Total Square Footage: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required for other than X) Parcel #: �- (Attach Proof of Ownership & Legal Description) �-• Owners Name & Address: M R, RJ L. I t_HTC A( WALD Phone: Contractor Name & Address: POW ELL. FS ft l SYS rCAPJS /Aft p Z� �! �, I�fK� A ✓C DKL E L 32 S OS State License Number: 570 O (030oo T30 t{ Phone & Fax: Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender: Address: Contact Person: Architect/Engineer: Phone: Address: Fax: Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction_ 1 understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: 1 certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the property of the requ ements of Florida Lien Law, FS 713. a //Zs/4 Signature of Owner/Agent Date ignature of Contractor/Agent Date Print Owner/Agent's Name Print Contractor/Agent's Name Signature ofNotary-State of Florida Date gnature�o, Wpbary-State of FI 'da Date • • n JO MN M, JOHNSON * * MY COMMISSION # 0 285622 EXPIRES: M rch 99pj� Owner/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Contractoo'4'gemYt°is BonAe g ; 3 1oMeor!�jProduced ID .Produced ID L_ �o e}0. 5J ��' G n APPLICATION APPROVED BY Special Conditions: Bldg: Zoning: (Initial & Date) Utilities: FD: (initial & Date) (Initial & Date) 11� °d CITY OF SANFORD FIRE DEPARTMENT FEES FOR SERVICES PHONE # 407-302-1091 * FAX #: 407-330-5677 DATE: O PERMIT #: BUSINESS NAME / PROJECT: cCL% ayj ADDRESS: I ej Ot PHONE NO.: kl� l kl FAX NO.: N r 7 CONST. INSP. [ ] C/ O N P.� ]� REI S hUN�( PLANS REVIEW F. A. [ ] F.S. [ ] HOOD [ ] PAINT BOOTH [ ] BURN PERMIT ] TENT PERMIT f ] NK PERMIT [ ] OTHERyVT TOTAL FEES: $ (PER UNIT SEE BELOW) COMMENTS: Address / Bldg. # / Unit # 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Square Footage Fees per Bldg. / Unit Fees must be paid to Sanford Building Department, 300 N. Park Ave., Sanford, FI. 32771 Phone # -407- 330-5656. Proof of Payment must be made to Fire Prevention division before any further services can take place. I certify that the above is true and correct and that I will comply with all applicable codes and ordinances of the City of Sanford, Florida. Sanfor�rc�-]V—isid' Applicant's Signature ES-A-3000SS Series 30, t a M E Double CheC1C Detector Asser7rblreS., FIRE&WATERWORKS x Al Sizes: 21/2" 12" (.65 300mmj 3000SS Features77,77 • =, Patented Cam Check Assembly genes 3000SSkDouble`Chbdk, Defector Assemblies are designed for use in accor- valve provides low head loss u dance with water utllfty non health hazard containment requirements. It is manda- • Short lay leng#h ip,X ally suit' toryto prevent the repw rse flovat o#ftre, protection system substances, i.e., glycerin for retrofit installations wetting agents, stagnant water and water oiYnon potable quality from being • Stair�lEss Steelbody is half the pumped or siphoned into the potable waer supply wetghtof competitive designs .. .e..-..w:. reducing -installation and shipping Specifications cost A Double Check Detector Assembly shall be installed on fire protection systems • Stainless steel construction when connected to a potable water supply. Degree of hazard present is determined provides long term corrosion by the local authority having jurisdiction. The main valve body shall be manufac- protection and maximum tured from 300 Series stainless steel to provide corrosion resistance, 100% lead strength free through the waterway. The double check detector assembly consists of two • Single top access cover with independently operating, spring loaded check valves, two UL, FM, OSY resilient two -bolt grooved style coupling seated gate valves, and bypass assembly. The bypass assembly consists of a for ease of maintenance meter (cubic ft. or gallons), a double check including shutoff valves and .required • No special tools required for test cocks. Each cam -check shall be.internally loaded and provide a positive drip servicing tight closure against reverse flow. Cam -check includes a stainless steel cam arm • Compact construction allows for and spring, rubber faced disc and a replaceable seat. There shall be no brass or smaller vaults and enclosures bronze parts used within the cam -check valve assembly. The check valve seats • Furnished with %" x 3/a" bronze shall be of molded thermoplastic construction. The use of seat screws as a meter (gpm or cfm) retention method is prohibited. All internal parts shall be accessible through a • Detects underground leaks and single cover on the valve assembly. The valve cover shall be held in place through the use of a single grooved style two -bolt coupling. The bypass line shall be, unauthorized water use hydraulically sized to accurately measure low flow. The bypass line shall consist of • Maybe installed horizontal or a meter, a small diameter double check assembly with test cocks and isolation vertical "flow up" position valves. The bypass line double check valve shall have a single access cover, two ! independently operating modular poppet check valves, and top mounted test i Available Models cocks. The assembly shall be an Ames 3000SS. Suffix: LG - without shutoff valves Materials OSY - UUFM outside stem and All internal metal parts: 300 Series stainless steel, Main valve body: 300 Series yoke resilient seated gate valves stainless steel, Check assembly: Noryl® Flange dimension in accordance with CFM - cubic feet per minute AWWA Class D. GPM - gallons per minute meter Noryl® is a registered trademark of General Electric Company. Job Name BI& 13ay Contractor iawc-LC EIRE SPRaWiLerL Job Location 82.. R1NEk R7 dAD Approval Engineer Contractor's P.O. No. Approval Representative Ames product specifications in U.S. customary units and metric are approximate and are provided for reference only. For precise measurements, please contact Ames Technical Service. Ames reserves the right to change or modify product design, construction, specifications, or materials without prior notice and without incurring any obligatioh to make such changes and modifica- tions on Ames products previously or subsequently sold. ' www.amesfirewater.com Pressure — Temperature Temperature Range: 330F - 140OF (50C - 600C) Maximum Working Pressure: 175psi (12 bars) Capacity UnderwritersFlow curves as tested by ..... per ... -. ■■■■■I ■■■ IMMME ■■■■■l ■■■ I■■WPAP' P.M■■■I ■■■ I■PIPRId■ e_��■ �� ■tee_—� kPa psi 83 12 69 10 55 8 41 6 28 4 14 2 0 25 50 100 95 190 380 3" (80mm) Standards ASSE 1048, AWWA C510-92, CSA B64.5, UL 1469 Approvals UL Classified (OSY only), FM (sizes 21/2" -10", OSY only) For 12" approvals consult factory. uL FM e5 Approved 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 525 gpm 570 760 950 1140 1330 1520 1710 1900 1995 Ipm 15 fps 4.6 mps 95 190 380 570 760 950 1 kPa psi 6" (150 mm) 103 15 * ** 83 12 62 9 41 6 21 3 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 gpm 380 760 1140 15201900 2280 2660 3040 3420 3800 4180 4560 4940 5320 5700 Ipm 5 10 15 fps 1.5 3 4.6 mps kPa psi 8" (200mm) * ** 83 12 62 9 0000 41 6 21 3 350 400 450 500 550 600 gpm 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 gpm 1330 1520 1710 1900 2090 2280 Ipm 950 1900 2850 3800 4750 5700 6650 7600 8550 9500 Ipm 15 f 5 10 15 fps 4.6 msPs 1.5 3 4.6 mps kPa psi 4" (100mm) kPa psi 10" (250 mm) * ** 103 15 * ** 103 15 83 12 83 12 62 9 62 9 41 6 41 6 �. 21 3 21 3 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 gpm 0 1500 1750 2000 2250 2500 3000 3500 gpm 250 500 750 1000 1250 171 380 570 760 950 1140 1330 1520 1170 1900 2090 2280 2470 2660 2850 Ipm 950 1900 2850 3800 4750 5700 6650 7600 8550 9500 11400 133001pm 5 10 15 fps 5 10 fps 1.5 3 4.6 mps 1.5 3 mps Dimensions —Weight 3n) 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 p 0 O 0 P IMPORTANT. Inquire with governing authorities A M E S for local installation requirements. FIRE&WATERWORKS A Division of Watts Industries www.amesfirewater.com 875 National Drive a Suite #107 a Sacramento, CA 95834 a Phone: 916-928-0123 a Fax: 916-928-9333 ES-A-3000SS 0311 © Ames Co. 2003 Printed in U.S.A. kPa psi 110 16 97 14 83 12 69 . 10 55 8 41 6 28 4 14 2 12" (300 mm) 3000 3500 4000 1900 3800 5700 7600 9500 11400 13300 15200 5 10 1.5 3 4500, gpm 17100 Ipm fps mps Net Weight Net Weight Size A C (OSY) D G L P w/Gates w/o Gates in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm lb. kg. Ni. kg. 21/265 37 965 163A 416 31/2 89 10 250 22 559 12'/2 318 155 70 68 31 3 80 38 965 187/a 479 33/4 95 10 250 22 559 13 330 230 104 70 32 4 100 40 1016 22/4 578 4'/2 114 10 250 22 559 141h 368 240 109 73 33 6 150 48'h .1232 30'/e 765 51/2 140 15 381 27'h . 699 151h 394 390 177 120 54 8 200 52Y2 1334 373/4 959 63/4 171 15 381 29'/2 749 18'h 464 572 259 180 82 10 250 55'h 1410 453/4 1162 8 200 15 381 29'/2 749 191h 495 774 351 190 86 12 300 5Th 1461 53'/s 1349 9Y2 241 15 381 29'h 749 21 533 1044 474 220 100 • • 9001 AWWA C-900 PVC Water Pipe Short Form Specification SCOPE This specification covers the requirements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) water distribution pipes with integral bell and spigot gasketed joints in Cast Iron Outside Diameter (CIOD) nominal sizes 4", 6", 8", 10" and 12". These pipes meet the requirements ofAmerican Water Works Association standard ANSUAWWA C-900. MATERIALS Pipe is manufactured from virgin PVC compound meeting the requirements of cell class 12454- B as defined by ASTM D-1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds. These compounds have a hydrostatic design basis rating of 4,000 psi for water at 73.4°F. The compound is certified by NSF International to ANSI/NSF Standard 61. PIPE Pipes are manufactured to the Cast Iron Outside Diameter nominal size series for use as a pressure conduit. The DR-14, DR-18, and DR-25 wall thickness class pipes are rated as Pressure `Class 200, 150 and 100 respectively. Pressure Classes refer to working pressure ratings in water service at 73.4°F, which provide a 2 foot per second surge allowance with a 2.5:1 long term hydrostatic design safety factor. The pipe utilizes a "locked in" integral gasket joint design meeting the requirements of ASTM D-3139,-Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. The gaskets are reinforced with a steel band and conform to the requirements of ASTM F-477, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipes. Pressure Class 150 (DR-18) and Pressure Class 200 (DR- 14) pipes are listed with Underwriters Laboratories and Factory Mutual for use in fire protection service. MARKING Pipe markings are as specified in ANSI/AWWA C-900. TEST REQUIREMENTS Quality assurance testing is as required by ANSUAWWA C-900. As part of that testing, each length of pipe,. including the integral bell, is hydrostatic pressure tested as four times the pressure class rating of the pipe for a minimum dwell period of five (5) seconds. �ira Technical Data ASTM D-2241 PVC Pressure Pipe DR-25 (Pressure Class 100) Size Pipe Outside Diameter Average Inside Diameter Minimum Wall Thickness Outside Diameter at Bell StopApproximate Mark Weight (Lbs./Ft.) 4 4.80 4.42 .192 6.10 4.9 1.9 6 6.90 6.35 .276 8.25 6.3 3.8 8 9.05 8.33 .362 11.25 8.0 6.6 10 11.10 10.21 .444 13.25 9.0 10.0 12 I T20 12.14 .528 16.00 9.5 14.2 DR-18 (Pressure Class 150) Sizetside ipe meter Average Inside Diameter Minimum Wall Thickness Outside Diameter at Bell StopApproximate M Weight (Lbs./Ft.) 480 4.27 .267 6.20 4.9 2.5 6.90 ?41. 6.13 .383 8.25 6.7 5.2 8.05 8.04 .503 11.25 8.0 9.0 101.10 9.87 .617 13.2513.7 123.20 11.73 .733 16.25 9.5 19.4 DR-14 (Pressure Class 200) Size Pipe Outside Diameter Average Inside Diameter Minimum Wall Thickness Outside Diameter at Bell Stop Mark .: Approximate Weight (Lbs./Ft.) 4 4.80 4.11 .343 6.36 4.9 3.2 6 6.90 5.91 .493 8.50 6.7 6.6 8 9.05 7.76 .646 11.50 8.0 11.4 10 11.10 9.51 .793 13.75 9.0 17.3 12 13.20 11.31 .943 16.50 9.5 24.5 Dimensions in inches, except as noted. Revised 3/97 Bell Restraint Harness for C900 PVC Pipe Installation Instructions 1. The Series 1600 is designed for restraining push -on, C900 PVC pipe bells. It has a split, serrated restraint ring on the spigot and a non - serrated ring behind the bell 2. Assemble the push -on joint per the pipe manufacturer's instructions 3. Install both halves of the non -serrated bell ring around the pipe behind the bell. Install the side bolts and tighten each to 60 ft-Ibs. (110 ft-Ibs on 8", 10", and 12") 4. Slide the bell ring toward the bell so that it fits snugly behind the bell. 5. Remove the side bolts from the serrated restraint ring. Use the tie bolts to determine the proper location of the restraint ring on the spigot. Allow enough room on the tie bolt to.fully engage the nuts. .g ,7 Contents of Package Qty. Description. 1 .1504RR;, Serrated Restraint Ring 1' 1604BR Non -Serrated Backup Ring 2 Low Alloy Steel Tie Bolts Install both halves on the restraint ring at the proper location," tapping each half into place. Make sure that the complete ID of the , ring'is touching the -pipe -before installing the s debolts: TightertAk�e side bolts evenly to 60 ft-Ibs torque. (110 ft-Ibs on 8", 10", and 12") Made in the USA Place nuts on the tie bolts and tighten until they are snug. Allow enough room on the tie bolt to fully engage the nut with several ESAA IRON Sales, lace threads showing:' Do not tighten these bolts enough to force theTel PA,Boz857,Eastland,TX76448 spigot further into the bell of the joint. Far(54)629.37 - Fax (254) 629.8931 (800) 433.1716 within US and Canada For use on water or wastewater pipelines subject to ebaa@eastland,net hydrostatic pressure and tested in accordance with www.ebaa.com either AWWA C600 or ASTM D2774. Approximate Weight 14 Lbs. SERIES 1604 Bell Restraint Harness for C900 PVC Pipe I��IYII�IIGH��VI *1604000000� EBAA IRON Sales, Inc. PA Ba 857, Eastland, A 76448 Tel: (254) 629.1737 Fax (254) 629.8931 (800) 433.1716 within US and Canada ebaa@eastland,net www,ebaa.com 04-29-02 Rev. B U,S�,DEPAfTMENTOFHOMELAND:SECURITY ELEVATION CERTIFICATE OMB No. 1660-0008 Fe*al Emergency Management Agency Exoires February 28. 2009 National Flood Insurance Program Important: Read the instructions on pages 1-8. SECTION A - PROPERTY INFORMATION For Insurance Company Use: Al. Building Owner's Name Flagship Develepment LLC T iPolicy Number Al Building Street Address (including Apt., Unit, Suite, and/or Bldg. No.) or P.O. Route and Box No. Company NAIC Number -J 831- Rinehart R6ad- f City Sanford State FL ZIP Code32771 j. A3. Property Description (Lot and Block Numbers, Tax Parcel Number, Legal Description,etc.) Parcel ID# 28-19-30-506-0000-0240 9' A41 Building Use (e.g., Residential, Non -Residential, Addition, Accessory, etc.) Non -Residential A5. Latitude/Longitude: Lat. 28° 48' 32" N Long. 81 ° 19' 50" W Horizontal Datum: ❑ NAD 1927 ®NAD 1983 A6. Attach at least 2 photographs of the building if the Certificate is being used to obtain flood insurance. A7. Building Diagram Numberl A0 :-,,For a building with a crawl space or enclosure(s), provide A9. For a building with an attached garage, provide: a) Square footage of crawl space or enclosure(s) sq ft a) Square footage of attached garage sq ft b) No. of permanent flood openings in the crawl space or b) No. of permanent flood openings in the attached garage enclosure(s) walls within 1.0 foot above adjpcent grade walls within 1.0 foot above adjacent grade I c) Total net area of flood openings in A8.b sq in c) Total net area of flood openings in A9 b —sq in SECTION B 7: FLOOD INSUR�kNCE RATE MAP (FIRM) INFORMATION 131. NFIP Community Name & Community Number B2. County Name 63. State Seminole County Unicor orated Areas 120289 Seminole County FL 94, Map/Panel Number 65. Suffix B6. FIRM Index B7. FIRM Panel B8. Flood B9. Base Flood Elevation(s) (Zone I pate Effective/Revised Date Zone(s) AO, use base flood depth) 0040 E April 17, 1995 April 17, 1995 X B1,0 Indicate the source of the Base Flood Elevation (BFE) data or base flood depth entered in Item B9. ❑ FIS Profile ❑ FIRM ❑ Community Determined ❑ Other (Describe) B11. Indicate elevation datum used for BFE in Item 69: ❑ NGVD 1929 ❑ NAVD 1988 ❑ Other (Describe) B12. Is the building located in a Coastal Barrier Resources System (CBRS) area or Otherwise Protected Area (OPA)? ❑Yes ®No Resignation Date ❑ CBRS ❑ OPA SECTION C - BUILDING ELEVATION INFORMATION (SURVEY REQUIRED) C1...BUilding elevations are based on: ❑ Construction Drawings' ® Building Under Construction" ❑ Finished Construction I -A new Elevation Certificate will be required when construction of the building is complete. I C2. Y Elevations — Zones Al-A30, AE, AH, A (with BFE), VE, V1-V30, V (with BFE), AR, AR/A, AR/AE, AR/Al-A30, AR/AH, AR/AO. Complete Items C2.a-g below according to the building, diagram specified ln Item AT Benchmark Utilized Seminole County #3624801 Vertical Datum NGVD 1929 Conversion/Comments Check the measurement used. a) . ; Top of bottom floQr (including basement, crawl space, or enclosure floor)_ 36.50 ® feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) b) `. Top of the next higher floor ❑ feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) i c) li Bottom of the lowest horizontal structural member (V Zones only) ❑ feet Elmeters (Puerto Rico only) 'd) Attached garage (top of slab) ❑ feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) e) Lowest elevation of machinery or equipment servicing the building ❑ feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) (Describe type of equipment in Comments) i f) Lowest adjacent (finished) grade (LAG) ❑ feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) g) Highest adjacent (finished) grade (HAG) El feet ❑meters (Puerto Rico only) SECTION D - SURVEYOR, ENGINEER, OR ARCHITECT CERTIFICATION ! This certification is to be signed and sealed by a land surveyor, engineer, or architect authorized by law to certify elevation I information. 1 certify that the information on this Certificate represents my best efforts to interpret the data available. i understand that any false statement may be punishable by fine or imprisonment under 18 U.S. Code, Section 1001. ❑ Check here if comments are provided on back of form. Certifier's Name John E. Drexler License Number PSM #4346 Title Professional Surveyor and Mapper Company Name Central Florida Consulting Surveyors, Inc iv 1, reuruary zuuo P oee reverse side Tor continuation. Nepiaces an previous editions IMPORTANT: In these spaces, copy the corresponding information from Section A. For Insurance Company Use: Quilding Street Address (including Apt., Unit, Suite, and/or Bldg. No.) or P.O. Route and Box No. Policy Number 1831-Rinehart Road City ° Sanford StateFLZIP Code 32771 Company NAIC Number SECTION D - SURVEYOR, ENGINEER, OR ARCHITECT CERTIFICATION (CONTINUED) Copy both sides of this Elevation Certificate for (1) community official, (2), insurance agent/company, and (3) building owner. Comments Signature Date ❑ Check here if attachments SECTION E - BUILDING ELEVATION INFORMATION (SURVEY NOT REQUIRED) FOR ZONE AO AND ZONE A (WITHOUT BFE) For Zones AO and A (without BFE), complete Items El-E5. If the Certificate is intended to support a LOMA or LOMR-F request, complete Sections A, B, and C. For Items El-E4, use natural grade, if available. Check the measurement used. In Puerto Rico only, enter meters. Ell. ;Provide elevation information for the following and check the appropriate boxes to show whether the elevation is above or below the highest adjacent a) Top of bottom floor (including basement, crawl space, or enclosure) is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or ❑ below the HAG. b) Top of bottom floor (including basement, crawl space, or enclosure) is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or ❑ below the LAG. E2: For Building Diagrams 6-8 with permanent flood openings provided in Section A Items 8 and/or 9 (see page 8 of Instructions), the next higher floor (elevation C2.b in the diagrams) of the building 'is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or Elbelow the HAG. E3. 'Attached garage (top of slab) is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or ❑ below the HAG. E4.. '.Top of platform of machinery and/or equipment servicing the building is. ❑feet ❑meters ❑above or E] below the HAG. E5_. Zone AO only: If no flood depth number is available, is the top of the bottom floor elevated in accordance with the community's floodplain management ordinance? ❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ Unknown. The local official must.certify this information in Section G. SECTION F - PROPERTY OWNER (OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE) CERTIFICATION The property owner or owner's authorized representative who completes Sections A, B, and E for Zone A (without a FEMA-issued or community -issued BFE) or Zone AO must sign here. The statements in Sections A, B, and E are correct to the best of my knowledge. ' Property Owner's or Owner's Authorized Representative's Name Address City State ZIP Code Signaj.ture Date Telephone Comments <., ❑ Check here if attachments SECTION G - COMMUNITY INFORMATION (OPTIONAL) Theaocal official who is authorized by law or ordinance to administer the community's floodplain management ordinance can complete Sections A, B. C (or E), and.G of this Elevation Certificate. ,Complete the applicable item(s) and sign below. Check the measurement used in Items G8. G9. and G1 ❑ The information in Section C was taken from other documentation that has been signed and sealed by a licensed surveyor, engineer, or architect who is authorized by law to certify elevation information. (Indicate the source and date of the elevation data in the Comments area below.) G2. ❑ . A community official completed Section E for a building located in Zone A (without a FEMA-issued or community -issued BFE) or Zone AO. G1 ❑ The following information (Items G4.-G9.) is provided for community floodplain management purposes. G4: Permit Number G5. Date Permit Issued G6. Date Certificate Of Compliance/Occupancy Issued G7; This permit has been issued for: ❑ New Construction El Substantial Improvement G8:_ Elevation: of as -built lowest floor (including basement) of the building: _❑ feet ❑meters (PR) Datum G9. BFE or (in Zone AO),depth of flooding at the building site: ❑ feet ❑ meters (PR) Datum Local Official's Name"-,, Title Co r:mmunity Name Telephone Signature Date Comments ❑ Check here if attachments FEMA.Form 81-31, February 2006 Replaces all previous editions a ; LIM. • ,try APR 0 7 2006 CW HAYES CONSTRUCTION COMPANY P` .o Sanford, fi � l or Gl�� jdd Building Department P.O. Box 1788 - 32772-1788 Telephone (407) 330-5656 Fax (407) 330-5677 January 8, 1998 ATTENTION TO ALL BUILDING CONTRACTORS: The City of Sanford Building Division shall require builder to provide a certification of elevation to make sure that finished floor meets city code or has been engineered to prevent possibility of flooding_ Proof shall be required at final inspection. dmf/ar "Tfie 1^riendI), CifY" Plans Review Sheet Date: October 13, 2005 Business Address: 1831 Rinehart Road Assembly Business Name: Big Boy PH (407) 645-5008Fax (407) 645-5008 Contractor: . Unknown at time of submittal Architect: Interplan Ph. (407) 645-5008 Fax (407) 629-9124 Reviewed[ ] Rejected [ ] Reviewed by: Timothy Robles, Fire Protection Inspector/Plans Examiner Comment: Plans reviewed as Asp=„ bly_Occupancy. FD reserves ht�to r`� q irerapplkable codf `�. requirements if occupancy use changes. Hood system and Hood and Duct will r require a liquid weld test prior to hanging on wall or ceiling per N.F.P.A #96, CALL (407) 302-2520, PRIOR TO READING THESE PLANS. Additional plans and permits required for ® Hood and Duct work ® Fire Suppression System .................................................................................................................................................................................................... . ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... . Frei°aizcxall>fid>ec� >�e0.ehf�d>Seat>�f::l � »:��ehes .er b0��h • Sign stating "Occupancy load 192 see blue prints in the lobby prior to building final. 1.1 Application — New Assembly area 1.2 Mixed — N/A 1.3 Special Definitions — N/N 1.4 Classification of Occupancy — Assemblies, 1.5 Classification of Hazard of Contents — Class "B" 1.6 Minimum Construction — (shall comply with Sanford Building Department) 1 2.2 Means of Egress Components — O.K. three (3) 2.3 Capacity of Egress — O.K. 2.4 Number of Exits — O.K. Three In assembly area one (1) in kitchen 2.5 Arrangement of Egress — O.K., will field verify 2.6 Travel Distance — O.K. 2.8 Illumination of Means of Egress —will field verify One candela power at the feet 2.7 Discharge from Exits — will field verify 2.9 Emergency Lighting —will field veri 2.10 Marking of Means of Egress — will field verify 2.11 Special Features — O.K. 3.1 Protection of Vertical Openings — N/N 3.2 Protection from Hazards — N/N 3.3 Interior Finish — Class "A& B" 3.4 Detection, Alarm and Communications Systems — as per NFPA 72 3< ....................h i ...g Req��-en�en#s..s pit#1'>I(} p��vde fruarxt;rau�sirs one 1 K Rated in kitchen, one 10 pound CO 2 in electrical room, two (2) 4A 60BC fire extinguishers in assembly area 3.6 Corridors — N/A - 4 Special Provisions - 5 Building Services 5.1 Utilities — as per LSC 9-1 5.2 HVAC — as per LSC 9-2 5.3 Elevators, Escalators, Conveyors (4A-47) — N/A 5.4 Rubbish Chutes, Incinerators, and Laundry Chutes — N/A Sanford City Code — Chapter 9 Fire Sprinklers: Monitoring: 2 Other: NFPA 1 3-5.1 Fire Lanes — Required see site plane 3-6.1 Key Box — Required see application .................... . ......................................................................... 3-7.1 Bldg. Address Number Posted and Legible — P....o...s......c.......s......e.. ;BUILDING DEPARTMENT Re ,Fwd 1831 Rinehart Rd co denied 6/16/06 CE Page 1 From: RICHARD BLAKE To: BUILDING DEPARTMENT Date: 6/23/2006 1:10 pm Subject: Re: Fwd: 1831 Rinehart Rd co denied 6/16/06 CE CC: CHARLES EDWARDS Passed 6/23/06 He has is discharge permit per Lamar and we received the As -built drawings. Richard Blake City of Sanford Utility Engineer 407-330-5609 >>> CHARLES EDWARDS 7:21 am Monday, June 19, 2006 >>> No permit for the grease interceptors and as-builts need to be reviewed. >>> RICHARD BLAKE 06/14/06 1:04 PM >>> Please make sure the Interceptors have been inspected. Thanks, Richard Blake. City of Sanford Utility, Engineer 407-330-5609 >>> BUILDING DEPARTMENT 11:49 am Wednesday, June 14, 2006 >>> Big Boys 06-825 C W Hayes BUILDING DEPARTMENT Re Fwd. 1831 Rinehart Rd co denied 6/16/66 CE _ 1 From: RICHARD BLAKE To: BUILDING DEPARTMENT Date: 6/23/2006 1:10 pm Subject: Re: Fwd: 1831 Rinehart Rd co denied 6/16/06 CE CC: CHARLES EDWARDS Passed 6/23/06 He has is discharge permit per Lamar and we received the As -built drawings. Richard Blake City of Sanford Utility Engineer 407-330-5609 >>> CHARLES EDWARDS 7:21 am Monday, June 19, 2006 >>> No permit for the grease interceptors and as-builts need to be reviewed. >>> RICHARD BLAKE 06/14/06 1:04 PM >>> Please make sure the Interceptors have been inspected. Thanks Richard Blake City of Sanford Utility Engineer 407-330-5609 >>> BUILDING DEPARTMENT 11:49 am Wednesday, June 14, 2006 >>> Big Boys 06-825 C W Hayes 0 ;BUILDING DEPARTMENT �Re, 1831 Rinehart Rd .. _ _ � From: CATHY LOTEMPIO To: DEPARTMENT, BUILDING Date: 6/15/2006 3:14 pm Subject: Re: 1831 Rinehart Rd This is N/A for Public Works 6.15.06 Cathy J. LoTempio Customer Service Rep Public Works Department 407-330-5681 fax# 407-330-5601 >>> BUILDING DEPARTMENT 6/14/2006 11:49 am >>> Big Boys 06-825 C W Hayes From: RUBEN HYATT To: BUILDING DEPARTMENT Date: 6/15/2006 3:33 pm Subject: Re: 1831 Rinehart Rd passed 06-15-06 >>> BUILDING DEPARTMENT 06/14/06 11:49 AM >>> Big Boys 06-825 C W Hayes Page 1 of 1 BUILDING DEPARTMENT - Fwd: Big Boy Final Inspection From: DEBORAH BLANTON To: BUILDING DEPARTMENT Date: 6/15/2006 11:37 AM Subject: Fwd: Big Boy Final Inspection >>> TIM ROBLES 6/15/2006 11:18 am >>> Date: 5/16/06 The following permits have been finaled out> #06-825 #06-1863 #06-1274 #06-1244 Joann, what about there Occ. Lic? No one from Big Boys was available to talk to me? Let me know I will go back out. Tim Timothy L. Robles Fire Marshal City of Sanford P.O. Box 17-88 Sanford FL. 32772 (407) 302-2516 Office (321) 436-3607 Cell 158*41*64233 Nextel# (407)302-2526 Fax roblest@ci.sanford.fl.us file://C:\Documents and Settings\JOHNSONJO\Local Settings\Temp\XPGrpWise\449146... , 6/23/2006 CENTRAL FLORIDA CONSULTING SURVEYORS, INC. 629 Maitland Avenue, Altamonte Springs, Florida 32701 * Telephone 407-767-0166 * Fax 407-767-8558 d�D-g25 June 19, 2006 �J City of Sanford Building Division P O Box 1788 Sanford, FL 32772-1788 RE: Lot 2 FLAGSHIP PARK To Whom It May Concern: The finished floor elevation at the referenced site is not less than 16 'inches above the crown of the adjacent street as specified in City of Sanford Code Chapter 6 Section 6 — 7a. Sincerely, John E. Drexler, PSM /dgs U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HOMELAND SECURITY Federal Emergency Management Agency National Flood Insurance Program ELEVATION CERTIFICATE Important: Read the instructions on pages 1-8. OMB No. 1660-0008 Expires February 28. 2009 SECTION A - PROPERTY INFORMATION For Insurance Company Use: Al. Building Owner's Name Flagship Develepment LLC Policy Number A2. Building Street Address (including Apt., Unit, Suite, and/or Bldg. No.) or P.O. Route and Box No. L Company NAIC Number I 1831 Rinehart Road City Sanford State FL ZIP Code32771 A3. Property Description (Lot and Block Numbers, Tax Parcel Number, Legal Description, etc.) Parcel ID# 28-19-30-506-0000-0240 A4. Building Use (e.g., Residential, Non -Residential, Addition, Accessory, etc.) Non -Residential A5. Latitude/Longitude: Lat. N28°48'32" Long. W81°19' 50" Horizontal Datum: ❑ NAD 1927 ® NAD 1983 A6. Attach at least 2 photographs of the building if the Certificate is being used to obtain flood insurance. AT Building Diagram Numberl A8. For a building with a crawl space or enclosure(s), provide A9. For a building with an attached garage, provide: a) Square footage of crawl space or enclosure(s) sq ft a) Square footage of attached garage sq ft b) No. of permanent flood openings in the crawl space or b) No. of permanent flood openings in the attached garage enclosure(s) walls within 1.0 foot above adjacent grade walls within 1.0 foot above adjacent grade c) Total net area of flood openings in A8.b sq in c) Total net area of flood openings in A9.b sq in SECTION B - FLOOD INSURANCE RATE MAP (FIRM) INFORMATION B1. NFIP Community Name & Community Number B2. County Name B3. State Seminole County Unicor orated Areas 120289 Seminole County FL B4. Map/Panel Number B5. Suffix B6. FIRM Index B7. FIRM Panel B8. Flood B9. Base Flood Elevation(s) (Zone Date Effective/Revised Date Zone(s) AO, use base flood depth) 0040 E April 17, 1995 April 17, 1995 X B10. Indicate the source of the Base Flood Elevation (BFE) data or base flood depth entered in Item B9. ❑ FIS Profile ❑ FIRM ❑ Community Determined ❑ Other (Describe) B11. Indicate elevation datum used for BFE in Item 139: ❑ NGVD 1929 ❑ NAVD 1988 ❑ Other (Describe) B12. Is the building located in a Coastal Barrier Resources System (CBRS) area or Otherwise Protected Area (OPA)? ❑Yes ®No Designation Date ❑ CBRS ❑ OPA SECTION C - BUILDING ELEVATION INFORMATION (SURVEY REQUIRED) Cl. Building elevations are based on: ❑ Construction Drawings` ❑ Building Under Construction" ® Finished Construction *A new Elevation Certificate will be required when construction of the building is complete. C2. Elevations -Zones Al-A30, AE, AH, A (with BFE), VE, V1-V30, V (with BFE), AR, AR/A, AR/AE, AR/A1-A30, AR/AH, AR/AO. Complete Items C2.a-g below according to the building diagram specified in Item AT Benchmark Utilized Seminole County #3624801Vertical Datum NGVD 1929 Conversion/Comments Check the measurement used. a) Top of bottom floor (including basement, crawl space, or enclosure floor)_ 36.5 ® feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) b) Top of the next higher floor _ _ ❑ feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) c) Bottom of the lowest horizontal structural member (V Zones only) _ _ ❑ feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) d) Attached garage (top of slab) _ _ ❑ feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) e) Lowest elevation of machinery or equipment servicing the building 36.7 ® feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) (Describe type of equipment in Comments) f) Lowest adjacent (finished) grade (LAG) 35.8 ® feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) g) Highest adjacent (finished) grade (HAG) 36.4 ® feet ❑ meters (Puerto Rico only) SECTION D - SURVEYOR, ENGINEER, OR ARCHITECT CERTIFICATION This certification is to be signed and sealed by a land surveyor, engineer, or architect authorized by law to certify elevation information. 1 certify that the information on this Certificate represents my best efforts to interpret the data available. 1 understand that any false statement may be punishable by fine or imprisonment under 18 U.S. Code, Section 1001. ® Check here if comments are provided on back of form. Certifier's Name Paul D. Watkins Title Professional Surveyor and Mapper Address 629 Maitland Avenue License Number LS6315 Company Name Central Florida Consulting Surveyors, Inc City Altamonte Springs State FL ZIP Code 32701 Sign FEMA Form 81-31, February 2006 Telephone (407)767-0166 6_",5-� See reverse side for continuation. Replaces all previous editions s . . y:6. IMPORTANT: In these spaces, copy the corresponding information from Section A. For Insurance Company Use: Building Street Address (including Apt., Unit, Suite, and/or Bldg. No.) or P.O. Route and Box No. Policy Number 1831 Rinehart Road City Sanford StateFLZIP Code 32771 Company NAIC Number SECTION D - SURVEYOR, ENGINEER, OR ARCHITECT CERTIFICATION (CONTINUED) Copy both sides of this Elevation Certificate for (1) community official, (2) insurance agent/company, and (3) building owner. Comments Elevations of equipment in Section C2.e) include: Concrete Transformer Pad Signature �,��/� Date / GGGC� � b ❑ Check here if attachments SECTION E -BUILDING ELEVATION INFORMATION (SURVEY NOT REQUIRED) FOR ZONE AO AND ZONE A (WITHOUT BFE) For Zones AO and A (without BFE), complete Items El-E5. If the Certificate is intended to support a LOMA or LOMR-F request, complete Sections A, B, and C. For Items E1-E4, use natural grade, if available. Check the measurement used. In Puerto Rico only, enter meters. El. Provide elevation information for the following and check the appropriate boxes to show whether the elevation is above or below the highest adjacent grade (HAG) and the lowest adjacent grade (LAG). a) Top of bottom floor (including basement, crawl space, or enclosure) is ❑feet meters ❑above or ❑below the HAG. b) Top of bottom floor (including basement, crawl space, or enclosure) is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or ❑ below the LAG. E2. For Building Diagrams 6-8 with permanent flood openings provided in Section A Items 8 and/or 9 (see page 8 of Instructions), the next higher floor (elevation C2.b in the diagrams) of the building is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or ❑ below the HAG. E3. Attached garage (top of slab) is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or ❑ below the HAG. E4. Top of platform of machinery and/or equipment servicing the building is ❑ feet ❑ meters ❑ above or ❑ below the HAG. E5. Zone AO only: If no flood depth number is available, is the top of the bottom floor elevated in accordance with the community's floodplain management ordinance? ❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ Unknown. The local official must certify this information in Section G. SECTION F - PROPERTY OWNER (OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE) CERTIFICATION The property owner or owner's authorized representative who completes Sections A, B, and E for Zone A (without a FEMA-issued or community -issued BFE) or Zone AO must sign here. The statements in Sections A, B, and E are correct to the best of my knowledge. Property Owner's or Owner's Authorized Representative's Name Address City State ZIP Code Signature Date Telephone Comments ❑ Check here if attachments SECTION G - COMMUNITY INFORMATION (OPTIONAL) The local official who is authorized by law or ordinance to administer the community's floodplain management ordinance can complete Sections A, B, C (or E), and G of this Elevation Certificate. Complete the applicable item(s) and sign below. Check the measurement used in Items G8. and G9. G1. ❑ The information in Section C was taken from other documentation that has been signed and sealed by a licensed surveyor, engineer, or architect who is authorized by law to certify elevation information. (Indicate the source and date of the elevation data in the Comments area below.) G2. ❑ A community official completed Section E for a building located in Zone A (without a FEMA-issued or community -issued BFE) or Zone AO. G3. ❑ The following information (Items G4.-G9.) is provided for community floodplain management purposes. G4. Permit Number I G5. Date Permit Issued I G6. Date Certificate Of Compliance/Occupancy Issued G7. This permit has been issued for: ❑ New Construction ❑ Substantial Improvement G8. Elevation of as -built lowest floor (including basement) of the building: _❑ feet ❑ meters (PR) Datum G9. BFE or (in Zone AO) depth of flooding at the building site: ❑ feet ❑ meters (PR) Datum Local Official's Name Title Community Name Telephone Signature Date Comments Check here if attachments FEMA Form 81-31, February 2006 Replaces all previous editions -� Permit # : a ` Z�' Job Address: -*3 l & ibcf-( (83 l e Description of Work: n Historic District: Zoning: - CITY OF SACORD PF '041-fAPPLICATION i' _ Date: etAP (4 , r 'f t Y' IS Total Square Footage Value of Work: $ 2-0 D - O 0 Permit Type: Building Electrical Mechanical Plumbing Fire Spser/Alarm _ Pool Electrical: New Service - # of AMPS Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Cale. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair - Residential or Commercial _ Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial —)<-- Industrial Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required) Owners Name & Address: I Phone: Contractor Name & Address: State Phone & Fax: 4101- 4 .'l " Lill.. Contact Person: SV' AAA, ILA....b.....o T e..do.•. A .I.r.ncc Architect/Engineer: Address: Phone: Fax: Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the property of the requireme f Florida Lieaw, S 713. %a-Z % D �o Signature of Owner/Agent Date Si at a of o actor Agent Date Y. EEF A,ri-fI TT Print Owner/Agent's Name Prin actor/Age e y a1 Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date re of Notary -State of Florida Date Owner/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Produced ID APPROVALS: ZONING` UTIL: Special Conditions: Rev 03/2006 Contractor/Agent is PerI Known to Mey Produced IDL�`�`- r ENG: BLDG: No,� a a on9c ca o L_ A N Cn v N O Z m -OND � N E ro d i o p, �Z-. 01J �i co S y. CITY OF SANFORD FIRE DEPARTMENT FEES FOR SERVICES PHONE # 407-302-2516 • FAX # 407-302-2526 DATE: `7 ERMIT #: ! �� BUSINESS NAME/ PROJECT: ADDRESS:_ / 83/ PHONE N� (D n NO.: CONST. INSP. [ ] C / 0 INSP.:[ I REINSPECTION [ ] . PLANS REVIEO<Q F. A. [ ] F.S. HOOD (] PAINT BOOTH [ BURN PE )T [ TENT PERMIT ( TANK PERMIT (] OTHER,/� M ��,(._b ®o TOTAL FEES: (PER UNIT SEE BELOW)�� COMMENTS: Address / Bldg. # / Unit # 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6, 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Square Footage Fees per Bldg. / Unit Fees must be paid to Sanford Building Department, 300 N. Park Ave., Sanford, FI. 32771 Phone# -407- 330-5656. Proof of Payment must be made to Fire Prevention division before any further services can take place. I certify that the above is true and correct and that will comply with all applicable codes and ordinances of the City of Sanford, Florida. C- v` Sanford Fire Prevention Division Applicant's Signature V. E)CIT' 6RA " p w t 9 �XS V2.a.- y' Y. 3� "i Aw4�o � Lcnt. }o brood 0 Z q_ f a c 3to" x Z.% t Aca+►e►r,o,,t t. i rat C'{5TP t..t�•a�.] ©ws Ca olio" A,ns l �g• (�;�a i�ea�ase v�1s�rau�� Acwrtw► L nc ca,,4 nNtA 31� � s�� t� 3dPtion Awn"t cttin&ar vw{ .C�ew otr S (St.aV�� 3 N 3 tI 3►1 f FFn << � t 411 x �q.a pA _Pa `T jowAst e' bL cOrUN" d �l�u. qas Ana t^ate+-�c sl+�si s �- down on .&C.MV^.kton. mot) S�s-4ei.+. Si+�.a ll rai he�e., �}v �a t l rv�rank�� u►vcz s tci�i ca�►`o-ws . 4� 3 t iZ.i neln�a-r� (Z� 4+nsu.j cal � ►�dur- `Is3 _ .. - ►'4 pile tw YJ +hAnae.r 2A-u x Z� 7C 2A o► ..ram 'V%coA 4 3 �77 ==:i a 3lg t*t It i 1nna�, at � _ a t$ ZS a Ad _ g ig 80Y This manual is intended for use with Ansul R-1°02 Restaurant Fire Suppression Systems. Those who install, operate, recharge, or maintain these fire sup- pression systems should read this entire manual. Specific sec- tions will be of particular interest depending upon one's responsibilities. Design, installation, recharge, and maintenance of the system must conform to the limitations detailed in this manual and per- formed by an individual who attended an Ansul training program and became trained to install, recharge, design, and maintain the Ansul system. Fire suppression systems are mechanical devices. They need periodic care. Maintenance is .a vital step in the performance of your fire suppression system. As such it must be performed in accordance with NFPA 96 (Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease -Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment) and NFPA 17A (Standard on Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems) by an authorized Ansul distributor. To provide maximum assurance that the fire suppres- sion system will operate effectively and safely, maintenance must be conducted at six-month intervals, or earlier if the situation dic- tates. Twelve-year maintenance must include agent tank hydro- static testing. ANSUL PART NO.418087-08 ANSUL, ANSUL AUTOMAN and ANSULEX are trademarks of Ansul Incorporated or its - affiliates. REVISION INDEX UL EX•3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1 3-1-04 REV 9 DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO. 8-1-01 5-14 2 10-1-02 4-24 5 8-1-01 5-15 2 10-1-02 4-25 6 8-1-01 5-20 2 10-1-02 4-26 5 8-1-01 5-21 2 10-1-02 4-27 4 8-1-01 5-23 3 10-1-02 4-.30 3 8-1-01 5-27 Deleted 10-1-02 4-33 5 10-1-02 1-1 3 10-1-02 4-34 5 10-1-02 3-6 4 10-1-02 4-35 3 10-1-02 3-7 4 10-1-02 4-37 3 10-1-02 4-1 5 . 10-1-02 5 2 3 10-1-02 4-2 3 10-1-02 5-2.1 4 1-0-1-02 4-3 4 10-1-02 5-4 4 10-1-02 4-5 3 104-02 5-5 4 1071-02 4-6 4 10-1=02 5-6 2 10-1-02 4-7 3 10-1-02 `5-7 3 10-1-02 4-8 5 10-1-02 5-18 4 10-1-02 4-10 5 10-1-02 5-19 4 10-1-02 4-12 5 10-1-02 6-3 2 10-1-02 4-14 5 10-1-02 6-4 2 10-1-02 4-15 4 10-1-02 8-2 2 10-1-02 4-16 5 10-1-02 8-4 4 10-1-02 4-17 5 10-1-02 •8-5 3 10-1-02 4-18 5 10-1-02 8-6 4 10-1-02 4-19 3 10-1-02 8-7 3 10-1-02 4-20 4 10-1-02 8-8 1 10-1-02 4-21 3 10-1-02 9-1 5 10-1-02 4-22 3 1.0-1-02 9-2 5 ► maicates remea inrormation. L ■ Indicates no change to text —change in page sequence only. REVISION INDEX UL EX 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2 REV.3 3-1-04 DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE REV. NO: 10-1-02 9-3 5 3-1-04 3-10 2 10-1-02 9-4 7 3-1-04 4-4 .5 10-1-02 9-5 5 3-1-04 4-9 7 10-1-02 R-6 4 3-1-04 4-11 7 10-1-02 9-6.1 3 3-1-04 4-13 5 10-1-02 9-6.2 2 3-1-04 4-23 6 10-1-02 9-7 3 3-1-04 4-28 4 10-1-02 9-8 3 3-1-04 4-29 4 10-1-02 9-9 3 3-1-04 4-31 6 10-1-02 9-10 3 3-1-04 4-32 5 10-1-02 9-10.2 1 3-1-04 4-36 3 10-1-02 9-11 5 3-1-04 4-38 5 10-1-02 9-12 3 3-1-04 4-39 4 10-1-02 9-13 Deleted 3-1-04 4-40 3 10-1-02 9-14 Deleted 3-1-04 4-41 3 10-1-02 9-15 Deleted 3-1-04 4-42 4 10-1-02 9-16 Deleted 3-1-04 4-43 4 3-1-04 1-2 4 3-1-04 4-44 4 3-1-04 2-1 3 3-1-04 4-45 2 3-1-04 2-2 4 3-1-04 4-46 4 3-1-04 3-1 4 3-1-04 4-47 3 3-1-04 3-2 4 3-1-04 4-48 3 3-1-04 3-3 7 3-1-04 4-49 3 3-1-04 3-4 6 3-1-04 4-50 3 3-1-04 3-5 5 3-1-04 4-51 3 3-1-04 3-8 6 3-1-04 4-52 2 3-1-04 3-9 3 3-1 04 4-53 2 ► Indicates revised information. ■ Indicates no change to text —_change in page sequence only. REVISION INDEX UL EX 3470 U'LC CEx747 Page 3 3-1-.04 REV. 1 DATE PAGE REV. NO. DATE PAGE `REV. NO. 3-1-04 4-54 2 3-1-04 4-55 2 3-1-04 4-56 .2 3-1-04 4-57 New Page 3-1-04 4-58 New Page 3-1-04 4-59 New Page 3-1-04 4-60 New Page 3-1-04 5-1 5 04 E 5-8 2 04 5 17 2 3-1-04 5-22 3 3-1-04 5-24 4 3-1-04 5-25 4 3-1-04 5-26 4 3-1-04 6-1 2 3-1-04 6-2 2 3-1-04 7-2 5 3-1-04 7-3 4 3-1 04 8-1 7 3-1-04 8-3 4 3-1-04 9-10.1 2 ► Indicates revised information. ` ■ Indicates no change to text —change in page sequence only. J TABLE OF CONTENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1 3-1-04. REV.7 SECTION PAGES SECTION PAGES I. GENERAL INFORMATION III. SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3-1 — 3-10 DESIGN AND APPLICATION 1-1 (Continued) ' UL LISTING 1_1 ELECTRICAL SWITCHES 3-9 DEFINITION OF TERMS 1-1 —1 2 ALARM INITIATING SWITCH 3-9 REGULATOR TEST KIT 3-10 IL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 2-1-2-2 FUSIBLE LINK 3-10 I ! TOTAL SYSTEM Single -Tank 2 1 2-1 MAXIMUM REGISTERING 3-10 Double -Tank 2-1 THERMOMETER — Multiple -Tank 2-2 HOSE/GROMMET PACKAGE 3-1.0 III. SYSTEM COMPONENTS 3-1 — 3-10 BURSTING DISC 3-10 NOZZLE AIMING DEVICE 3-10 EXTINGUISHING AGENT 3-1 "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED 3-1 STAINLESS STEEL ACTUATOR HOSE 3-10 i RELEASE ASSEMBLY IV. SYSTEM DESIGN 4-1 — 4-60 (MECHANICAL) e - "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED 3-1 NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS 4-1 — 4-31 j j RELEASE ASSEMBLY 1 (ELECTRICAL) Duct Protection 4-1 — 4,4 Electrostatic Precipitator 4-4 SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE 3-2 Protection ASSEMBLY Plenum Protection 4-5-4-6 RED PAINTED BRACKET ASSEMBLY 3-2 Appliance Protection ' REGULATED ACTUATOR 3 2 Fryer — Single Nozzle Protection 4-7-4-9 ASSEMBLY Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection — 4-10 — 4-1=2 AGENT TANK ASSEMBLY 3-2 Tilt Skillet/Braising Pan 4-12 Range Protection 4-13 — 4-16 OEM RELEASE/BRACKET 3-3 'Griddle Protection . 4-17 — 4-21 ASSEMBLY (FOR OEM Chain Broiler Protection 4722 IN -CABINET USE ONLY) Overhead Chain Broiler Protection 4-22 — 4-23 OEM REGULATED ACTUATOR 3 3 Upright/Salamander Broiler 4-23 ASSEMBLY Protection Electric Char -Broiler Protection 4-24 - TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY 3-3 Gas -Radiant Char Broiler 4 24 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE 3-3 Protection ASSEMBLY Lava -Rock (Ceramic) Char -Broiler 4-25 ADDITIONAL SHIPPING ASSEMBLY 3 4 ProtectionNatural Charcoal Broiler Protection 4-25 GAS CARTRIDGES 3-4 Alternate Ceramic/Natural 4-26 NOZZLES 3-5 Charcoal Char -Broiler Protection Wood Fueled Char -Broiler Protection 4-26 SWIVEL ADAPTOR 3-5 Wok Protection 4-27 j 4 RUBBER BLOW -OFF CAP 3-5 Nozzle Application Chart 4-28 — 4-31 METAL BLOW -OFF CAP 3-5 Specific Application by Model 4-32 — 4-39 Overlapping Nozzle Coverage 4-40 — 4-43 -- CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY 3 6 TANK AND CARTRIDGE 4-44 "QUIK-SEAL ADAPTOR 3-6 REQUIREMENTS "COMPRESSION -SEAL" ADAPTOR 3-6 ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT 4-44 — 4-46 —j "HOOD SEAL ADAPTOR 3-6 GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS ASSEMBLY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 4-46 - 4-53 DETECTORS 3-7 REQUIREMENTS PULLEY ELBOWS 3-7 "General Piping Requirements 4-46 Supply and Branch Line -4-47 — 4-48 PULLEY TEE 3-8 Identification STAINLESS STEEL CABLE 3-8 1.5 Gallon System 4-49 3.0 Gallon System 4-506.0 REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION 3 8 Gallon Manifolded System 4-51 — 4-52 MECHANICAL -GAS VALVES 3-8 9.0�Gallon System 4-53 ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES 3-9 - MANUAL RESET RELAY i 3-9 TABLE OF CONTENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2 REV.6 3-1-04 SECTION PAGES IV. SYSTEM DESIGN (Continued) DETECTION SYSTEM 4-54 — 4-55 REQUIREMENTS Detector Identification 4-54 Detector/Pulley Elbow Quantity 4-54 Detector Placement Requirements 4-54 — 4-55 Detection Line Requirements 4-55 Fusible Link Selection 4-55 MANUAL PULL STATION 4-56 REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL GAS VALVE 4-56 — 4-57 REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE 4-57 REQUIREMENTS Approvals 4-57 ALARM INITIATING SWITCH 4-57 REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL SWITCH 4-57 — 4-60 REQUIREMENTS V. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 5-1 - 5-26 MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS 5-1 - 5-2.1 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION 5-3-5-6 AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION 5-7 PIPING INSTALLING THE DETECTION 5-8 — 5-17 SYSTEM Installing "Clip -on" Style Linkage 5-8 — 5-12 "Scissors" Style Linkage Installation 5-12 — 5-15 Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage 5-15 — 5-17 INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL 5-18 — 5-19 PULL STATION INSTALLING MECHANICAL 5-19 — 5-22 GAS VALVE INSTALLING ELECTRICAL 5-23 GAS VALVE INSTALLING ELECTRICAL 5-24 SWITCHES INSTALLING ALARM 5-25 INITIATING SWITCH WIRING 24 VDC REGULATED 5-26 RELEASE ASSEMBLY VI. TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE 6-1-6-4 TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION 6-1 TESTING MECHANICAL GAS 6-1 VALVES TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS 6-2 VALVES TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH 6-2 TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM 6-3 SECTION PAGES VII. RECHARGE AND RESETTING 7-1-7-4 PROCEDURES CLEANUP PROCEDURES 7-1 RECHARGE 7-1 — 7-3 RESETTING 7-3-7-4 REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE 7-4 VIII. MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION 8-1 - 8-8 SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE 8-1 — 8-3 EXAMINATION 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE 8-4-8-8 EXAMINATION IX. APPENDIX 9-1 - 9-12 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE 9-1-9-4 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX 9-5 — 9-6.2 PARTS LISTS 9-7 — 9-10.2 MULTIPLE NOZZLE FRYER 9-11 PROTECTION CALCULATION EXAMPLES DESIGN AND APPLICATION The Ansul R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression . System is designed to provide fire protection for restaurant cooking appli- ances, hoods, and ducts. It is a pre-engineered group of mechan- ical and electrical components for installation by an authorized Ansul distributor. The basic system consists of an ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which includes a regulat- ed release mechanism and a liquid agent storage tank housed within a single enclosure. Nozzles; detectors, cartridges, liquid agent, fusible links, pulley tees, and pulley elbows are supplied in separate packages in the quantities needed for each fire suppres- sion system arrangement. The system provides automatic actuation; or it can be actuated manually through a remote manual pull station. The system is also capable of shutting down appliances at system actuation. For appliance shutdown requirements, refer to the current version of I NFPA 17A, "Standard For Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems," and NFPA 96, "Standard For Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations" Additional equipment includes: remote manual pull station, mechanical and electrical gas valves, pressure switches; and elec- trical switches for automatic equipment and gas line shut-off. + Accessories can be added, such as alarms, warning lights, etc., to installations where required. The R-102 system suppresses fire by spraying the plenum area, I ! the filters, cooking surfaces, and the exhaust duct system with a predetermined flow rate .of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire + Suppressant. When the liquid agent is discharged onto a cooking appliance fire, it cools the grease surface, and reacts with the hot grease (saponification) forming a layer of soap -like foam on the surface of the fat. This layer acts as insulation between the hot grease and the atmosphere, thus helping to prevent the escape of combustible vapors. Exhaust fans in the ventilating system should be left on. The forced draft of these fans assists the movement of the liquid agent through the ventilating system, thus aiding in the fire suppression process. These fans also provide a cooling effect in the plenum and duct after the fire suppression system has been discharged. The system is UL listed with or without fan operation. It is also recommended that make up or supply air fans, integral to the exhaust hood(s) being protected, should be shut down upon system actuation. ►Along with the fire suppression system, the total system design must include hand portable fire extinguisher(s) located within the cooking/restaurant area that can be used to manually suppress a fire that may be burning in an unprotected area. Refer to NFPA 10, "Standard For Portable Fire Extinguisher," for additional ► information. UL LISTING The R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System has been tested and is listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as a pre-engi- neered system. The system is in compliance with UL Test ► Standard 300. These tests require extinguishment of fires which are initiated in deep fat fryers, ranges, griddles, char -broilers, woks, upright broilers, -chain-broilers, filters, plenum chambers, hoods, and ducts after pre -loading each appliance with a pre- scribed amount of cooking grease. Each fire is allowed to progress to maximum intensity before the fire suppression system is � ! actuated. SECTION I — GENERAL INFORMATION' UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1-1 10-1-02 REV.3 DEFINITION OF TERMS Actuation Gas Line: Piping from the ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly which supplies nitrogen or carbon dioxide to the Regulated Actuator Assembly for multiple -tank sys- tem actuation. Agent Tank: A pressure vessel containing the liquid agent. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical): An assembly which contains the regulated release mechanism, agent tank (ordered separately), expellant gas hose, solenoid, and electric switch within a metal enclosure. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate component hookups. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Mechani- cal): An assembly which contains the regulated release mecha- nism, agent tank {ordered separately), and expellant gas hose within a metal enclosure. The renclosure contains knockouts to facilitate component hookups. Authority Having Jurisdiction: The "authority having jurisdiction" is the organization, office, or individual responsible for "approving" equipment, an installation, or a procedure. The phrase "Authority Having Jurisdiction" is used in a broad manner since jurisdictions and "approval" agencies, vary as do their responsibilities. Where public safety is primary, the "authority having jurisdiction" may be a federal, state, local, ,or other regional department or individual such as a fire chief, fire marshal, chief of a fire prevention bureau, labor department, health department, building official, electrical inspector, or others having statutory authority. For insurance pur- poses, an insurance company representative may be the "author- ity having jurisdiction" In many circumstances the property owner or his designated agent assumes the role of the "authority having jurisdiction;" at government installations, the commanding officer or departmental official may be the "authority having jurisdiction" Blow -Off Cap: A cap which covers the end of the nozzle tip and prevents grease from plugging the nozzle orifice. Branch Line: The agent distribution piping which -extends from the supply line to the nozzle(s). Bursting Disc: A disc installed in the tank adaptor which elimi- nates the siphoning of the agent up the pipe during extreme tem- perature variations. Cartridge: A sealed, steel pressure vessel containing nitrogen or. carbon dioxide gas used to pressurize the agent tank. Cooking Appliance: includes fryers, griddles, ranges, upright broilers, chain broilers, natural charcoal broilers, or char -broilers (electric, lava rock, gas -radiant, or mesquite). Cooking Area: Cooking area is defined as the maximum surface that requires protection. Each type of appliance has a defined cooking area. For example, the maximum cooking area is the fry - pot for a fryer without a dripboard and the maximum -cooking area is the combined frypot and dripboard for a fryer with a dripboard. Conduit Offset Assembly: A pre -formed piece of :conduit which can be installed between the Ansul regulated release and the con- duit to allow the wire rope for the detection, gas valve and remote manual pull station to be installed in a more convenient manner. SECTION I — GENERAL INFORMATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 1-2 REV.4 3-1-04 DEFINITION OFTERMS (Continued) Depth: When referring to depth as a linear dimension, it is the horizontal dimension measured from front to back of the appliance or plenum. Detector: A device which includes the detector bracket, detector linkage, and fusible link used for automatic operation of the fire ! suppression system. Detector Linkage: A device used to. support the fusible link. Distribution Piping: Piping which delivers the extinguishing agent from the tank to each discharge nozzle. See also Supply or Branch lines. Ducts (or Duct System): A continuous passageway for the trans- mission of air and vapors which, in addition to the containment components themselves, may include duct fittings, plenums, and/or other items or air handling equipment. Electrostatic Precipitator: A device used to aid in the cleaning of the exhaust air. This device is normally installed at or near the base of the ventilation duct. Expellant Gas Line: Piping and/or hose which supplies the nitro- gen or carbon dioxide gas from the regulated release assembly/ regulated actuator assembly to each agent tank. Flow Number: Term used in system design to describe the flow capacity of each nozzle used to determine the quantity of tanks needed to cover a certain group of hazards. Fusible Links: A form of fixed temperature heat detecting device employed to restrain the operation of a mechanical control until its designed temperature is reached. Gas Valve: A device used to shut off the gas supply to the cook- ing equipment when the system is actuated. Gas Valve Air Cylinder: An air cylinder, located in the release mechanism, which operates pneumatically to mechanically Unlatch a mechanical gas valve actuator, causing the gas valve to close upon system actuation. High Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the noz- zle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. Hood: A device provided for cooking appliances to direct and cap- ture grease -laden vapors and exhaust gases. It shall be construct- ed in a manner which meets the requirements of NFPA 96, Liquid Agent: A potassium -based solution used for the knock- down and suppression of fire. Low Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the noz- zle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. Maximum Length of Cooking Appliance: The maximum dimen- sion, on any side, which may be protected by one nozzle. Maximum Piping: Specified length of piping and number of fit- tings which must not be exceeded for each system. Medium Proximity: Indicates a distance (vertically) between the nozzle tip and the surface of the appliance being protected. Minimum Piping: Minimum length of distribution piping required between the agent tank outlet and any nozzle protecting a griddle, range, or fryer. Nozzle: A device designed to deliver the liquid agent with a spe- cific flow rate and stream pattern. Plenum: The space enclosed by the filters and the portion of the hood above the filters. Pre-engineered System: NFPA 17A defines a pre-engineered system as one which has "...predetermined flow rates,, nozzle pressures, and quantities of liquid agent" The R-102 system, as prescribed by UL (Underwriter's Laboratories), has specific pipe sizes, maximum and minimum pipe lengths and numbers of fit- tings, and number and types of nozzles. The hazards protected by this system are also specifically limited as to type and size by UL based upon actual fire tests. All limitations on hazards that can be protected and piping and nozzle configurations are contained in the R-102 installation and maintenance manual which is part of the UL listing. Pulley Elbow: A device used to change the direction of the wire rope which runs between: the regulated release mechanism and the detectors, the regulated release mechanism and the mechan- ical gas, valve, and/or the regulated release mechanism and the remote manual pull station. Pulley Tee: A device used to change the direction of two wire ropes which run from a regulated release or a regulated actuator to two remote manual pull stations, or from two regulated releases or regulated actuators to a single mechanical gas valve or from one regulated release or regulated actuator to two gas valves. Regulated Actuator Assembly: An assembly which contains the ► regulator, pneumatic actuator, agent tank, and expellant gas hose within a metal enclosure. This assembly is used to pressurize addi- tional agent tanks in a multiple tank system. Regulated Release Mechanism: An enclosed device within the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly which releases the expellant gas, activates alarms, and/or shuts off other devices when signaled automatically by a detector or manually with a remote pull station. Regulator: A device used to regulate the pressure from the nitro- gen cartridge into the agent tank(s) when the system is actuated. Remote Manual Pull Station: A device which provides manual actuation of the system from a remote location. Salamander Broiler: A broiler very similar in design to the upright broiler. A salamander broiler is used for general broiling of meats and fish, toasting, and holding/warming foods. Most contain a removable grease drip tray. Supply Line: The agent distribution piping which extends from the agent tank outlet and serves as a manifold for the branch lines. Series Detector: Any detector located in -line between the regu- lated release assembly and the terminal detector. Terminal Detector: The last in a series of detectors, or the only detector used in a single -detector system. This detector is thus named because it is at the point at which the wire rope ends, or "terminates." There is only one terminal detector per detection system. Transition: An extension of the hood or canopy which allows for the smooth transmission of gases, air, and vapors between the hood opening and the base of the ventilation duct. Vent Plug: A device used to prevent pressure build-up within the agent tank or agent distribution lines due to temperature fluctuations. TOTAL SYSTEM There are three types of R-102 Restaurant fire Suppression Systems: 1. Single -tank System 2. Double -tank System 3. Multiple -tank System The type of system required for the particular installation will be determined through the guidelines covered in "System Design." Additional equipment which may be required to complete the sys- tem design is explained in the "System Components" section. Additional devices covered are: remote manual pull stations, mechanical and electrical gas shut-off valves, electrical switches, and pressure switches. Single -Tank System The R-102 single -tank system is available with a stainless steel enclosure and consists of: 1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or Mechanical) 2. Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge 3. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant - 4. Discharge Nozzles j 5. Detection Components 6. Additional Devices (As Required) The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release ► mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing detection system and additional equipment. Refer to "System Components" section for individual component descriptions. r6t;T� FIGURE 1 000133 W • SECTION II - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION UL EX. 3470 OLC CEx747 Page 2-1 3-1-04 REV.3 Double -Tank System The R-102 double -tank system is available with a stainless steel enclosure and consists of: 1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or Mechanical) 2. Nitrogen Cartridge and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge 3. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppr-essant 4. Enclosure or Bracket Assembly 5. Discharge Nozzles 6. Detection Components 7. Additional Devices (As Required) The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release ► mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant piping, detection system, and additional equipment. The -enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the system. Refer to "System Components" section for individual com- ponent descriptions. •= FIGURE 2 W0134 SECTION 11 — SYSTEM DESCRIPTION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 2-2 REV.4 3-1-04 TOTAL SYSTEM (Continued) Multiple -Tank System The R-102 multiple -tank system is available with a stainless steel enclosure and consists of: 1. ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly (Electrical or Mechanical) 2. Nitrogen Cartridge(s) and/or Carbon Dioxide Cartridge(s) 3. Regulated Actuator Assembly(ies) 4. ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant 5. Enclosure or Bracket Assembly(ies) 6. Discharge Nozzles 7. Detection Components 8. Additional Devices (As Required) The regulated release assembly contains the regulated release . mechanism, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation piping, expellant piping, detection system, and additional equipment. ,Each regulated actuator assembly is mounted separately but with- in the guidelines of the regulated release assembly actuation/ expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actua- tion of the system. The assembly contains the pneumatic actuator, ► regulator, agent tank, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure plugs to facilitate installing expellant piping. Each enclosure or bracket assembly is mounted separately but within the guidelines of the regulated release assembly or regulat- ed actuator assembly expellant gas piping requirements to ensure simultaneous actuation of the system. Refer to "System Components" section for individual component descriptions. A FIGURE 3 0001 35 EXTINGUISHING AGENT ANSULEX Low pH Liquid'Fire Suppressant (1.5 gallon —Part No. 79694 or 3.0 gallon - Part No. 79372) is a potassium -based solu- tion designed for fast knock -down and suppression of grease - related fires. The agent is shipped in plastic containers which pro- vide one complete tank charge. Agent storage life expectancy is twelve years. The distributor must record the batch numbers and date of shipment receipt to be filed with each installation record. "ANSULEX" LOW pH LIQUID FIRE SUPPRESSANT 3.0 GALLON 1.5 GALLON SHIPPING WT. 35 LB. (16 kg) SHIPPING WT. 19 LB. (9 kg) 000136 - 000137 FIGURE 1 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL) The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Mechanical Release Assembly _ (Part No. 429853) contains the regulated release mechanism, expellant gas hose for agent tank hookup, and enclosure knock- outs to facilitate installing actuation piping; expellant piping; detec- tion system; and additional equipment. This regulated release assembly is used in single, double, and multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface. The release mechanism can be used to interconnect both the actuation and expellant gas lines as required per system design- The regulator is designed to allow a constant flow of gas into the tank at 110 psi (759 kPa) when the system is actuated. The agent tank must be ordered separately. i' In single, double, and multiple -tank systems, the provided expel- lant gas hose connects the agent tank to the bottom outlet of the regulator. In -double and multiple -tank system configurations, the back outlet of the regulator is.used as an expellant gas feed for one additional tank -enclosure or tank -bracket hookup- The enclo- sure contains the required knockouts to facilitate this connection. If a pressure switch is to be attached to the regulator, additional fit- 7 j tings are required. The tank is mounted within the enclosure. The tank contains an adaptor/tube assembly with a burst disc union. The burst disc helps prevent siphoning of the agent up the pipe due to significant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is located. The tank is mild steel and, under normal conditions, requires hydrosta- tic testing every twelve years. The detection and additional equipment required per -system design are connected to the release mechanism. The enclosure contains knockouts to facilitate detection and additional hookups. The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Automatic actuation occurs when a fusible link within the detection system separates in a fire condition. Manual actuation of the system occurs when personnel pull .on the remote manual pull station Pull ring. ' SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-1 3-1-04 REV 4 "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (MECHANICAL) NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST 81 ORDERED SEPARATEI OR SEE PAGE 3-4 RELEASE MECHANIS REGULATOR SHIPPING WT. 25 LB. (11 kg) FIGURE 2 000139 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ELECTRICAL) The ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Electrical Release Assembly (Part No. 429856) is identical to the mechanical version except it also contains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical switch. The solenoid is used to provide electrical actuation of the release mechanism. The electric switch is used to protect the solenoid by opening the circuit to the solenoid once the system is fired. Additional electrical switches can be added as required for auto- matic equipment and gas shut-off accessories, as well as initiating audible and visual alarms. "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY '(ELECTRICAL) . NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY OR'SEE PAGE 3-4 REGULATOR 'SHIPPING WT. 34 LB. 05 kg) SWITCH SOLENOID "FIGURE 3 000139 SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-2 REV.4 3-1-04 SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY The Single Tank Enclosure Assembly (Part No. 429870) is used in double and multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface near the regulated release or regulated actuator assembly its expellent gas line will be connected to. The enclosure is designed for mounting either a 1.5 gallon (Part No. 429864) or a 3.0 gallon tank (Part No. 429862) in a minimum amount of space. ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY OR SEE PAGE 3-4 MOUNTING ENCLOSURE SHIPPING W1 13 LB.(6 kg) FIGURE 4 000142 RED PAINTED BRACKET ASSEMBLY The Bracket Assembly (Part No. 429878).is used in double and multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface near the regulated release assembly or regulated actuator assembly that its expellant gas line will be connected to. The tank bracket is constructed of mild steel and painted red. It is designed for mounting the tank in a minimum amount of space. The Bracket Assembly can only be utilized with 3.0 gallon tanks (Part No. 429862). BRACKET ASSEMBLY MOUNTING / BRACKET SHIPPING WT. 7 LB. (3 kg) I FIGURE 5 OD0141 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY The Regulated Actuator Assembly (Part No. 429850) contains the regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose for agent tank P. hookup, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing expellant pip- ing. This assembly is used in multiple -tank systems and must be mounted to a rigid surface. The regulator contains two outlets 1350 apart. One outletis used to interconnect the expellant gas hose to the enclosed agent tank. The other outlet connects an expellant gas line to an additional enclosure or bracket assembly. The regulator is designed to allow a constant flow of nitrogen into each agent tank connected (two tanks maximum) at 110 psi (759 kPa). The pneumatic actuator is designed to puncture the expellant gas cartridge seal upon receiving pressure from the regulated release assembly actuation piping. The enclosure contains a knockout, to facilitate distribution piping hookup. REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY OR SEE PAGE 3-4 PNEUMATIC, ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATOR ING WT. (9 kg) FIGURE 6 000143 AGENT TANK ASSEMBLY The agent tank shipping assembly (3-Gallon, Part No. 429862, and 1.5 Gallon, Part No. 429864) consists of a stainless steel tank and an adaptor/tube assembly. The adaptor/tube assembly con- tains a burst disc. The burst disc prevents agent leakage due to significant temperature fluctuations in the area where the tank is located. Under normal conditions, the tank requires hydrostatic testing every twelve years. The date of manufacture is stamped on the tank nameplate. The tank is shipped uncharged and must be filled with only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant during installation. 3 GALLON SHIPPING WT. 7 LB. (3 kg) 1.5 GALLON SHIPPING WT. 5 LB. (2 kg) , ADAPTOR/ = ASSEMBLY AGENT TANK FIGURE 7 000140 OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY (FOR OEM IN -CABINET USE ONLY) The OEM Regulated Mechanical Release/Bracket Assembly, Part No. 79493, contains the same regulated release mechanism as the standard ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release Assembly. The OEM Regulated Electrical Release/Bracket Assembly, Part No. 418054, is identical to the mechanical version except it con- tains a factory installed 120 VAC solenoid and electrical switch. These release/bracket assemblies must be installed in a suitable equipment enclosure either horizontally or vertically. They contain all the necessary mounting and conduit holes needed to fully install the assembly. The agent tank is installed separately and need not be bracketed once it is piped and filled. NOTE: OEM ► Release/Bracket Assembly must be installed high enough in cabi- net so that there is sufficient room to install and remove cartridge. RELEASE MECHANISM REGULAT MOUNTING BRACKET HIPPING WT. 10 LB.(5 kg) FIGURE 8 000144 OEM REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY The OEM Regulated Actuator Assembly, Part No. 418691, .includes the regulator, pneumatic actuator, expellant gas hose and OEM bracket. Also available is an OEM Regulated Actuator Assembly with all the above mentioned components except for the bracket. This assembly is Part No. 418522. SHIPPING WT. 4 LB. (2 kg) FIGURE 9 002225 SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-3 3-1-04 REV.7 TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY The Two Tank Enclosure Assembly, Part No. 429872, consists of two expellant gas hoses, two grommets, and the mounting enclo- sure. The assembly is used in 9 gallon systems. It .can be coupled with a 3-gallon regulated release assembly or a 3-gallon regulated actuator assembly to give a total of 9 gallons of agent. Agent tanks must be ordered separately. The tank enclosure is designed to mount in a minimum amount of space. SHIPPING WT. 26 LBS. (12 kg) FIGURE10 062277 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ULC APPROVED ONLY) The 24 VDC Regulated Release Assembly, Part No. 429859, is used where electric, thermostat detection is required via the use of a releasing control unit. This assembly, consists of a 24 VDC ANSUL AUTOMAN 11-C regulated release mechanism, expellant gas hose, and enclosure knockouts to facilitate installing actuation piping, expellant piping, detection system, and additional equip- ment. Agent tank must be ordered separately. The system can be actuated automatically or manually. Automatic actuation occurs when the control panel receives a signal from the detection circuit. The panel then sends an electrical signal to the 24 VDC regulated release, causing it to actuate. When actuation occurs, the gas cartridge is punctured, pressurizing the agent tank and discharging the agent through the distribution piping. Manual actuation of the system occurs when personnel pull on the remote manual pull station pull ring. NOTE: AGENT TANK MUST BE ORDERED SEPARATELY SHIPPING WT. 34 LB. 05 kg) FIGURE 11 002279 I. SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-4 REV.6 3-1-04 ADDITIONAL SHIPPING ASSEMBLIES GAS CARTRIDGES Several complete shipping assemblies are available containing The R-102 system uses gas cartridges to store nitrogen or carbon both the release or actuator mechanism and the agent tank. When dioxide expellant gases under pressure until the system is actuat- ordering a complete shipping assembly, order the following part ed, at which time the cartridge seal is punctured and the released numbers: gas expels liquid agent from one or more tanks through the dis- Shipping Wt. charge piping and out the discharge nozzles. I Part No. Description lb. (kg) Four nitrogen gas cartridges and three carbon dioxide gas car- 430299 3.0 Gallon Mechanical Release 33 (15) tridges are available as shown in Figure 12. Shipping Assembly including: Cartridges noted as TC/DOT are both Transport Canada (TC) and 429853 Mechanical Regulated Department of Transportation (DOT) approved. Cartridges noted Release Assembly as DOT are Department of Transportation approved only. _ 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly Cartridge selection options are provided in Section IV under Tank 430300 1.5 Gallon Mechanical Release 30 (14) and Cartridge Requirements. Shipping Assembly including: NITROGEN GAS CARTRIDGES 429853 Mechanical Regulated Release Assembly 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly t i 430309 3.0 Gallon Re ulated Actuator 36 (16) "181Ng (20 cm) (2 3/B m) t0 t/2 . Shipping Assembly including: (zss cm) (27 cm) 14 5/8 1N. 429850 Regulated Actuator Assembly (37.1 cm) 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly 21/2 IN 430316 1.5 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 18 (8) (s.a cm) 21/2 IN. 4 3/16 IN. Shipping Assembly including: (6.4 cm) (10.6 cm) 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box 3 9n6 IN. ' Assembly (9 cm) 429864 1.5 Gallon Tank Assembly LT20-R LT-30-R DOUBLE -TANK LT-A-101-30 418511 Hose Assembly CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE CARTRIDGE y PART NO. 423429 PART NO.423435 PART NO.423493 PART NO, 423491 430317 3.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 20 (9) lT00DOT) (T000146 (rc/oon (T0 0Don 000,4s 000,as aoo,a 000iae Shipping Assembly including: w 429870 Single Tank Mounting Box CARBON DIOXIDE CARTRIDGES Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly _ 418511 Hose Assembly - - 430324 6.0 Gallon Stainless Steel Enclosure 40 (18) 9 IN. 7 7/8IN. Shipping Assembly including: (22.9 cm) (20 cm) 115/8IN. 429872 Two Tank Mounting Box _ (29.5 cm) Assembly 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly (2) 2 1N. 2 1/2 1N. 430332 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket Shipping 20 (9) (5.1 cm) (s.a cm) Assembly including: 21/2IN. 429878 3.0 Gallon Mounting Bracket (6.4 cm) Assembly 101-10 CARTRIDGE 101-20 CARTRIDGE 101-30 CARTRIDGE 429862 3.0 Gallon Tank Assembly PART NO. 423439'(TC/DOT) PART NO.423441 PART NO.423443 PART NO. 15850 (DOT) (TCIDOT) (TC/DOT) 000149 000150 000151 FIGURE 12 I NOZZLES There are twelve ,types of discharge nozzles each designed to dis- tribute the liquid agent in a uniform pattern throughout the hazard area: 1. 1 W Nozzle 7. 245 Nozzle 2. IN Nozzle 8. 260 Nozzle 3. 1/2N Nozzle 9. 290 Nozzle 4. 3N Nozzle 10. 2120 Nozzle 5. 2W Nozzle 11. 1F Nozzle 6. 230 Nozzle 12. 1100 Nozzle Although these nozzles are similar in appearance and have certain common parts, the tip of each nozzle is designed for a specific application and must only be used in those areas. See Nozzle Application Chart in Section IV — System Design, for individual nozzle usage. RECESS FOR — i BLOW OFF CAP LOOP NOZZLE " STAMPING 318 - 18 NPT FEMALE THREAD INTERNAL CUP STRAINER INSIDE XXXX-X VENDOR CODE (IF PRESENT) FIGURE 13 000002 Nozzle Identification Chart Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle* Flow Type Part No. Stamping No. Nozzle Identification 1 W Nozzle 419336 1 W 1 Chrome -Plated Body IN Nozzle 419335 IN 1 Chrome -Plated Body 1/2N Nozzle 419334 1/2N 112 Chrome -Plated Body Metal blow -off caps are not allowed with the 1/2N nozzle 3N Nozzle 419338 3N 3 Chrome -Plated Body 2W Nozzle 419337 2W 2 Chrome -Plated Body 230 Nozzle 419339 230 2 Chrome -Plated Body 245 Nozzle 419340 245 2 Chrome -Plated Body 260 Nozzle 419341 260 2 Chrome -Plated Body 290 Nozzle 419342 290 2 Chrome -Plated Body 2120 Nozzle 419343 2120 2 Chrome -Plated Body 1'F Nozzle 419333 IF 1 Chrome -Plated Body 1100 Nozzle 430912 1100 1 Chrome -Plated Body *Nozzle stamping may contain an additional letter indicating a vendor's code. SECTION III -SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-5 3-1-04 REV.5 SWIVEL ADAPTOR The Swivel Adaptor Assembly, Part No. 418569, consists of a swiv- el nut, swivel body and swivel ball., All are.chrome-plated. The swiv- el adaptor allows any nozzle to -be rotated approximately 300 in all directions. Swivel Adaptors must be ordered as a Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly, Part No. 423572, which contains 25 Swivel Adaptors. 3/8 - 18 NPT FEMALE THREAD 3/8 - 18 NPT MALE.THREAD 30 DEGREE ROTATION RUBBER BLOW -OFF CAPS FIGURE 14 000003 The Rubber Blow -Off Cap, Part No. 77676, help -keep the orifice of the nozzle free of grease or other substances that could interfere with agent distribution. A retaining strap attaches the blow -off cap ,to the nozzle. Rubber Blow -Off .Caps must be, ordered as a Shipping Assembly, Part No. 77695, which,contains 50 blow -off caps, or Part No. 77411, which•contains 12 blow -off caps. FIGURE 15 000M . METAL BLOW -OFF CAP Two types of metal blow -off caps are available as options to the standard rubber .caps. The metal cap can .be used in unusually high heat conditions, generally over 400 °F (204 *C). The metal blow -off cap is attached to the nozzle by means of a stainless steel wire which prevents it from falling into the appliance during -dis- charge. Shipping Assembly Part No. 79745contains 10 metal blow -off caps for use on standard, non -swivel nozzles and Shipping Assembly Part No. 415568 contains 10 metal blow -off caps for use on swivel nozzles. NOTICE If metal blow -off caps are required for upright broil- er or -salamander protection, use (2) two 1 N noz- zles (Part No. 419335) instead of 1/2N nozzles. STAINLESS STEEL WIRE METAL CAP FIGURE 16 000152 SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-6 REV. 4 10-1-02 CONDUIT OFFSET ASSEMBLY The conduit offset assembly, Part No. 79825, is used to change direction of the wire rope on detection, mechanical gas valve, and remote pull station lines. The conduit offset assembly can only be used in the area where the conduit attaches to the regulated release assembly. When using the conduit offset assembly, the maximum number of pulley elbows is still allowed. The Conduit Offset Shipping Assembly, Part No. 79825, consists of 6 conduit offsets. CONDUIT COUPLING CONDUIT OFFSET CONDUIT CONNECT FIGURE 17 OOD153 "QUIK-SEAL" ADAPTOR The "Quik-Seal" adaptor is a listed mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liquid -tight seal around both distribution piping and detection conduit which runs through restaurant hoods and ducts. The "Quik-Seal" adaptor accepts threaded pipe or conduit. The adaptor is available for 1/4 in. (Part No. 78195), 3/8 in. (Part No. 77284), 1/2 in. (Part No. 77286), or 3/4 in. (Part No. 77288) pipe or conduit sizes. When using with EMT conduit, a conduit connector must be installed. in each end of the adaptor. The "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Shipping Assembly must be ordered as stated below: Shipping Assembly Hole Size Size Part No. Qty. Required 1/4 in. 78196 24 3/4 in. 3/8 in. 77285 24 1 1/8 in. 1/2 in. 77287 24 1 1/8 in. 3/4 in. 77289 24 1 3/8 in. ADAPTOR BODY GASKET R\ LOCKWASHER NUT FIGURE 18 000154 "COMPRESSION -SEAL" ADAPTOR This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liquid -tight seal around pipe and conduit when installing distribu- tion piping and detection conduit through restaurant hoods and ducts. The "Compression -Seal" adaptor is a straight -through design requiring no cutting or threading of conduit or pipe. The adaptor is available for'pipe sizes of 1/4 in. (Part No. 79148), 3/8 in. (Part No. 79150), 112 in. (Part No. 79146), and EMT conduit size of 1/2 in. (Part No. 79152). Each "Compression -Seal" Adaptor Shipping Assembly must be ordered as stated below: Shipping Assembly Hole Size Size Part No. Qty. Required 1/4 in. Pipe/ 112 in. tube 79149 24 3/4 in. 3/8 in. Pipe / 5/8 in. tube 79151 24 1 1/8 in. 112 in. Pipe 79147 24 1 1/8 in. 1/2 in. EMT Conduit 79153 24 1 1/8 in. GASKET NUT COMPRESSION NUT ADAPTOR BODY LOCKWASHER FIGURE 19 000155 "HOOD SEAL" ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY This adaptor is a mechanical bulkhead fitting that produces a liq- uid -tight seal around 1/2 in. EMT conduit when installing the detec- tion line through restaurant hoods and duct. The adaptor accepts a high temperature pulley elbow and, when used, correctly posi- tions the elbow or conduit in line with the conduit adaptor hole in the detector bracket. The "Hood Seal" eliminates the need for mul- tiple elbows when penetrating the top of a hood when installing the detection line. "Hood Seal" Adaptors are available in quantities of 6 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 423253. SEAL NUT SEAL %WASHER ADAPTOR BODY GASKET PULLEY O ELBOW (NOT PART fT OF ASSEMBLY) USE ONLY PULLEY ELBOW, PART NO.423250 FIGURE 20 OD0156 SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-7 10-1-02 REV.4 DETECTORS CLIP -ON STYLE - PART NO. 56837 AND 56838 The detector consists of three basic components: the bracket, link- -' age, and fusible link. (Fusible links are not included and must be ordered separately.) The bracket holds the entire assembly to the FUSIBLE LINKAGE r mounting surface. The linkage is used to support the fusible link. LINK BRACKET The fusible link is designed to separate at a specific temperature and release the wire rope, thereby actuating the regulated release mechanism. aoolsl There are three styles of detectors available: the clip -on style, the i hinged style, and the scissor style. HINGED STYLE - PART NO. 15373 AND 15375 The clip -on style allows the wire rope to be strung completely p through the detection system conduit and brackets first and the detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later. LINKAGE FUSIBLE The hinged style detector requires the wire rope to be strung to the LINK BRACKET detector bracket, and then "threaded" through the linkage assem- bly before continuing to the next detector bracket. The scissor style allows the wire rope to be strung completely 000159 through the detection system conduit and brackets first and the detector linkage assemblies are then clipped on later. SCISSOR STYLE - PART NO. 417368 AND 417369 !, Each style of detector consists of two types of assemblies: BRACKET - The Terminal Detector (Part No. 56838, 15375, or 417368) LINKAGE includes a test link and is placed last in a series of detectors. This detector is sometimes referred to as the end -of -line detector and is thus named because it is at the point at which the wire rope "ter- FUSIBLE minates," or is anchored at the detector bracket. Only one terminal LINK detector is required per detection system. I The Series Detector (Part No. 56837, 15373, or 417369) is any i FIGURE 21 detector located in -line between the regulated release assembly ' and the terminal detector. PULLEY ELBOWS .I- When using Part No. 56837 and 56838 style detectors, a total of There are two types of pulley elbows used to change the direction 12 detectors can be in one detection system: 11 series detectors, of the wire rope by 90°. Ansul recommends for temperatures not in Part No. 56837 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 56838. excess of 700 OF (371 °C). Part No. 415670 has socket ends with When using Part No. 15373 and 15375 style detectors, a total of 5 set screws for 1/2 in. conduit, and Part No. 423250 has compres- detectors can be in one detection system: 4 series detectors, Part Sion ring ends also for 1/2 in. conduit. Pulley elbows must be i No. 15373 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 15375. ordered in quantities of 50 as Shipping Assembly Part No. 415671 '- (socket end type) and Part No. 423251 (compression •end type). When using Part No. 417368 and 417369 style detectors, a total of 15 detectors can be in one detection' system: 14 series detec- PART NO.415670 PART NO-423250 tors, Part No. 417369 and 1 terminal detector, Part No. 417368. _ O 000160 000161 FIGURE 22 SECTION III - SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-8 REV.6 3-1-04 PULLEY TEE The Pulley Tee (Part No. 427929) is used to change the direction of two wire ropes by 900. It must be used in areas where the tem- peratures are within the range of 32 OF to 130 OF (0 °C to 54 °C). Pulley tees can be used in mechanical gas valve actuation lines and remote manual pull station lines. Pulley tees cannot be used within a detection line. FIGURE 23 000447 STAINLESS STEEL CABLE The 1/16 in. stainless steel cable is run from the terminal detector, through conduit, all series detectors and pulley elbows, and into the regulated release mechanism trip lever. When any fusible link separates, the tension on the cable is relaxed, and the trip lever actuates the regulated release mechanism. The cable can also be used for mechanical gas valves and remote manual pull stations. The cable is available in 50 ft. 0 5 m) (Part No. 15821) and 500 ft. 0 52.4 m) (Part No. 79653) lengths. REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION The remote manual pull station (Part No. 4835 or Part No. 54011) is required for manual actuation of the regulated release assembly. The remote manual pull station should be mounted at a point of egress and positioned at a height determined by the authority having jurisdiction. Trim rings, Part No. 427074 (pack of 10), are available. PART NO.4835 (WITHOUT CABLE) PART NO. 54011 (WITH 50 FT. OF CABLE) a METAL STAMPED 000163 FIGURE 24 MECHANICAL GAS VALVES The mechanical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of gas to the appliances upon actuation of the regulated release assem- bly. The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1 1/4 in., 1 112 in., and 2 in. Ansul style; and 2 112 in. and 3 in. Asco style. The valves are rated for natural and LP gas. Both styles are UL Listed and includes the air cylinder, tubing, and fittings for connection to the release mechanism. Maximum Part Operating No. Description Pressure 55598 3/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (.69 bar) 55601 1 in. Gas.Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (.69 bar) 55604 1 1/4 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (.69 bar) 55607 1 1/2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (.69 bar) 55610 2 in. Gas Valve (ANSUL) 10 psi (.69 bar) 25937 2 112 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (.35 bar) 25938 3 in. Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (.35 bar A B C Valve Size in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) 3/4 in. 3 3/4 (95.3) . 6 3/8 (161.9) 5 1 /2 1139.7) 1 in. 3 3/4 (95.3) 6 3/8 (161.9) 5 1/2 (139.7) 1 1/4 in. 4 7/8 (123.8) 7 3/8 (187.3) 6 3/8 (161.9) 1 1/2 in. 4 7/8 (123.8) 7 3/8 (187.3) 6 3/8 (161.9) 2 in: 5 7/8. (149.2) 7 7/8 (200.0) 6 11/16 (169.9) 2 112 in. 7 13/16 (198.4) ----- 9 1/16 (230.2) 3 in. 7 25/32 (197.6) ----- 9 1/16 (230.2) e 3/4 IN. THRU 2 IN. 004200 2 112 IN. THRU 3 IN. 004209 FIGURE 25 Wr ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES The electrical gas valves are designed to shut off the flow of either i natural or LP gas to the appliances upon actuation of the regulat- ed release assembly. The valves are available in sizes of 3/4 in., 1 in., 1.112 in., 2 in., and 3 in. The valve is held open by an ener- gized solenoid and upon system actuation, the switch contacts .in the regulated release assembly open, thus de -energizing the cir- cuit to the gas valve solenoid, causing the valve to close. Valves are available in 120 VAC and are UL Listed. Part Max. Operating No. Description Pressure ''13707 3/4 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 13708 1 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 13709 1 1/2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 13710 2 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 25 psi (1.7 bar) 17643 3 in. Solenoid Gas Valve (ASCO) 5 psi (35 bar) ° Valve A B Size in. (mm) in. (mm) 3/4 in. 35116 (81.0) 3 5/8 (92.1) 1 in. 5 (127.0) 6 27/32 (173.8) 1 112 in. 5 (127.0) 5 19/32 (142.1) 2 in. 6 3/32 (78.6) 5 15/16 (150.8) 3 in. 7 13/16 (198.4) 7 29/32 (200.8) FIGURE 26 004210 MANUAL RESET RELAY The manual reset relay, Part No. 14702 or Part No. 426151, is required when using an electrical gas valve shut-off system. After the electric gas valve has closed, either due to system actuation or power failure, the valve cannot be re -opened, allowing gas to flow, until the. reset relay button is manually pressed, re -energizing the circuit. The reset relay is available 120 VAC.The manual reset relay is also recommended for electrical shut down. SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-9 3-1-04 REV.3 ELECTRICAL SWITCHES The electrical switches are intended for use withelectric gas valves, alarms, contactors; light6, contractor supplied electric power shut-off devices and other electrical devices that are designed to shut off or turn on when the system is actuated. Switches are available in kits: One Switch Kit; Part No. 423878, Two Switch Kit, Part No. 423879, Three Switch Kit, Part No. ► 423880, and Four Switch Kit, Part No, 423881. Mounting hardware and 12 in. (305 mm) long wire leads are provided with each kit. Each switch has a set of single -pole, double -throw contacts rated at: UL/cUL/CSA Rating ENEC Rating 250 VAC, 21A Resistive IE4T105µ Approved 250 VAC, 2 HP 250V, 21A Resistive 125 VAC, 1 HP 8A Motor Load COM N:O. FIGURE 28 001612 ALARM INITIATING SWITCH The Alarm Initiating Switch Kit, Part No. 428311, can be field mounted within the ANSUL AUTOMAN release. This switch must be used to close a supervised circuit to the building main fire alarm panel when the ANSUL AUTOMAN release actuates. This action will signal the fire alarm panel that there was a system actuation in the kitchen area. The switch kit contains all necessary mounting components along with a mounting instruction sheet. The switch is rated 50 mA, 28 VDC. SPACER TOWARD ANSUL WHEN SPACER AND AUTOMAN� SWITCH ARE PROPERLY MOUNTED, THIS DIVIDER MUST BE BETWEEN THE N.O. AND N.C. TERMINALS COM N.O. M, ALARM INITIATING SWITCH FIGURE 29 004890 FIGURE 27 000067 SECTION III — SYSTEM COMPONENTS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 3-10 REV.2 3-1-04 REGULATOR TEST KIT The Test Kit Assembly (Shipping Part No. 56972) is required to test the regulator setting and nitrogen flow during 12-year maintenance examinations. This will ensure that the regulator is functioning properly. FIGURE 30 000169 FUSIBLE LINK Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detector(s) according to the temperature condition chart below: ► K STYLE Fusible Link Part No. 415739 (1) 415740 (1) 415741 (1) ► 415742 (1) ► 415743 (1) ► ML STYLE Fusible Link Part No. 550368 (1) 550365 (1) 550366 0 ) 550009 (1) 550367 (1) 56816 (1) ► 56816 (1) ► HOSE/GROMMET PACKAGE The Hose/Grommet Package, Part No. 418511, consists of a 24 in. rubber hose and 2 (two) grommets. This package is required when mounting an AUTOMAN Regulated Release (or Regulated Actuator) and a tank enclosure (or tank bracket) side by side in ► either a manifolded system or an independent piping system. BURSTING DISC The R-102 Bursting Disc is installed in the tank adaptor assembly. The bursting disc eliminates the siphoning of the agent up the pipe during extreme temperature variations. The bursting discs are available in packs of 10, Part No. 417911. (5 FIGURE 32 000172 Fusible Link To Be Used NOZZLE AIMING DEVICE Shipping Where Assembly Temperature Temperature The Nozzle Aiming Device, Part No. 431992, is available to prop - Part No. Rating Does Not Exceed erly aim each nozzle to the correct aiming point. The device 415739 (1) 165 °F (74 °C) 100 °F (38 °C) clamps to. the nozzle and emits a small laser light that reflects on 415740 (1) 165 °F ( (74 °C) 100 °F (38 °C) the surface. that it is aiming at. The nozzle can then be rotated to 415744 (l) 212 °F (100 °C) 225 °F ( (66 °C) point at a predetermined aiming point and then tightened to hold 415745 (25) 280 °F (138 °C) 225 °F (107 °C) that angle. The aiming device adaptor attaches to the nozzle. The 415746 (25) 450 OF (232 °C) 375 OF (191 °C) shipping assembly consists of the aiming device and the adaptor. Fusible Link To Be Used Shipping Where Assembly Temperature Temperature Part No. Rating Does Not Exceed 551522 (10) 165 OF (74 °C) 100 OF (38 °C) • • ADAPTOR 551523 (10) 212 OF (100 °C) .150 OF (66 °C) NOZZLE 551524 (10) 280 OF (138 °C) 225 OF (107 °C) AIMING 551525 (10) 360 of (182 C) 300 of (149 C) DEVICE FIGURE 33 551526 (10) 450 F (232 C) 375 F (191 C) 006520 551527 (10) 500 OF (260 °C) 475 OF (246 °C) 73867 (25) 500 OF (260 °C) 475 OF (246 °C) STAINLESS STEEL ACTUATION HOSE 0 A643MO MOOR R aew nw L � K STYLE 000170 The Stainless Steel Actuation Hose is used to connect the actua- 0 ► tion line compression tees between each pneumatic actuator. The C4:hose has the same thread, 7/16-20, as the fittings. The actuation hose allows flexibility between the AUTOMAN and each regulated actuator. TEMPERATURE RATING STAMPED ON FUSIBLE LINK BODY L'Z. ML STYLE 500 °F (260 °C) ONLY 000171 FIGURE 31 MAXIMUM REGISTERING THERMOMETER The Maximum Registering Thermometer, Part No. 15240, is used to indicate the highest normal temperature for the protected area. Once this is established, the correct rated fusible link can be chosen. Hose Part No. Length 31809 16 in. (41 cm) 32335 20 in. (51 cm) 32336 24 in. (61 cm) 430815 42 in. (101 cm) Fitting Part No. Description 31810 Male Elbow (7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT) 31811 Male Tee (7/16-20 x 7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT) 32338 Male Straight Connector (7/16-20 x 1/4 in. NPT) 7/16-20 7/16-20 FIGURE 34 000433 SYSTEM DESIGN The Ansul R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System may be used on a number of different types of restaurant cooking appli- ances and hood and duct configurations_ The design information listed in this section deals with the limitations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those individuals responsible for the design of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current Ansul certificate in an R-102 training program. The R-102 and the PIRANHA systems use compatible agents and components, therefore, they may be used together for cooking appliance, hood, and duct protection. The primary ANSUL AUTOMAN Release can be either an R-102 or a PIRANHA ANSUL AUTOMAN Release and can actuate up to two additional R-102 or PIRANHA Regulated Actuators. In systems utilizing a .101 remote release, any combination of the maximum number of regulated actuators can be used. • Both systems must actuate simultaneously. • Each system must be designed and installed per its appropri- ate manual. • Adjacent appliances requiring protection must be protected with the same type of system, either R-102 or PIRANHA, unless the center -to -center spacing between the adjacent R-102 and PIRANHA nozzles is no less than 36 inches. • When appliances are protected with R-102 nozzles, the hood and connecting duct above those appliances cannot be pro- tected with PIRANHA nozzles. • Mixing systems in a common plenum is not allowed. One of the key elements for restaurant fire protection is a correct system design. This section is divided into ten sub -sections: Noz- zle Placement Requirements, Tank Quantity Requirements, Actu- ation and Expellant Gas Line Requirements, Distribution Piping Requirements, Detection System Requirements, Manual Pull Sta- tion Requirements, Mechanical Gas Valve Requirements, Electri- cal.Gas Valve Requirements, Electrical Switch Requirements, and Pressure Switch Requirements. Each of these sections must be completed before attempting any installation. System design sketches should be made of all aspects of design for reference during installation. NOZZLE PLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS This section gives guidelines for nozzle type, positioning, and quantity for duct, plenum, and individual appliance protection. This section must be completed before determining tank quantity and piping requirements. Duct Protection — Single Nozzle All duct protection is UL listed without limitation of maximum duct length (unlimited length). This includes all varieties of ductworks both horizontal and vertical including ducts that run at angles to the horizontal and ducts with directional bends. The R-102 system uses different duct nozzles depending on the ,size of duct being protected. • SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-1 10-1-02 REV.5 GENERAL INFORMATION 1. Nozzles must be located 2-8 in. (5-20 cm) into the center of the duct opening, discharging up. See Figure 1. 2-BIN. (5 - 20 cm) FIGURE 1 000177 2.In installations where a UL listed damper assembly is employed, the duct nozzle can be installed beyond the 8 in. (20 cm) maximum, to a point just beyond the damper assem- bly that will not interfere with the damper. Exceeding the maxi- mum of 8 in. (20 cm) in this way will not void the UL listing of the system. 3. Previously listed 3 flow number and 5 flow number duct -pro- tection detailed in earlier published manual, Part No. 418087- 06, can also still by utilized. DUCT SIZES UP TO 50 IN. (1 27cm) PERIMETER/ 16 IN. (41 cm) DIAMETER • One 1100 nozzle (Part No. 430912) = one flow number • 50 in. (127 cm) perimeter maximum • 16 in. (41 cm) diameter maximum DUCT SIZES UP TO 100 IN..(254 cm) PERIMETER/ 32 IN. (81.3 cm) DIAMETER •. One 2W Nozzle (Part No. 419337) = two flow numbers • 100 in. (254 cm) perimeter maximum • 32 in. (81.3 cm) diameter maximum • A 2WH nozzle (Part No. 78078) must be substituted for a 2W nozzle for any installation using Option 2 of the 1.5 gallon sys- tem coverage (duct and plenum protection only). A 2WH nozzle is limited to a maximum of 75 in. (190 cm) perimeter or a maxi- mum diameter of 24 in. (61 cm) of coverage. The chart below shows the maximum protection available from each duct nozzle. Part 3.0 Gallon 1.5 Gallon Description No. System System 2W Nozzle .419337 Maximum Maximum 100 in. (254 cm) 100 in. (254 cm) Perimeter Perimeter 1100 Nozzle 430912 Maximum Maximum 50 in. (127 cm) 50 in. (127 cm) Perimeter Perimeter SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-2 REV. 3 10-1-02 Duct Protection - Multiple Nozzle DUCT SIZES UP TO 135 IN. (343 cm) PERIMETER - 3 FLOW OPTION • One 1100 Nozzle (Part No. 430912) and one 2W Nozzle (Part No. 419337) = three flow numbers • 135 in. (343 cm) perimeter maximum No round duct option available • Follow design table in Figure.2 to determine maximum module size for each nozzle 1100 Module 2W Module Side A Side B Side B Side B Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) 4 (10) 60.0 (152) 23.0 (58) 37.0 (94) 5 (13) 60.0 (152) 23.0 (58) 37.0 (94) 6 (15) 59.5 (151) 22.5 (57) 37.0 (94) 7 (18) 59.0 (150) 22.0 (56) 37.0 (94) 8 (20) 58.5 (149) 22.0 (56) 36.5 (93) 9 (23) 58.0 (147) 21.5 (55) 36.5 (93) 10 (25) 57.0 (145) 21.0 (53) 36.0 (91) 11 (28) 56.0 (142) 20.5 (52) 35.5 (90) 12 (31) 55.5 (141) 20.0 (51) 35.5 (90) 13 (33) 54.5. (138) 19.5 (50) 35.0 (89) 14 (36) 53.5 (136) 18.5 (47) 35.0 (89) 1'5 (38) 52.0 (132) 18.0 (46) 34.0 (86) 16 (41) 51.0 (130) 17.0 (43) 34.0 (86) 17 (43) 49.5 (126) 16.0 (41) 33.5 (85) 18 (46) 47.5 (121) 14.5 (37) 33.0 (84) 19 (48) 46.0 (117) 13.5 (34) 32.5 (83) 20 (51) 43.5 (111) 12.0 (31) 31.7 (81) 21 (53) 41.0 (104) 10.0 (25) 31.0 (79) 22 (56) 38.0 (97) 7.5 (19) 30.5 (78) 23 (58) 33.5 (85) 4.0 (10) 29.5 (75) 1 Side A 0 1100 2W FIGURE 2 006521 Example: Protection is required for a duct that has an "A" dimen- sion of 8.0 in. (20 cm) wide and a "B" dimension of 55 in. 040 cm) long. Referring to the table in Figure 2, if the "A" dimension is 8.0 in. (20 cm), the "B" dimension must not exceed 58.5 in. 049 cm). In this example, the "B" dimension is 55 in. (140 cm), therefore, this duct can be protected with a three flow application. Read over from the 8.0 in. (20 cm) line on the table to the 1100 Module column. At that point, the chart shows that the "B" module length for the 1100 nozzle can be 22.0 in. (56 cm). Center the 1100 nozzle in that module. The 2W module can now be centered with- in the remaining module. s SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-3 10-1-02 REV 4 ►Duct Protection— Multiple Nozzle (Continued) When working with Chart 2, one half of the quantity of nozzles determined must be equally positioned in the top half of the area DUCT SIZES GREATER THAN 135 IN. (343 cm) PERIMETER of the duct and the remaining half of the nozzles must be posk tioned in the bottom half of the duct area. • Ducts over 135 in. perimeter must be modularized using 2W Example: The duct to be protected has a Side "A" of 40 in. and a nozzles (Part No. 419337) Side "B" of-60 in. Referring to the design chart, this duct fequires • No round duct option available 4 nozzles. One half of 4 =2. Therefore, 2 nozzles must be•equally • Follow the design chart to determine maximum module size for positioned in each of the two duct areas. See Figure 3. each 2W nozzle SIDE 301N. (76 mm) 30 IN. (76 mm) • When determining number of nozzles required, it is sometimes an advantage to check the chart using the shortest side as Side "A" and then recheck it using the longest side as Side "A". This 20 IN- • • comparison may reveal a need for a lesser quantity of nozzles (51 mm) one way versus the other way SIDE I a0 IN. "A., — — — — — — — — (102 mm) When working with Chart 1, the quantity of nozzles determined must be equally divided within the duct area. 20 IN. • i • (51 mm) I_ 6{ 1� (152mm) CHART NO.1 FIGURE 3 B D A • • • SIDE "B" Ell ■■1:■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ m■■■■■■■■■■■ram■■■■■■■■■■� CHART NO.2 B A �!-_* • 61 NOTE: NOZZLE QUANTITIES LISTED IN CHART 2 MUST BE EQUALLY DIVIDED INTO EACH OF THE TWO DUCT MODULES. DD6522 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-4 REV.5 3-1-04 Transition Protection Transitions are protected at a point in the transition where the ► perimeter or the diameter is equal to or less than the maximum ► size duct that can be protected. The nozzle must be located in the center of the transition opening where the maximum perimeter or diameter begins. See Figure 4. FIGURE 4 000174 Electrostatic Precipitator Protection Some restaurant ventilating ducts have an electrostatic precipita- tor installed at or near the base. These precipitators are used to aid in the cleaning of exhaust air. Normally electrostatic precipitators do not require protection but should the "authority having jurisdiction" require protection, use the following guidelines. Ducts with precipitators located at or near the base can be pro- tected using duct nozzle(s) above the precipitator and 1/2N noz- zle(s) (Part No. 419334) for the precipitator. One 1/2N nozzle must be used for each cell being protected. This nozzle tip is stamped with 1/2N, indicating that it is a 1/2-flow nozzle and must be count- ed as 1/2 flow number. When protecting ducts equipped with precipitators, the duct noz- zles) must be installed above the precipitator and aimed to dis- charge downstream. If the area above the precipitator is a duct, the nozzle(s) must be positioned according to duct protection guide- lines. If the area above the precipitator is a transition, the transition guidelines must be followed. The'1/2N nozzle (Part No. 419334) must be centered 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) below the precipitator and aimed to discharge at the center of each precipitator cell. However, if it is physically impossi- ble to mount the nozzle at 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) due to pre- cipitator placement, the nozzle may be mounted closer than 10 in. (25 cm). See Figure 5. DUCT NOZZLE PRECIPITATOR SEE DUCT FOR TRANSITION PROTECTION 10-26 IN.* \ (25-66 cm) NOZZLE FOR PRECIPITATOR PROTECTION IF PHYSICALLY IMPOSSIBLE AT 10 TO 26 IN. (25 TO 66 cm), NOZZLE MAY BE MOUNT- ED CLOSER THAN 10 IN. (25 cm). FIGURE 5 000196 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-7 10-1-02 REV.3 Appliance Protection The following pages detail types of appliance protection. Each design requires several factors: correct nozzle choice, correct noz zle height above hazard, correct nozzle location and correct aim- ing point Fryer — Single Nozzle Protection 1. Design requirements for fryers are broken down into two types. A. FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARDS If the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) and length of the frypot. B. FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARDS If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, measure both the internal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) and length of the frypot portion, and then measure the internal depth and length of the overall hazard area including any dripboard areas. 2. Using Table, "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension — Single Nozzle Fryer Protection," determine which nozzle is needed i to protect the fryer based on the maximum dimensions listed. A. If the fryer does not include a dripboard, use the maxi- mum dimensions listed in the first column of the table to select the correct nozzle. B. If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, use both the maximum frypot dimensions in the first column of the table, and the maximum overall dimensions in the second column of the table to select the correct nozzle. None of the maximum dimensions in either column may be i exceeded. - 3. If either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes are exceed- ed, an additional nozzle(s) will be required. Refer to the mul- tiple nozzle requirements. Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside of the frypot without the dripboard measures 18 in. in depth x 18 in. in length (46 cm x _ 46 cm) and the inside of the overall aiea including the dripboard measures 18 in. in depth x 24 in. in length (46 cm x 61 cm). From the Table "Maximum Cooking Area Dimension Single Nozzle Fryer Protection,"either the 3N or the 290 nozzle should be select- ed to protect the fryer, depending on the maximum nozzle height above the fryer and the positioning requirements allowed. Refer to j appropriate Figures. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-8 REV. 5 10-1-02 Fryer — Single Nozzle Protection (Continued) Maximum Area Dimensions — Single Nozzle Fryer Protection Max. Size - Max. Size Overall Type of Nozzle Height Nozzle - Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle Above Top of Fryer Location Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 230 27 in. to 47 in. See Figure 14 in. x 15 in. 14 in. x 21 in. (69 cm to 119 cm) 15 and 16 (36 cm x 38 cm) (36 cm x 53 cm) Full or Split Vat Full or Split Vat 245 20 in. to 27 in. See Figure ► 14 in. x 15 in. 14 in. x 21 in. (51 cm to 69 cm) 15 and 16 (36 cm x 38 cm) (36 cm x 38 cm) i I - I I 11 1 1 I I II I 1 I I I I I II I I I I I I I I II I I II 1 1 I � I I I 'N1I ' I ! TOP OF FRYER I j I h I TOP OF FRYER I I i I I FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING SPLIT VAT SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA. NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA. ► FIGURE 15 ► FIGURE 16 002280 I 002283 I I I I 0 I f I F- i- Y SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-9 3-1-04 REV.7 q Fryer — Single Nozzle Protection (Continued) ' Maximum Area Dimensions — Single Nozzle Fryer Protection (Continued) Max. Size - Max. Size Overall Type of Nozzle Height Nozzle Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle Above Top of Fryer Location 19.5 in. x 19 in. 19.5 in. x 25 3/8 in. 290 13 in. to 16 in. See Figure 17 ,- (50 cm x 48 cm) (50 cm x `65 cm) (33 to 41 cm) s ! 19.5 in. x 19 in. 19.5 in. x 25 3/8 in. 3N See Figure See Figure 18 (50 cm x 48 cm) (50 cm x 65 cm) 18 18 in. x 18 in. 18 in. x 27 5/8 in. 3N 25 in. to 35 in. See Figure 19 (46 cm x 46 cm) (46 cm x 70 cm) (64 cm to 89 cm) i I i I -1• I I I I, TOP OF FRYER i 1 '• � �� I I I I I I I �. I L FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE HAZARD AREA t 3 IN. (7.6 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD AND t 1 000010 RIGHT -TO -LEFT 000008 IN. (2.5 cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE HAZARD AND CENTERLINE - - AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE COOKING AREA. FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD ' FIGURE 17 NOTE: 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE LOCATED WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE SURFACE 002286 AREA WITHIN THE FRONT HALF OF THE FRY POT AND AIMED AT THE CENTER. FIGURE 19 34 IN. (86 cm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE AND CENTER OF HAZARD AREA 21 in. (53 cm) 1 MINIMUM VERTICAL NOZZLE HEIGHT I I I ( I � I FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 3N NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN PERIMETER OF COOK- ING SURFACE AND AIMED TO THE CENTER OF THE COOKING AREA FIGURE 18 002287 I SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-10 REV. 5 10-1-02 Fryer — Multiple Nozzle Protection Design Requirements: Fryers exceeding the coverage of a single nozzle can be divided into modules. Each module must not exceed the maximum area allowed for a single nozzle. However, when utilizing multiple nozzle protection, the longest side allowed for a fryer with dripboard can be used, regardless of whether the fryer has a dripboard or not. The maximum size fryer that can be modularized is 864 sq. in. (5574 sq. cm) or in terms of ft., 6 sq. ft. (1..8 m). 1. Design requirements for multiple nozzle fryers are broken down into two types: A. FRYERS WITHOUT DRIPBOARD(S) If the fryer does not include a dripboard, measure the inter- nal depth (horizontal dimension from front to back) and length of the frypot. Then, multiply the depth and length to obtain the area of the frypot in square inches. B. FRYERS WITH DRIPBOARD(S) If the fryer includes any dripboard areas, measure both the internal depth and length of the frypot portion, and then measure the internal depth and length of the overall hazard area including any dripboard areas. Determine the area of both the frypot and the area of the overall vat by multiplying corresponding depth and length dimensions. 2. Divide the frypot or overall vat into modules, each of which can be protected by a single nozzle, based on the maximum dimension and area coverage of the nozzle as specified in Table, `Maximum Cooking Area Dimension — Multiple Nozzle Protection." A. If the module considered does not include any portion of the dripboard, use only the maximum frypot area and max- imum dimension listed in the first column of the table to select the correct nozzle. B. If the module considered includes any dripboard areas, use both the maximum frypot area and dimension listed in the first column of the table, and the maximum overall area and dimensions listed in the second column of the table to select the correct nozzle. 3. None of the maximum dimensions in either column may be exceeded. If either the maximum frypot or the overall sizes are exceeded, the area divided into modules will need to be rede- fined with the possibility of an additional nozzle. Options For Modularizing Fryers ► The following Figure 20 shows approved methods of dividing (mod- ularizing) fryers so that each section can be properly protected. EACH MODULAR AREA, INCLUDING DRIPBOARD, MUST NOT EXCEED 497 SO. IN. (3207 sq. cm) 1 MIDPOINT I MIDPOINT DRIP BOARD I DRIP BOARD 000214 EXAMPLE ONLY FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD Example: A fryer with a dripboard. The inside vat without the drip - board measures 18 in. in depth x 30 in. in length (46 cm. x 76 cm) and the inside of the overall vat including the dripboard measures 24 in. in depth x 30 in. in length (61 cm x 76 cm). Because the fryer is 30 in. (76 cm) in length, it exceeds the coverage of a single nozzle. Dividing the length in half, each module now has an overall vat dimension of 24 in. in depth x 15 in. in length (61 x 38 cm). From the Table, Maximum Cooking Area Dimension — Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection,neither the 3N or the 290 nozzle should be select- ed to protect each fryer module, depending on the maximum noz- zle height above ,the fryer and the positioning requirements ► allowed. Refer to appropriate Figures, 15 through 19. See additional examples in Appendix Section. DRIP BOARD EXAMPLE ONLY FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD AREA OF EACH FRY POT MODULE CANNOT EXCEED 324 SQ. IN. (2090 sq. cm.) AREA OF THIS MODULE (FRY POT PLUS DRIP BOARD)CANNOT EXCEED 497 SQ.IN. 000215 AREA OF EACH FRY POT MODULE CANNOT EXCEED 324 SO. IN. (2090 sq. cm.) EXAMPLE ONLY FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD II J FIGURE 20 i Fryer — Multiple Nozzle Protection (Continued) Maximum Area Dimension -Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection Max Size Module SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 411 3-1-04 REV. 7 Max. Size Module Overall Type of Nozzle Height + Frypot Only With Dripboard Nozzle Above Top of Fryer " ` 21 in. x 210 in.2 21 in. x 294 in.2 230 27 in. to 47 in. ` (53 cm x .14 m2) (53 cm x .19 m2) (69 cm to 119 cm) 21 in. x 210 in.2 21 in. x 294 in.2 245 20 in. to 27 in. ' (53,.cm x .14 m2) (53 cm x .19 m2) (51 to 69 cm) 25 3/8 x 370.5 in2 25 3/8 x 495 in2 290 13 in. to 16 in. (65 cm x .24 m2) (65 cm x .32 m2) (33 to 41 cm) 25 3/8 x 370.5 in2 25 3/8 x 495 in2 3N See Figure 23 (65 cm x .24 m2) (65 cm x 0.32 m2) 27 5/8 x 324 in.2 27 5/8 x 497 in2 3N 25 in. to 35 in. (70 cm x .21 m2) (70 cm x .32 m2) (64 cm to 89 cm) I I I j I i I I I I I I I Nozzle Location See Figure 21 See Figure 21 See Figure 22 See Figure 23 See Figure 24 34 IN. (86 cm) MAXIMUM DIAGONAL DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLE AND CENTER( ` HAZARD AREA i 1 I 21 in. (53 c MINIMUM ( VERTICAL ( NOZZLE HEIGHT FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD ! , FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE 000218 000213 PERIMETER OF THE MODULAR IT ISPROTECTINGAND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF POSITION NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE THAT RESPECTIVE MODULE AREA. MODULE IT IS PROTECTING AND AIM AT THE MIDPOINT OF THAT MODULAR AREA. 'FIGURE 23 DD2291 FIGURE 21 AIM POINT `I I �l `�i'' (DIAGONAL AIM POINT(DIAGONAL I 1 I j CENTER OF F �� ' � j j CENTER OF MODULE I i i I MODULE I I I J I I I I COOKING AREA) I I I COOKING AREA) J I I I I I I I I RIGHT -TO -LEFT I I i I RIGHT -TO- -CENTERLINE I I 1LEFT CENTER- LINE FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD 'FRYER WITHOUT DRIPBOARD FRYER WITH DRIPBOARD q 290 NOZZLE TIP POSITIONED OVER THE MIDPOINT OF THE RESPECTIVE MODULAR THE 3N NOZZLE TIP MUST BE 'POSITIONED ANYWHERE ALONG -OR WITHIN THE I AREA ±3IN. (7.6cm)FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE LONGEST SIDE OFTHE.MODULE PERIMETERAND'FORWARDOFTHERIGHT--TO-tEFGCENTERUNEOFTHE-COOKING AND ± 1 INA2.5.cm) FROM THE MIDPOINT ALONG THE SHORTEST SIDE OF THE MOD- AREA. THE, AIMING POINT OF THE NOZZLE MUST BE AT THE DIAGONALCENTER OF {ICE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT OF THE MODULE. THE MODULAR -COOKING AREA. FIGURE 22 �... 002290 FIGURE 24 _ 002293. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-12 REV. 5 10-1-02 Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection —Tilt Skillet / Braising Pan Protection for tilt skillets or braising pans is to be based upon the coverage limitations provided for deep fat fryer protection. Refer to Section IV, DESIGN, starting on Page 4-10, for maximum fryer nozzle coverages and maximum fryer nozzle height limitations. Although the maximum 6 sq. ft. total surface cooking area require- ment applies to fryer protection, it does not apply to tilt skillets or braising pans. Each tilt skillet/braising pan protected module must not exceed the fryer limitations for "MAXIMUM SIZE MODULE OVERALL WITH DRIPBOARD" coverage per nozzle as described in Table on Page ► 4-11. Tilt skillets and braising pans generally utilize a hinged cover. Fryer protection nozzles are to be placed toward the front of the appli- ance to minimize the potential for the tilt skillet or braising pan cover to interfere with the nozzle discharge. See Figure 25. THE NOZZLE IS TO BE PLACED TOWARD THE FRONT OF THE APPLIANCE TO MINIMIZE THE POTENTIAL FOR THE SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN COVER TO INTERFERE WITH THE NOZZLE DISCHARGE. COVER MUST NOT INTERFERE WITH EDGE OF DISCHARGE PATTERN i I i I / FOR MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM / NOZZLE HEIGHTS, REFER TO FRYER I NOZZLE PARAMETERS � 1 000071 FRYER NOZZLE USED FOR TILT SKILLET OR BRAISING PAN PROTECTION MUST BE POSITIONED NEAR THE FRONT EDGE OF THE PAN AND AIMED AT THE FRONT TO BACK CENTERLINE OF THE PAN. THE DISCHARGE FROM THE NOZZLE(S) MUST COMPLETELY CLEAR THE PAN COVER WITH AN UNOBSTRUCTED VIEW TO THE BACK OF THE PAN. ' FIGURE 25 I , Range Protection 1-Flow Nozzle The R-102 system uses five different nozzles for the protection of ` ► ranges. Two of the design options require a one -flow nozzle and three of the design options require two -flow nozzles. NOTICE A 13 in. (33 cm) diameter wok pan is the largest wok size that can be protected on ranges. When protecting hot top ranges, the entire cooking surface must be protected. Range Protection (1-Flow Nozzle) Single and multiple burner ranges can be protected using a IN nozzle, Part No. 419335. The nozzle tip is stamped with IN, indi- cating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. When using this nozzle for range protection, the maximum length of the burner grates being protected with a single nozzle must not -' exceed 32 in. (81 cm) and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed 384 sq. in. (2477 sq. cm) per nozzle. When protecting a range, the 1 N nozzle must be located a maxi- mum of 10 in. (25.4 cm) from each burner grate centerline and ` must be aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 26. 40 IN. I / (102 cm) T 30 IN. 10 IN. (25 cm) MAXIMUM 1N NOZZLE 10 IN. (25 cm) MAXIMUM 32 IN. (81 cm) MAXIMUM AIMING POINT FIGURE 26 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 • ULC CEx747 Page 4-13 . 3-1-04. REV.5 When this type of hazard is equipped with a back shelf located above the range top, two protection options are available: One requires a 1 F nozzle, Part No. , 419333, and the other option requires a 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341. Option 1: 1 F Nozzle: When using the 1 F nozzle for range protec- tion with back shelf, the maximum lengthof the burner grates being protected must not exceed 28 in. (71 cm) and the maximum area of the burner grates must not exceed 336 sq. in. (2168 sq.-cm). See Figure 27 for noz- zle location details. IF NOZZLE SHELF CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S) ,BY A MAXIMUM OF 11 IN. (28 cm) f AIM15 r20. 40 - 48 IN. POINT (102- 122 cm)MM UM /�(3 .6 (35.6 cm) 121N. 14IN MAXIMUM (30.5 cm) (35:6 cm) MAXIMUM FRONT TO REAR MAXIMUM `CENTERLINE IF NOZZLE LOCATED OVER FRONT EDGE OF BURNER GRATE AND ORIENTED SO NOZZLE TIP FLATS ARE PARALLEL WITH BURNER GRATE FRONT TO REAR CENTERUNE AND SHALL BE AIMED -AT THE CENTER OF THE COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 27 000238 Option 2: 260 Nozzle: When using the 260 nozzle for range pro- tection with back shelf, the maximum length of burner grates being protected must not exceed 32 in. (81 cm) and the maximum area of the burner .grates must not exceed 384 sq. in. (2477 sq. cm). Nozzle must be locat- ed on the front edge of the burner grates and aimed at a point 10 in. -(25 cm) from the back edge of the burn- er grates. Nozzle must be mounted 30 to 40 in. (76 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. See Figure 28. 260 NOZZLE _ SHELF CAN OVERHANG BURNER(S) / BY A MAXIMUM OF 11 IN. (28,cm) ► 18 IN. (45.7 cm) 30 - 40 IN. MINIMUM (76 - 102 cm) v� 10 1N. (25 cmPFROM BACK OF BURNER .GRATES FIGURE 28 000238a SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-14 REV. 5 10-1-02 Range Protection 2-Flow Nozzle High Proximity Application (2-Flow Nozzle): 40 in. to 50 in. (102 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface. ► This high proximity application uses the 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340. The nozzle tip is stamped with 245 indicating this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. 245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTER O One 245 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 672 sq. in. COOKING SURFACE (4335 sq. cm) with a maximum longest dimension of 28 in. (71 cm). 11 318 IN. (29 cm) When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must MAXIMUMFROM OF NOZ be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in Figures TO CENTER OF ANY ' 29 and 30. ► BURNER GRATE 245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTERLINE OF COOKING SURFACE 501N. (127 cm) MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 245 NOZZLE TIP 401N. I (102 cm) I MINIMUM I I I HEIGHT I OF 245 NOZZLE ' ' I TIP 1 ! 1 00 O O 0. 000236 FIGURE 29 NOTICE ► Four burner grates shown in Figure 30. For sin- gle or double burner grates, locate nozzle at center of cooking surface or 11 3/8 in. (29 cm) maximum from nozzle centerline to center of ► any burner grate. 245 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTER OF % COOKING SURFACE OR 11 3/8 IN. (29 Cr... MAXIMUM FROM CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE TO CENTER OF ANY ► BURNER GRATE ► ING COOKING AREA ) 0 1 _+ COOKING AREA \� 000766 FIGURE 30 � I I` I I' -�� Range Protection 2-Flow Nozzle. 's Medium Proximity Application (2-Flow Nozzle): 30 in. to 40 in. (76 cm to 102 cm) above the cooking surface. The medium proximity application uses the 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341. The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. ► One 260 nozzle will protect a cooking area of 768 sq. in. ► (4955 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 32 in. (81 cm). When using this nozzle for range protection, the nozzle must be pointed vertically down and positioned as shown in figures ' 31 and 32. ► 260 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTERLINE OF COOKING SURFACE ► I � I t 401N. �- (102 cm) ► I MAXIMUM i HEIGHT OF 260 1 i NOZZLE TIP 301N. ► (76 cm) k ( MINIMUM HEIGHT ► OF 260 ► I NOZZLE TIP 000236 I` OOOO FIGURE 31 I 'I ► SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULCCEx747 Page 4-15 10-1-02 REV.4 260 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE OR 101N. (25.4 cm) MAXIMUM FROM CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE TO -CENTER OF ANY. BURNER GRATE 260 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTE OF COOKING SURFACE OR 101N. (25.4 cm) MAXIMUM FROM CENTERLINE OF NOZZLE TO CENTER OF ANY BURNER GRATE (ING ING rwrJRE 32 . 000766 NOTICE Four burner grates shown in Figure 32. For sin- gle or double burner grates, locate nozzle at center of .cooking surface. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-16 REV. 5 10-1-02 Range Protection 2-Flow Nozzle Low Proximity Application (2-Flow Nozzle): 15 in. to 20 in. (38 cm to 51 cm) above the cooking surface. The low proximity application requires two (2) 290 nozzles, Part No. 419342. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a two flow noz- zle and must be counted as two flow numbers. Two (2) 290 nozzles will protect a cooking area of 1008 sq. in. (6503 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 36 in. (91 cm). When using two of these nozzles for low proximity range protec- tion, the nozzles must be positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to 1.5 in. (3.8 cm) inside the perimeter, and aimed at a 450 angle along the longitudinal centerline of the range. See ,-Figures 33 and 34. 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION 0 — 1.5 IN I I IN FROM EDGE OF I 45' COOKING SURFACE 45° 201N. I I 201N. (51 cm) (51 cm) MAXIMUM " i' MAXIMUM 15 IN. (38 cm) 15 IN. (38 cm) MINIMUM ,.' ( MINIMUM II II 0 0 0 0 0 0 COOKING LONGITUDINAL AREA CENTERLINE IEIlr�'W]L COOKING 7 AREA 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION 0 — 1.5 IN. (3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE OF COOKING SURFACE COOKING _ 'AREA 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION ► FIGURE 33 0 — 1.5 IN. (3.8 cm) IN FROM EDGE 002276 OF COOKING SURFACE 290 NOZZLE TIP LOCATION CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE t 2 IN. (5 cm) 000239 000240 COON AREA 290 NOZZLE TIP i LOCATION CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE 3 2 IN. (5 cm) FIGURE 34 Griddle Protection 1-Flow Nozzle The R-102 system uses four different nozzles for the protection of griddles. One of the applications requires a 1-flow nozzle and three of the applications require a 2-flow nozzle. High Proximity Application: 35 in. to 40 in. (89 to 102 cm) above the cooking surface. This high proximity application uses the 1 N nozzle, Part No. 419335. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating this is a one -flow noz- zle and must be counted as one flow number. One 1 N nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1080 sq. in. (6968 sq. cm) with the maximum longest side of 36 in. (91 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to a maximum of 2 in. (5 cm) inside the perimeter, and aimed to the midpoint of the ► cooking surface. See Figure 35 and 36. NOTICE When using this type of griddle protection, only 5 flow numbers are allowed on a 1.5 gallon sys- tem and only 11 flow numbers are allowed on a 3 gallon system. r� MIDPOINT OF 1 COOKING SURFACE I � I I 1N NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0,— 21N. (0 — 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 35 000241 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-17 10-1-02 REV.5 I I NOZZLE LOCATION 1 1 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) I INSIDE PERIMETER 1 401N. to —OF COOKING SURFACE 1 I (102 cm) ! MAXIMUM I 1 1 ! HEIGHT 1 1 1 OF 1N 1 NOZZLE TIP I 1 1 35 IN. (89 cm) MINIMUM HEIGHT EDGE I I ! OF 1N OF �1 1 i 1 ! NOZZLE TIP COOKING I 1 SURFACE I I j 1 ' FIGURE 36 000243 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-18 REV. 5 10-1-02 4 Griddle Protection 2-Flow Nozzle Option 1 — Nozzle Center Located COOKING High Proximity Application: 30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to 127 cm) AREA 1 IN. (2 cm) above the cooking surface. NOZZLE LOCATION MAXIMUM ' This high proximity application uses the 290 nozzle, Part No. y 419342. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this is a 2-flow noz- zle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of20 sq. in. f + cooKwG (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 30 in. (76 cm). ` + AREA When using this nozzle for high proximity applications, the nozzle ; must be positioned within 1 in. (2.5 cm) Of the center of the cook- 1 IN. (2 cm) ► ing surface and pointed vertically down. See Figure 38 and 37. - MAXIMUM CENTER LINE OF GRIDDLE CENTER OF GRIDDLE SURFACE A SURFACE ±.1 IN. (2 cm) IN MAXIMUM DIMENSION OF 20.6 IN. . ANY DIRECTION (52 cm) FROM NOZZLE CENTERLINE TO 1 FURTHEST CORNER OF GRIDDLE 1 1 FIGURE 38 1 I 50 1N. I I (127 cm) - W0773 . MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 290 - I NOZZLE TIP - - 30 IN. (76 cm) MINIMUM HEIGHT OF 290 NOZZLE _ TIP �\ l ! FIGURE 37 I 000244 I • i i I r I I I i 2-Flow Griddle Protection (Continued) Option 2 — Nozzle Perimeter Located High Proximity Application: 30 in. to 50 in. (76 cm to 127 cm) above the cooking surface. This high proximity application uses the 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341. The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 260 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. (122 cm). When using 9 protection, this nozzle for riddle the nozzle must be positioned along the cooking surface perimeter to 2 in. ' (5'1 cm) inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of the cooking ► surface. See Figure 39 and 40. — I I NOZZLE LOCATION 1 ( 0-2IN. (0-5cm) I 1 INSIDE PERIMETER OF COOKING SURFACE I 501N. I I 1127 cm) o I I 1 MAXIMUM S I I 1 1 HEIGHT I OF 260 � NOZZLE TIP 11 11 i 30 IN. (76 cm) 11 I MINIMUM i 1 1 1 I J HEIGHT EDGE 1 1 OF 1 1 1 OF 260 i COOKING I NOZZLE TIP SURFACE I 1 ( I 000243 I t �ly FIGURE 39 000243 SECTION IV —SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-19 10-1-02 REV.3 COOKING AREA r � MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE ( �if i COOKING I I AREA I - AIM POINT I I� I 260 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT MIDPOINT OF COOKING SURFACE. ' FIGURE 40 000241 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-20 REV. 4 10-1-02 2-Flow Griddle Protection (Continued) Option 2 — Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued) Medium Proximity Application: 20 in. to 30 in. (51 cm to 76 cm) above the cooking surface. The medium proximity application uses the 290 nozzle, Part No. 419342. The nozzle tip is stamped with 290 indicating this, is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 290 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension of 48 in. 022 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perimeter, and aimed at the center of'the cooking surface. See Figure 41 and 42. COOKING AREA r CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE I I j COOKING ► i / I AREA / I �— AIM POINT L---------J 290 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 - 2 IN. (0 - 5 cm) OF COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF ► COOKING SURFACE. FIGURE 41 000241 I I NOZZLE LOCATION 1 1, 0-2IN. (0-5CM) I I INSIDE PERIMETER I 301N. OF COOKING SURFACE I I (76 cm) MAXIMUM I I I I HEIGHT I I OF 290 I I I t NOZZLETIP II i 1 20 IN. (51 cm) / I MINIMUM HEIGHT I I I I OF 290 I tl NOZZLE TIP EDGE OF COOKING SURFACE ► FIGURE 42 000243 I r� I i1 i 2-Flow Griddle Protection (Continued) Option 2 — Nozzle Perimeter Located (Continued) Low Proximity Application: 10 in.. to 20 in. (25 cm to 51 cm) above the cooking surface. The low_ proximity application uses the 2120 nozzle, Part No. `., 419343. The nozzle tip is stamped with 2120 indicating this is a two -flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. One 2120 nozzle will protect a maximum cooking area of 1440 sq. in. (9290 sq. cm) with a maximum dimension .of 48 in. 022 cm). When using this nozzle for griddle protection, the nozzle must be positioned along the perimeter to 2 in. (5.1 cm) inside perime- ter, and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure ' 43 and 44. I I NOZZLE LOCATION I I 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) I ► I INSIDE PERIMETER I 20 IN. OF COOKING SURFACE l I (51 cm) ' •F I MAXIMUM i I I I HEIGHT OF 2120 NOZZLE TIP 10IN. (25 cm) I 1 j I MINIMUM HEIGHT (I 1 I OF 2120 t NOZZLE TIP 000243 EDGE OF C COOKING SURFACE ► FIGURE 43 000243 4 COOKING AREA r CENTER OF ` COOKING SURFACE I COOKING AREA ��-- AIM POINT I li 2120 NOZZLE LOCATED ALONG COOKING SURFACE EDGE ANY SIDE OF GRIDDLE SURFACE WITHIN 0 — 2 IN. (0 — 5 cm) OF -- ` COOKING SURFACE EDGE. NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING SURFACE. ' FIGURE 44 000241 p' SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-21 10-1-02 REV. 3 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-22 REV. 3 10-1-02 Chain Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses two 1N Nozzles (Part No. 419335) for Overhead Chain Broiler Protection chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped 1 N, indicating The R-102 system uses two 1 W Nozzles (Part No. 419336) for that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow overhead chain broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with number (total of two flow numbers for each chain broiler being pro- 1 W, indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted tected). as one flow number. Two 1 N nozzles are always needed for chain broiler protection Overhead protection is only available for chain broilers with when the hazard area to be protected does not meet the exhaust opening dimensions that are not less than 60% of the "Overhead Broiler Protection" requirements. The maximum inter- internal broiler length and not less than 60% of the internal broiler nal size of the broiler is 43 x 31 in. (109 cm x 79 cm). The nozzles width, to a minimum size of 12 in. x 12 in. 00.5 x 30.5 cm). Internal must be positioned at each end of the enclosed cooking chamber broiler size can not be larger than 32 in. x 34 in. (81 x 86 cm). 1 to 3 in. (2.5 to 7.5 cm) above the surface of the chain and a'max- imum distance of 4 in. (10 cm) away from the broiler opening. The When overhead protection is used, the nozzles must be centered nozzles may be mounted at either corner as long as they are at above the exhaust opening within 4 to 8 in. (10 to 20 cm) of each opposite ends of the chain broiler and positioned to discharge other and they must be located 10 to 26 in. (25 to 66 cm) above ► diagonally across the top of the chain. See Figures 45 and 46. the top of the broiler surface. See figure 47. �1 4-8 IN. (10-20 cm) MAXIMUM If BROILER SI, (109 X 79 cn b. 000245 J. 7.5 cm) FIGURE 45 46 000247 12 IN. (30.5 cm) MINIMUM MAXIMUM INTERNAL BROILER SIZE 32 X 34 IN. (81 x 86 cm) ► FIGURE 47 W0248 The nozzles may vary in position as long as they are evenly spaced from the exhaust center and are always 1800 opposite of each other. If the opening is not square, the nozzles must be posi- tioned along the centerline, parallel to the longest side of the open- ► ing. See Figure 48. TOP VIEW TOP VIEW FIGURE 48 000249 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-23 3-1-04 REV.6 Overhead Chain Broiler Protection (Continued) Example No. 1 - Internal broiler size is 24 in. long x 20 in. wide Upright/Salamander Broiler Protection (61 x 51 cm), with an opening of 16 in. x 16 in. The R-102 system uses two 1 /2N 'Nozzles' (Part No. 419334) for all (40.6 x 40.6 cm). upright/salamander broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped To determine minimum opening size, multiply the 1/2N, indicating that this is a half -flow nozzle. A pair of these noz- internal length and the internal width by 0.6: zles will equal one flow number. Length of opening - 24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in. Two 1/2N nozzles will ,protect a maximum hazard area (internal (61 cm x 0.6 = 36.6 cm) broiler chamber) of 30 in. x 32.5 in. (76 cm x 82.5 cm). These noz- Width of opening - 20 in. x 0.6 = 12.0 in. zles must always be used in pairs on. an upright/salamander broil- (51 cm x 0.6 = 30.5 cm) er. One nozzle must be positioned above the grate and pointed at the back opposite corner of the broiler chamber. The second noz- The minimum allowable opening for overhead protec- zle must be pointed down into the center of the drip pan through tion would be 14.4 in. x 12.0 in. (36.6 x 30.5 cm). the open slot. See Figure 49. This example would be acceptable for overhead pro- NOTE: If metal blow -off caps are required for upright broiler or tection. salamander broiler protection, use (2) two IN nozzles, Part No. Example No. 2 - Internal broiler size is 30 in. long x 24 in. wide ► 419335, instead of 1/2N nozzles. (76 x 61 cm) with an opening of 22 in. x 12 in. (56 x 30 cm). SALAMANDER BROILER To determine minimum opening size, multiply internal length and internal width by 0.6: Length of opening - 30 in. x 0.6 = 18.0 in. (76 cm x 0.6 = 45.7 cm) Width of opening - 24 in. x 0.6 = 14.4 in. (61 cm x 0.6 = 36.6 cm) Minimum allowable opening for overhead protection, would be 18 in. x 14.4 in. (45.7 x 36.6 cm). Because this broiler has an opening of 22 in. x 12 in., the 12 in. width is below the minimum allowable cal- culated dimension of 14.4 in. (36.6 cm) and therefore would not be acceptable for overhead protection. 000251 UPRIGHT BROILER BROILER -CHAMBER IP V SIDE VIEW 000252 FIGURE 49 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-24 REV. 5 10-1-02 Electric Char -Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses the 1 N nozzle for the protection of electric char -broilers. The maximum length of the hazard can be no longer than 34 in. (86 cm) and the total cooking area must not exceed 680 sq. in. (4388 sq. cm). 1. Nozzle Location: 20 to 50 in. (51 to 127 cm) above the grate surface. The 1 N Nozzle (Part No. 419335) is used for electric char - broiler applications. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N, indi- cating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. When using this nozzle for electric char -broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the maximum cooking area and shall be aimed at ► the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 50. COOKING AREA COOKING AREA I � I I I � � I 150 / I (27Jcm) I MAXIMUM 20 IN. (51 cm) � MINIMUM 000254 ► FIGURE 50 Gas -Radiant Char -Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses the 1 N nozzle, (Part No. 419335) for gas - radiant char -broiler protection. The nozzle tip on the 1 N nozzle is stamped with a 1 N, indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. One IN nozzle will protect a hazard with a maximum length of 36 in. (91 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 864 sq. in. (5574 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 15 to 40 in. (38 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this nozzle for gas -radiant char -broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the maximum cooking area and shall be aimed at the center of the cooking sur- ► face. See Figure 51. 1 (02 ' (102 cm) 1 MAXIMUM MINIMUM I 0002n FIGURE 51 Lava Rock (Ceramic) Char -Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses the 1 N Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for all - , lava rock char -broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N, indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. One 1 N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 312 sq. in. (2013 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 18 to 35 in. (46 to 89 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this noz- zle for lava rock (ceramic) char -broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max ► imum cooking area and angled to the center. See Figure 52. COOKING AREA COOKING AREA I I I j l� I I I 35 IN. (89 cm) ! i MAXIMUM 18 I I ' I (46 N 4s cm) J MINIMUM I I I l 000259 FIGURE 52 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-25 10-1-02 REV.6 Natural Charcoal Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses the 1 N Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for all natural charcoal broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating that this is a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. One 1 N nozzle will protect a hazard area which has a maximum length of 24 in. (61 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 288 sq. in. (1858 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 18 to 40 in. (46 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. When using this nozzle for natural charcoal broiler protection, the nozzle must be positioned. anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- imum cooking area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. ► See Figure 53. The coverage of such appliances only applies when the depth of the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. (10 cm). COOKING COOKING AREA AREA I I I I I I ( I I i \ / I 0 IN ( I I I 102 cm) I I MAXIMUM I ! % >� I I 4 IN. 00 cm) I 18 IN. MAXIMUM I I Q46 cm) DEPTH I 1 J MINIMUM I I 1 t 000259 b. FIGURE 53 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-26 REV. 5 10-1-02 Alternate Ceramic/Natural Charcoal Char -broiler Protection The R-102 system may also use the 3N nozzle (Part No. 419338) for all ceramic (lava rock) and natural charcoal char -broiler protec- tion. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N, indicating that this is a three -flow nozzle and must be counted as three flow numbers. One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length of 30 in. (76 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 14 to 40 in. (36 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- imum cooking area and angled to the center. See Figure 54. For natural charcoal char -boiler protection, this coverage only applies when the depth of the charcoal does not exceed 4 in. (10 cm). COOKING AREA COOKING AREA I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I ► Wood Fueled Char -Broiler Protection The R-102 system uses the 3N Nozzle (Part No. 419338) for mesquite char -broiler protection. The nozzle tip is stamped with 3N indicating that this is a three -flow nozzle and must be counted as three flow numbers. One 3N nozzle will protect a hazard which has a maximum length of 30 in. (76 cm) and a total cooking area which does not exceed 720 sq. in. (4645 sq. cm). The nozzle tip must be located 14 to .40 in. (36 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface. The nozzle must be positioned anywhere along or within the perimeter of the max- imum cooking area and aimed at the center of the cooking surface. ► See Figure 55. ► Mesquite logs and pieces, no larger than 4 in. (10 cm) in diameter, may be protected with a maximum allowable wood depth of 6 in. (15 cm). COOKING AREA COOKING AREA I Y I I I I I - I I II i I � I 40 IN. (102 cm) 40IN. MAXIMUM I i (102 cm) I I MAXIMUM I 1 � 4 IN. (10 cm) 1 �- I 14 IN. I ) MAXIMUM I I (36 CM) 6 IN. (15 cm) I I 14 IN. p DEPTH I 1 ) MINIMUM MAXIMUM I I (36 cm) DEPTH I 1 ) MINIMUM - 1 000259 I 1 000259 i I • FIGURE 54 ► FIGURE 55 1 Wok Protection The R-102 system uses two different nozzles for the protection of woks. 1. A 260 nozzle, Part No. 419341, will protect a Wok 14 in. (36 cm) minimum diameter up to 30 in. (76 cm) maximum diameter. The wok depth must be no less than 3.75 in. (9.5 cm) and no greater than 8 in. (20 cm). The nozzle tip is stamped with 260 indicating that this is a two- ' flow nozzle and must be counted as two flow numbers. When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be positioned as ► shown in Figure 56. t NOZZLE MUST BE POSITIONED WITHIN 1 IN. (2 cm) RADIUS OF THE CENTER OF THE WOK, POINTED VERTICALLY DOWN 260 NOZZLE I 35 — 45 IN. (89 — 114 cm) MINIMUM DEPTH 3.75 IN. (9.6 cm). MAXIMUM DEPTH 8 IN. (20 cm) ` I �It 1 141N. (35.6 cm) MINIMUM DIAMETER 30 IN- (76.2 cm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER ► FIGURE 56 000261 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-27 10-1-02 REV.4 2. A 1 N Nozzle, Part No. 419335, will protect a wok 11 in.:(28 cni) minimum diameter up to 24 in. (61 cm) maximum diameter. The wok depth must be no less than 3 in. (8 cm) and no greater than 6 in. (15 cm). The nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N indicating that this a one -flow nozzle and must be counted as one flow number. When using this nozzle, the nozzle must be positioned anywhere along.or within the perimeter of the wok, aimed at the center, 30 in. to 40 in. (76 to 102 cm) above the hazard surface, as shown in Figure 57. NOTICE When using this type of wok protection, only 5 flow numbers are allowed on a 1 112 gallon system, and only 11 flow numbers are allowed on a 3 gallon system. 1 (, I 401N. I � A � ( 30 IN. (76 cm) MINIMUM DEPTH L) ti ) 3.0 IN. (7.6 cm) MAXIMUM DEPTH 6.0 IN. (15 cm) 11 IN. (28 cm) MINIMUM DIAMETER 24 IN. (61 cm) MAXIMUM DIAMETER ' FIGURE 57 000261 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-28 REV.4 3-1-04 Nozzle Application Chart The following chart has been developed to assist in calculating the quantity and type of nozzle required to protect each duct, plenum, or appliance. NOTICE This chart is for general reference only. See complete details for each type of hazard. Minimum Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 1 — (Single Nozzle) Perimeter — 50 in. (127 cm) Diameter — 16 in. (40.6 cm) Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 1 (Single Nozzle) Perimeter — 100 in. (254 cm) Diameter — 31 7/8 in. (81 cm) Duct or Transition Length — Unlimited 2 (Dual Nozzle) Perimeter —150 in. (381 cm) Diameter — 48 in. (122 cm) Electrostatic Precipitator Individual Cell 1 (At Base of Duct) Plenum Length — 10 ft. (3.1 m) 1 (Horizontal Protection) 'Plenum Length — 6 ft. (1.8 m) 1 (Horizontal Protection) Width — 4 ft. 0.2 m) 1 Plenum Length — 4 ft. (12 m) 1 (Vertical Protection) Width — 4 ft. (1.2 m) ► Fryer (Split or Maximum Size ► Non -Split Vat)* (without drip board) 15 in. (38 cm) x 14 in. (36 cm) High Proximity 1 Medium Proximity 1 ► Fryer (Non -Split Vat Only) Maximum Size (without drip board) 19 1 /2 in. (49.5 cm) x 19 in. (48.2 cm) High Proximity 1 Low Proximity 1 Maximum Size (without drip board) 18 in. (45.7 cm). x 18 in. (45.7 cm) High Proximity 1 * For multiple nozzle protection of single fryers, see detailed information on Pages 4-12 through 4-14. I Nozzle Tip _ Nozzle Stamping — Part No. Flow No. 430912 1100 — 419337 2W — 419337 2W — 419334 1 /2N — 419335 1N — 430192 1100 — 419336 1 W — 419336 1 W 27 — 47 in. 419339 230 20 — 27 in. 419340 245 21 — 34 in. 419338 3N 13 — 16 in. 419342 290 25 — 35 in. 419338 3N (64-89 cm) I i Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) Minimum Maximum Hazard Nozzle 'Hazard Dimensions Quantity ► Fryer (Non -Split Maximum Size ► Vat Only)* (with drip board) 21 in. (53 cm) x 14 in. (36 cm) li (Fry Pot must not exceed 15 in. x 14 in. (38 cm x 36 cm)) High Proximity 1 Medium Proximity 1 Maximum Size (with drip board) 25 3/8 in. (64.4 cm) x 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) (Fry pot side must not exceed 19 1/2 in. (49.5 cm) x 19 in. (48.2 cm) � High Proximity 1 Low Proximity 1 -1 Maximum Size (with drip board) - 18 in. (45.7 cm) x 27 5/8 in. (70.2 cm) ` High Proximity 1 j ► Range Longest Side 1 _ 32 in. (81 cm) Area - 384 sq. in. (2477 sq. cm) ' Longest Side 28 in. (71 cm) Area - 336 sq. in. 068 sq. cm) Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 - 28 in. (71 cm) Area - 672 sq. in. - (4335 sq. cm) _ Longest Side j (Medium Proximity) 1 j 32 in. (81 cm) - Area - 768 sq. in. (4955 sq. cm) ,{ Longest Side (Low Proximity) 2 36 in. (91 cm) Area -1008 sq. in. -- (6503 sq. cm) ilk Lam' "For multiple nozzle protection of single fryers, see detailed information on Pages 47 through 4-11. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC,CEx747 Page 4-29 3-1-04 REV.4 Nozzle Tip Nozzle Nozzle Stamping - Hei hts Part No. Flow No. 27 - 47 in. 419339 230 20 - 27 in. 419340 245 21 - 34 in. 419338 3N 13 -16 in. 419342 290 25 - 35 in. 419338 3N (64-89 cm) 30 - 40 in. 419335 1 N 176 - 102 cm) 40 - 48 in. 419333 1F (102 - 122 cm) (With Backshelf) 40 - 50 in. 419340 245 (102 - 127 cm) 30 - 40 in. 419341 .260 (76 - 102-cm) 15 - 20 in. 419342 290. (38 - 51 cm) SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-30 REV. 3 10-1-02 Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) Minimum Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Hazard Dimensions Quantijy Heights Griddle Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 — 50 in. 48 in. (122 cm) (76 — 127 cm) Area — 1440 sq. in. (perimeter (9290 sq. cm) located) Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 30 — 50 in. 30 in. (76 cm) (76 — 127 cm) Area — 720 sq. in. (center located) (4645 sq. cm) Longest Side (High Proximity) 1 35 — 40 in. 36 in. (91 cm) (89 — 102 cm) Area — 1080 sq. in. (perimeter located) (6968 sq. cm) Longest Side 1 20 — 30 in. (Medium Proximity) (51 — 76 cm). 48 in. (122 cm) (perimeter Area — 1440 sq. in. located) (9290 sq. cm) Longest Side (Low Proximity) 1 10 — 20 in. 48 in. 022 cm) (25 — 51 cm) Area — 1440 sq. in. (perimeter (9290 sq. cm) located) Chain Broiler* Longest Side — 34 in. (86 cm) 2 10 — 26 in. (Overhead Protection) Area — 1088 sq. in. (25 — 66 cm) (7019 sq. cm) Chain Broiler Length — 43 in. (109 cm) 2 1 — 3 in. (Horizontal. Protection) Width — 31 in. (79 cm) (3 — 8 cm) Gas -Radiant Char -Broiler Longest Side — 36 in. (91 cm) 1 15 — 40 in. Area — 864 sq. in. (38 — 102 cm) (5574 sq. cm)' Electric Char -Broiler Longest Side — 34 in. (86 cm) 1 20 - 50 in. Area — 680 sq. in. (51 — 127 cm) (4388. sq. cm) Lava -Rock Broiler Longest Side — 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 — 35 in. Area — 312 sq. in. (46 — 89 cm) (2013 sq. cm) Natural Charcoal Broiler Longest Side — 24 in. (61 cm) 1 18 — 40 in. Area — 288 sq. in. (46 — 102 cm) (1858 sq. cm) Lava -Rock or Natural Longest Side — 30 in. (76 cm) 1 14 — 40 in. Charcoal Char -Broiler Area — 720 sq. in. (36 — 102 cm) (4645 sq. cm) • Minimum chain broiler exhaust opening — 12 in. x 12 in. (31 cm x 31 cm), and not less than 60% of internal broiler size. Nozzle Tip Nozzle Stamping — Part No. Flow No. 419341 260 419342 290 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS 419342 290 419343 2120 419336/417333 1 W/1 WSS 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS 419338 3N - SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-31 j 3-1-04 REV.6 - Nozzle Application Chart (Continued) Minimum Maximum Hazard Nozzle Nozzle Hazard Dimensions Quantity Heights Wood Fueled Char -Broiler Longest Side - 30 in. (76 cm) 1 14 - 40 in. Area - 720 sq. in. (36 - 102 cm) (4645 sq. cm) - Upright Broiler Length - 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 - Width - 30 in. (76 cm) Salamander Length - 32.5 in. (82.5 cm) 2 -. - Broiler Width - 30 in. (76 cm) Wok 14 in. - 30 in. (36 - 76 cm) 1 35 - 45 in. - Diameter {89 - 114 -cm) 3.75 - 8.0 in. (9.5 - 20 cm) Deep I _ , 11 in. - 24 in. (28 - 61 cm) 30 - 40 in. ► Diameter (76 - 102 cm) - 3.0-6.Oin. (8-15.2cm) +i Deep I_ i Ij Nozzle Tip Nozzle Stamping - Part No. Flow No. 419338 3N 419334 1 /2N 419334 1 /2N 419341 260 419335/417332 1 N/1 NSS SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ' ULC CEx747 Page 4-32 REV.5 3-1-04 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL Dean Industries Gas Fryer, Model 2424 GTI, 120,000 BTU/hr. Rating This specialized gas fryer can be protected with a combination of a 290 nozzle (Part No. 419342) and a 1 W nozzle (Part No. 419336) (or 1100) for low proximity (7 3/4 - 8 in. nozzle height only) and two (2) 230 nozzles, Part No. 419339, for high proximity (45 in. nozzle height only). The maximum dimension of the fry pot is 24 in. x 24 in. (161 x 61 cm). Nozzles must be positioned and aimed as shown in Figure 58. NOTE: For low proximity protection, see Special Piping Layout in Figure 59. P. Dean Industries Model GTI Gas Fryer Special Piping Layout Section A (Tank to Hood Penetration) Piping Limitations Maximum Length: 30 Ft. (9.1 m) Maximum Rise: 6 Ft. (1.8 m) Maximum Number of 90' Elbows: 7 Maximum Number of Tees: 0 61N. - (15 cm) FRY POT CENTERLINE 81N. 1 1/8 IN. (20 cm) 1 1/8 IN. (2.9 cm) (2.9 cm) 1 W NOZZLE OR )100 290 NOZZLE-► r AIM POINT I I - I 7 314 - 8 IN. ONLY -------� LTOP OF, VAT J (19.7 - 20.3 cm) 000282 LOW PROXIMITY (7 3/4 - 8 IN. NOZZLE HEIGHT) 21/4IN. 2 1/41N. (5.7 cm) (5.7 cm) 230 NOZZLE FRONT EDGE OF FRY POT 230 NOZZLE I I I - 11 IN. (53 cm) ¢Ir` 45 IN. ONLY 014 cm) TOP OF FRYER - I I AIM POINT i I j L-------J L - - - - - - J HIGH PROXIMITY (45 IN. NOZZLE HEIGHT ONLY) 000283 FIGURE 58 Section B (Hood Penetration to Nozzles) Piping Limitations 1. Piping configuration shall be as shown with ±1/4 in. tolerance on dimensions. 2. All nozzles shall be at the same elevation. 3. Each pair of appliance nozzles shall be equally spaced from left -to -right centerline of fryer. - - - 1 W (OR 1100) 290 TO 3 GALLON TANK - - - 1 W (OR 1100) 21/4IN. - SECTION A 2 1/8 IN 2 3/4 IN. 290 21 IN, (53.3 cm) or 24 IN. (60.9 cm) (5.7 cm) (5.4 cm) (6.9 cm) HOOD PENETRATION 1 W (OR 1100) 21 IN. (53.3 21/4IN- 8 V41N. 290 cm) or 24 IN. (60.9 cm) (5.7 cm) (20.9 cm) 29 5/8 IN. 290 (75.2 cm) 2 11116 IN. 1 W (OR 21 IN. (53.3 cm) or 2 1/41N. (5.7 cm) (6.9 cm) 1100) 24 IN. (60.9 cm) I I 21/4IN. - (5.7 cm) SPECIFIC DISCHARGE PIPING FOR LOW PROXIMITY PROTECTION OF (4) FOUR DEAN INDUSTRIES MODEL GTI GAS FRYERS FIGURE 59 "284 I SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Far West Hospitality Products Gas Fryer, Model PAR-1-20, -- 63000 BTU/hr Rating This specialized gas fryer can be protected with a single, 290 l nozzle, Part No. 419342. The maximum dimension of the fry pot is 21 in. x 21 in. (53 x 53 cm). The 290 nozzle must be located on the front -to -rear centerline and Ij I �p ' aimed at the center of the cooking surface. See Figure 60. 4 1 /2 1N. (11.5 cm) 14 IN. (36 cm)13 1N_ r /: BACK OF FRYER SIDE VIEW OF FRYER 000295 290 NOZZLE LOCATED ON FRONT -TO -REAR CENTERLINE ± 4.5 IN. 01.4 cm) FROM SIDE TO SIDE CENTERLINE AND AIMED AT CENTER OF COOKING AREA. b. FIGURE 60 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-33 10-1-02 REV..5 Frymaster 14 KW — 208V Electric Fryer, Model MACH 14 Series This specialized single vat electric fryer can be protected either with a single 230 nozzle, Part No. 419339, located 27 in. to 47 in. (69 cm to 120 cm) above the top surface of the fryer or with a sin- gle 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340, located 20, in. to 27 in.'(51 cm to 69 cm) above the top surface of the fryer. Either nozzle must be located anywhere along or within the perimeter of the cooking surface and aimed at the midpoint. See Figure 104. The maximum size of the fry pot (without drip board) is 13 3/4 in. x 16 3/4 in. (35 cm x 42.6 cm) and the, maximum size of the cooking surface {with drip board) is 13 3/4 in. x 20 7/8 in. (35 cm x 53 cm). The vat may be divided in half to make two split vats. 230 NOZZLE TIP OR 245 NOZZLE TIP ANYWHERE ALONG OR WITHIN THE PERIMETER OF THE COOKING SURFACE AND AIMED AT THE MIDPOINT. 20 7/8 IN 230 NOZZLE (53 cm) �►� ' MAXIMUM ,) 230 NOZZLE NO c 27I—47IN. NOZZLE (69 cm — 120 cm) 13 3/4 IN. / ABOVE TOP (35 cm) I f SURFACE MAXIMUM I OF FRYER. I I 245 NOZZLE 20 IN. — 27 IN. I I I (51 cm — 69 cm) ABETOP SURFACE OF II I FRYER i 16 3/4 IN. (42.6 cm) MAXIMUM FIGURE 61 000209 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-34 REV. 5 10-1-02 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) McDonald Fryer (Nozzle Heights of Less Than 20 In.) When the 245 nozzle is. used to protect McDonald's fryers at heights less than 20 in. (51 cm) above the top of the fryer, the fol- lowing appliance and distribution piping rules shall apply: 1. Each McDonald's gas or electric fryer shall be protected by one 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340. The fryer vat dimensions for one full vat or two split vats shall not exceed 14 in. x 15 in. (36 cm x 38 cm) without the dripboard and 14 in. x 21 in. (36 cm x 53 cm) with the dripboard. The heat input rating of the fryer shall not exceed 122,000 BTU/HR. The 245 nozzle shall be located 18 in. to 20 in. (46 cm to 51 cm) above the top of the fryer vat, 2 in. to 2 1 /4 in. (5 cm to 5.7 cm) to the right or left of the front -to -rear vat centerline, and 0 to 3 1/4 in. (0 cm to 8 cm) forward of the right -to -left vat ► centerline, and aimed at the vat center point. See Figure 62. REAR FRONT -TO -REAR VAT CENTERLINE NOZZLE LOCATION ZONES FRONT r_TO- VAT ERLINE ► FIGURE 62 002297 2. The distance between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line shall not exceed 79 in. (201 cm). 3. The total length of all branch lines shall not exceed 162 in. (412 cm). 4. The 3 gallon agent tank shall be elevated above the connec- tions between the supply and branch lines. 5. The requirements of the following table shall not be exceeded: Duct Plenum Appliance Supply Branch Branch Branch Requirement Line Line Line Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 140 in. 67 in. 6 in. 42 in. (356 cm) (170 cm) (15 cm) (107 cm) Minimum Length 81 in. 4 in. 4 in. 17 in. (206 cm) (10 cm) (10 cm) (43 cm) Maximum 5 3 1 6 900 Elbows Maximum Tees 0 1 1 1 Maximum Flow 11 2 1 2, Numbers Minimum Flow 5 0 0 112 Numbers P. Nieco Broiler Model 940, 962 or 960 With Catalytic Converter Protection NOTE: Nieco broilers without catalytic converters use standard chain broiler protection options. Certain models of the Nieco broiler (Models 940, 962, and 960) are equipped with a catalytic converter to comply with new clean air laws. Because of the converter, it is necessary to protect these broilers in a special way. The guidelines for protecting these broil- ers are as follows: . — The maximum internal broiling area is 29 in. x 23.5 in. (74 cm x 60 cm). — An R-102 3-gallon system with a maximum of 6 flow numbers, must be used for. protection of each broiler, including plenum and duct. — Each individual broiler must be protected with a minimum of (2) two, 1 N nozzles, Part No. 419335. The nozzles must be locat- ed as shown in Figure 63. — The broiler must be fitted with two 1 in. (2.5 cm) high agent bar- riers on the angled surface of the broiler. See Figure 106. If these have not been completed by the equipment supplier, they must be added in the field. 30° (2) 1N NOZZLES PART NO.56930 —� a a I 14.25'± 1 IN (36 cm) 12 IN. TO 13 IN. ,__ — (Z _ —Imo, (31 cm TO 33 cm) 0002`0 LOCATE NOZZLES 2 13116 IN. (7.1 cm) ON EACH SIDE OF BROILER CENTER UNE 14.25 ± 1IN. (36 cm) i— i FIGURE 63 L f - u ■ 1 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-35 10-1-02 REV.3 i SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler — Model 9025 (With Catalytic Converters) Nieco Broiler — Model 9025'(Without Catalytic Converter) • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. .Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. Nozzle Height: 12 in. (305 mm) above top of converter. See . Nozzle Height: 20 112 in. (521 mm) above top of appliance. See ► Figure 64. w Figure 65. , - • Nozzle Location: 3 in. (76 mm) back from front edge of con- . Nozzle Location: 6 112 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of verters, centered from right to left above each converter. See , appliance. See Figure 65. ► Figure 64. • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each converter. See • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each opening. -See ► FFigure 65. Figure 64. 31N. / (76 mm) / (�-6 v 1165 mm) I I SIDE VIEW SIDE VIEW . (2) 2W NOZZLES (2) 2W NOZZLES CONVERTERS I I ) 121N. I (305 mm) 1 18-20 2 (457-521mm) i I i, CENTER CENTER LINE 1 LINE OF x OF CONVER ER CONVERTER CENTERLINE CENTERLINE FRONT VIEW OF OPENING OF OPENING FIGURE 64 FRONT VIEW 004354 FIGURE 65 004355 i- i I! i I' i'I SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-36 REV.3 3-1-04 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler — Model 9025 (With Engelhard Converter) • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Height: 18 in. (457 mm) above top of appliance. See Figure 66. • Nozzle Location: 6 112 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of appliance. See Figure 66. Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each broiler opening. See Figure 66. Nieco Broiler — Model 950, 960, 980 1 Nozzle Quantity/Type: (1) One 2W nozzle, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See Figure 66a. • Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of appliance. See Figure 66a. • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure 66a. Nieco Broiler — Model 950, 960, 980 (with Air King Converter) • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Height: 13 in. (330 mm) above top of converter. See Figure 66b. • Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of appliance. See Figure 66b. • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of opening. See Figure 66b — Side View. • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at point 3 in. (76 mm) each side of center. See Figure 66b — Front View. (2) 2W NOZZLES FRONT VIEW 6 1/2 1N. (165 mm) SIDE VIEW 2W NOZZLE 1 1 20 IN. (508 mm) I CENTERLINE OF LARGE OPENING FRONT VIEW FIGURE 66a 006486 6 1/2 IN. :165 mm) AIR KING CONVERTER \ I SIDE VIEW 2W NOZZLE FIGURE 66 004908 �6 1121N. (165 mm) 3 IN. 3 IN. 4 (76 mm) (76 mm) 13 IN. . (330 mm) I I CENTERLINE OF LARGE OPENING FRONT VIEW FIGURE 66b 007034 r _ I' - SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULGCEx747 Page 4-37 10-1-02 REV. 3 SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Nieco Broiler — Model 9015 (With Catalytic Converters) Nieco Broiler — Model 9015, (Without Catalytic Converter) • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 2W nozzles, Part No. 419337. • Nozzle Height: 13 1 /2 in. (343 mm) above top of converter. See • Nozzle Height: 20 in. (508 mm) above top of appliance. See ► Figure 67. ► Figure -68. • Nozzle Location: 1 112 in. (38 mm) back from front edge of con- • Nozzle Location: 6 1/2 in. (165 mm) back from front edge of verters, centered from right to left above each converter. See ► appliance. See Figure 68. - ► Figure 67. • Nozzle Aiming Point for Large Chamber: Aimed at -center of • Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at center of each converter. See opening. -See Figure 68. ► Figure 67. • Nozzle Aiming. Point for Small Chamber: Nozzle to be locat- ed 12 in. (305 mm) over from large chamber nozzle. j / 1 i 1/21N. (38 mm) - � 61/2IN. (165 mm) r SIDE VIEW i SIDE VIEW (2) 2W NOZZLES ff i CONVERTERS I 131/2IN. (343 mm) 1 I FRONT VIEW - FIGURE 67 006487 j(2) 2W NOZZLES 12 1 (305 05 mm) 201N. I (508 mm) I CENTERLINE OF LARGE OPENING FRONT VIEW FIGURE 68 007010 i SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN ® UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-38 REV.5 3-1-04 i SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) i Marshall Air — Model 2001 BK Multi -Chamber Broiler Grease Grabber-80Tm Two Stage Filtration System I • Nozzle Quantity/Type: (2) Two 1 W nozzles, Part No. 419347. The Grease Grabber-80 Two Stage Filtration System consists of — • Nozzle Location: Front nozzle tip must be located 14 in. direct- two components: The primary filter (The Grease-X Tractor) and the ly above the appliance, aligned with the front face and centerline secondary filter (The Grease Grabber 80). of the catalytic converter. The aim point is 4 in. forward of the The protection required for this application is the same as the Stan - front edge of the converter on the centerline. dard plenum/filter protection: One (1) 1N Nozzle, Part No. 419335, The rear nozzle tip is a mirror image of the front. The rear noz- protecting 10 (3.1 m) linear feet of plenum length by 4 ft. (1.2 m) of zle is located 14 in. vertically above the appliance, aligned with Plenum chamber depth (width), positioned 2-4 in. (5-10 cm) from the "rear" face and centerline of the catalytic converter. The aim Peak of secondary filter. See Figure 70. I point is 4 in. behind the "rear" edge of the converter on the cen- 4 FT. 0.2 m) I terline. MAXIMUM ~ i • 77 System Limitation: Maximum of 5 flows for a 3.0 gallon sys- FILTER DARY l tem: Remaining flow points available may be used to protect other hazards. 1N yJ NOZZLE CENTERED ON CONVERTER I PRIMARY FILTER CONVERTER TWO 1W NOZZLES ' E/ dN. 1 (5- (5-10 cm) NOTE: TWO NOZZLES MUST BE UTILIZED FOR V-BANK FILTER o ARRANGEMENT. FIGURE 70 0 .. W6526 1 003418. FRONT VIEW NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH FRONT OF CONVERTER NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH NOZZLE ALIGNED WITH BACK FRONT OF CONVERTER, OF CONVERTER, AIMED AIMED 4 IN. (102 mm) BACK 4 IN. (102 mm) FORWARD 1W 1W NOZZLE NOZZLE r f f 141N. 14 IN. (356 1, 4 IN. (356 mm) + (102 mm) + o o — I� 003418E SIDE VIEW FIGURE 69 i '1 ,I 'I 1 L_ ► SPECIFIC APPLICATION BY MODEL (Continued) Krispy Kreme Fryers — Models 150 D/H, 270 D/H, 600 D/H, and 1000 D/H Nozzle Type: 3N Nozzle (Part No. 419338) Nozzle Spacing: 11.5 in. (292 mm) maximum from end of fryer and on maximum 25.5 in. (648 mm) centers Nozzle Height: 35 in. (889 mm) above top of appliance Nozzle Position: 2 in. (51 mm) from inside edge of fry vat Nozzle Aim Point:. Along centerline of fry vat Note: Figure 71 shows maximum size fryer (Model 1000 D/H). Smaller size fryers (Models 150 D/H, 270 D/H, and 600 D/H) can be, protected with less nozzles but nozzle spacings, height' requirements, and positions, must be maintained as shown in Figure. 11.5 IN. 25.5 IN. (292 mm) (648 mm) 25.5 IN. (648 mm)� 25.51 N. (648 mm) 25.5 IN. (648 mm) 25.5 IN. X 25.5 IN. (6488 mm) (648 (nm) _ 11.5 IN. I \ \ (292 mm) \ \\ i �� 351N. � vo (889 j) P. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC -CEx747 Page 4-39 3-1-04 REV.4 Marshall Air Electric Broiler — Model FR114B AutoBroiil Nozzle Quantity/Type: One 260 Nozzle (Part No. 419341) Nozzle Height: 15 — 20 in: (38.1 - 50.8 cm) above the top of the broiler Nozzle Location: The nozzle must be centered above the front edge of the broiler Nozzle Aiming Point: Aimed at the.centerrof the -exhaust opening of -the broiler 1� 15-20IN. - 68.1 — 50.8 cm). 24.25 IN . (61.6 cm) \ / 24 IN. 14.50 IN. (61.0 cm) \ 34.69 IN. (36.8 cm) (88.1 cm) k 48 IN. 021.9 cm) FIGURE 72 006737 FIGURE 71 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-40 REV.3 3-1-04 ►OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE Hazard Zone The hazard zone is defined as a theoretical, flat and level, rectan- gular surface, that includes all of the cooking hazards of the pro- tected appliances under a common hood(s). The purpose of the hazard zone is to provide a means of locating the appliances and the overlapping nozzles, as well as aiming the overlapping noz- zles. The hazard zone measures 28 in. (711 mm) deep by the length of the cooking hazard(s). The centerline of the hazard zone must bisect the 28 in. (711 mm) depth (from front to back) and run from right -to -left for the full width of the hazard zone. Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection Overlapping Nozzle Appliance Protection is defined as protection of cooking appliances by nozzles spaced uniformly at uniform ele- vations under a common hood(s). Overlapping protection of appli- ances is continuous for the full length of the hood or divided when group(s) of protected appliances are separated by counters or appliances not requiring protection. Full hood continuous protection is defined as overlapping noz- zle appliance protection that covers the appliance line-up located under the total hood length. All appliances requiring protection are the appliances under the hood that can be an ignition source of grease in the hood, grease removal device or the duct. Group.protection is defined as overlapping nozzle appliance pro- tection that protects individual hazard zones located under a com- mon hood. These "groups" of appliances may be separated by appliances not requiring protection, such as steam equipment or work tables, or by dedicated appliance protection, such as sala- mander broilers. See Figure 76 (full hood continuous protection) and Figure 77 (multiple group. protection). Dedicated Nozzle Appliance Protection Appliance protection using dedicated nozzle coverage is defined as protection of cooking appliances with enclosed cooking haz- ards, such as upright broilers, which cannot be protected with overlapping nozzles and therefore must be protected with nozzles dedicated to the, appliance. General Design Limitations • Maximum depth of zone is 28 in. (711 mm). • The 245 nozzle, Part No. 419340, is the only approved nozzle for overlapping (zone) protection. • Nozzle must be located 0 in. to 6 in. (0 mm to 152 mm) forward of zone centerline, aimed back at the zone centerline. • Nozzles must be spaced a maximum of 6 in. (152 mm) from each end of hazard and then a maximum of 12 in. (305 mm) on center for the remaining overlapping nozzles until the complete hazard is covered. • For appliance hazard surfaces with. listed protection exceed- ing the standard hazard zone of 28 in. (71 cm) in depth, the haz- ard surface(s) must be aligned with the back edge of the hazard zone, with the front edge overhanging the front edge of the zone. See Appliance Chart, Table 1. • For appliance hazard surfaces that exceed the listed protec- tion sizes, multiple zones must be utilized. Align entire hazard surface area within the multiple zones. • All hood, duct, individual appliance, and piping limitations are as specified in the R-102 Design, Installation, Recharge and Maintenance Manual, Part No. 418087. i• All appliance protection currently listed in the R-102 Design Manual, Part No. 418087, is also approved protection. Zone pro- tection can be considered optional protection. TABLE 1 Overlapping Nozzle Coverage (Zone Protection) Appliance Type Maximum Cooking Hazard Fryer 34 in. (864 mm) Deep x 5.8 sq. ft. (.54 sq. m) Griddle 30 in. (762 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length Range 28 in. (711 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length Wok, Maximum 30 in. (762 mm) Diameter x 8 in. (203 mm) Deep Wok, Minimum 11 in. (279 mm) Diameter x 3 in. (76 mm) Deep Braising Pan/Tilt 34 in. (864 mm) Deep x Unlimited Skillet" Length Lava Rock 32 in. (813 mm) Deep x Unlimited Char -Broiler Length Charcoal Broiler 32 in. (813 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length (4 in. (102 mm) Maximum Fuel Depth) Mesquite Wood 32 in. (813 mm) Deep x Unlimited Length Broiler (12 in. (305 mm) Maximum Fuel Depth) Gas Radiant 36 in. (914 mm) Deep x Unlimited Char -Broiler Length Electric Char -Broiler 34 in. (864 mm) Deep x 20 in. (508 mm) See Figure 73 for nozzle location II -i. 0-6 IN. (0-15 cm) COVER MUST NOT ( 1 t INTERFERE WITH I 1 EDGE OF DISCHARGE I ) PATTERN I 40-{7-1.1 J .1 M) '1 l' f ZONE I ZONE CENTER UNE FIGURE 73 006927 OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations 1. All overlapping appliance nozzles must be the "245" nozzle, Part No. 419340, and must be located under a common hood at the same height above the hazard zone, in a straight line from right to left. and aimed at the centerline of the hazard zone. The overlapping nozzle is used for both continuous over- lapping and multiple group overlapping protection. 2. The hazard zone must be positioned (located) so that all appli- ance hazard surfaces are within the zone. For appliance haz- ard surfaces with listed protection exceeding the standard hazard zone size of 28 in. (71 cm) in depth (see Table 1), the hazard surface(s) must be aligned with the back edge of the hazard zone, with the front edge overhanging the front of the zone. 3. The overlapping appliance nozzles must be located 40 in. to 45 in. (1 m to 1.1 m) above the top surface of the protected appliances. See Figure 75. Exception No. 1: Nozzle dimensions for wok protection are measured to bottom of wok. Exception No. 2: When using overlapping appliance nozzles in areas where there is a back shelf, the nozzle cannot be positioned in the shaded area as shown in Figure 74. Also, back shelf must not extend more than 11 in. (279 mm) over the hazard zone and cannot be less than 20 in. (508 mm) above the hazard zone. See Figure 74. OVERLAPPING NOZZLE(S) 45 i CANNOT BE POSITIONED 44 IN THIS SHADED AREA 43 42 41 40 6 5 4 3 2 1 ( CENTER LINE OF HAZARD ZONE BACK SHELF 11 IN. (279 mm) MAXIMUM 20 IN. (508 mm) MINIMUM Fes- 28 IN. (i 11 mm) -►i FIGURE 74 006914 SECTION 1V — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-41 3-1-04 REV.3 4. The. overlapping appliance nozzles must be. located 0 in. to 6 in. (0 mm to 152 mm) forward of the centerline or aimline of the selected hazard zone. See Figure 75. 245 NOZZLE - NOZZLE MUST BE AIMED STRAIGHT DOWN OR BACK AT CENTERLINE OF HAZARD ZONE 6IN.. 451N. (152 mm) (1.1 m) 40 1N. 0 m) FRONT 1 BACK OF ZONE OF ZONE CENTERLINE OF 28 IN. HAZARD ZONE (711 mm) ZONE FIGURE 75 006915 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-42 REV.4 3-1-04 ► OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations - Group Protection 1. For each group of protected appliances under a common hood(s), the overlapping nozzles must be located from right to left so that each end nozzle is located a maximum of 6 in. (152 mm) inside the outside edge of the cooking hazard of each end appliance, and the inside overlapping nozzles must be located between the two end nozzles at a maximum spac- ing of 12 in. (305 mm). See Figures 76 and 77. I(�(' 12 IN. (305 mm) MAXIMUM SPACNG(S) BETWEEN OVERLAPPING NOZZLES 61N. -► (152 mm) MAXIMUM FROM EDGE OF / COOKING / HAZARD / 61N. (152 mm) V \� MAXIMUM FROM �/ \ EDGE OF COOKING \ HAZARD FULL HOOD CONTINUOUS APPLIANCE PROTECTION FIGURE 76 001710 12 IN. (305 MM) 6 IN. (152 mm) j MAXIMUM 11 MAXIMUM 61N_ 61N. (152 mm) 12 IN. (152 mm) MAXIMUM (305 mm) MAXIMUM FROM MAXIMUM FROM EDGE OF/rr==7 EDGE OF COOKING COOKING HAZARD EDGE OF HAZARD COOKING HAZARD GROUP APPLIANCE PROTECTION FIGURE 77 001720 ► 2. When obstructions are located adjacent to appliance(s) pro- tected by overlapping nozzles, the overlapping appliance noz- zle spacing must start with the appliance(s) adjacent to the obstruction. See Figure 78. 12 IN . 12 IN 12 IN - N. 12 IN . 6 IN. I (305 mm) I(305 mm) I(305 mm)I (305 mm)I (152 mm) -� MAX. ► MAX. -MAX.0 MAX. ► 6 IN. MAX. + + ; ; + (152 mm) MAX. OUTSIDE F-11 EDGE OF COOKING HAZARD I /77 I I I' 1 �-- HAZARD AREA OBSTRUCTION FIGURE 78 001713 3. When an appliance requires dedicated protection with a pro- tected area intended for overlapping appliance nozzle protec- tion, the group protection option will be required for appliances on either side of the appliances using dedicated'protection. Group protection using overlapping appliance nozzles must begin with the protected appliance(s) adjacent to the dedicat- ed appliance protected. An overlapping appliance nozzle(s) must be positioned within 6 in. (152 mm) of. the edges) of the appliance hazard surface area(s) adjacent to the dedicated nozzle protection. See Figure 79. EDGE OF COOKING HAZARD 61N. (152 mm) MAX. T 12 IN. I (305 mm) MAX. r 121N. 121N. (305 mm) (305 mr / MAX. MAX. EDGE 6 IN. (152 MM) 61N. (152 mm) OF MAXIMUM b MAXIMUM COOKII HAZAR DEDICATED NOZZLE APPLIANCE 6 IN. (152 mm) MAX. EDGE OF COOKING HAZARD FIGURE 79 001756 I ►OVERLAPPING NOZZLE COVERAGE (Continued) Overlapping Appliance Nozzle and Hazard Zone Locations — Group Protection (Continued) 4. On protected appliances, all hazard surfaces located in a "— group must be within 40-45 in. (102-114 cm) from the noz- zle(s). Once that dimension is exceeded, a new group must be started. See Figure 80. Note: The supply pipe feeding nozzle groups is to be at the same elevation. Adjust height for each group only by varying 1 lengths of nozzle drops. 6 IN. (152 mm) 6 IN. (152 mm) MAXIMUM -'1 MAXIMUM l 1 1 NOZZLES l NOZZLES } 45 IN. I ` I ' 014 cm) I (102 c cm) I 40 IN. 1 I 45 IN. +I I (102 cm) � I (114 cm) i �rGROUP"A'— GROUP "B"� FIGURE 80 0069I7 Detection Requirements For Overlapping Appliance Protection When utilizing overlapping appliance protection, fusible link detec- tors must be installed on a maximum of 2 ft. (.61 m) centers, starting with. detectors located in (under) the duct opening(s). Starting from the detector under the duct opening, add detectors on 2 ft. (.61 m) maximum spacing until the complete length of the plenum area is covered, from one end to the other. The location of the last detector on each end of the plenum must not exceed 2 ft. (.61 m) from end of plenum. NOTE: Standard detector coverage, as specified in "Design - Section," is acceptable when utilizing dedicated nozzle ► coverages. I" SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX.3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-43 3-1-04 . REV.4 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-44 REV.4 3-1-04 TANK AND CARTRIDGE REQUIREMENTS Once the hazard analysis is completed and the total nozzle flow numbers are established, the quantity and.size of agent tanks and cartridges needed to supply the nozzles with the proper volumes of agent at the proper flow rates can be determined. For cartridges used in the regulated release mechanism, flow capacities, tank quantities and sizes, and regulated release cartridge options are given in the table below. Total Quantity and Regulated Release Flow Size of Cartridge Options Numbers* Tanks Nitrogen Carbon Dioxide 1— 5 (1) 1.5 Gallon LT-20-R 101-10 6 — 11 (1) 3.0 Gallon LT-30-R 101-20 11 — 16 (1) 1.5 Gallon Double 101-30 (1) 3.0 Gallon 16 — 22 (2) 3.0 Gallon Double 101-30** When one or more regulated actuators are used, the following tank and cartridge combinations apply for each regulated actuator: Regulated Actuator Regulated Actuator Tank(s) Cartridge (1) 1.5 Gallon LT-20-R or 101-10 (1) 3.0 Gallon LT-30-R or 101-20 (1) 1.5 Gallon and LT-A-101-30 or 101-30** or (1) 3.0 Gallon double tank (2) 3.0 Gallon LT-A-101-30 or 101-30** or double tank For exceptions to maximum flow numbers, see Distribution Piping Requirements for 1.5 gallon and 3.0 gallon systems in this Section. The 101-30 cartridge can not be used when (2) two 3.0 gallon tanks are manifolded together.) For higher total flow numbers (23 to 110), multiple cartridges and regulated actuators are required as shown in the System Selection Guide in Section IX — Appendix. ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT-20-R, LT-30-R, 101.10 OR 101-20 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 20 FT. (6 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS 9 "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY P. ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS This section contains the guidelines for installing the -actuation and expellant gas lines between the regulated release mechanism reg- ulator, each regulated actuator regulator, and each agent tank. These limitations should be considered when selecting the com- ponent mounting locations. Actuation Gas Line — 6 to 8* Tanks Maximum t 8 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators. 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot -dipped galva- nized, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. 2. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the regulated release mechanism to each regulated actuator connected within the system. The total length of the actuation gas line from the regulated release assembly to the regulated actuator assembly(ies) must not exceed 20 ft. (6 m) when using an LT-20-R, an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge, or a 101-10 or a ' 101-20 carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 81. REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION / GAS LINE LENGTH TOTALS ACTUATOR REGULATED ACTUATOR FIGURE 81 000775 I ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Actuation Gas Line — 6 to 8* Tanks Maximum (Continued) 3. If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulated release assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total combined length of the actuation and expellant gas line must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank" nitrogen car- tridge or a LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge or a 101 -30carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 82. 4. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90' elbows and one tee. Two 450 elbows equal one 90°. elbow. Actuation Gas Line —10 to 15* Tanks Maximum ' 15 Tank maximum reflects the utilization of 3 tank regulated actuators. 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot -dipped galva- nized, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. NOTE: Stainless steel hose and fittings can also be used. See Component Section for detailed information. ACTUATOR AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH A "DOUBLE TANK" CARTRIDGE OR A 101-30 CARTRIDGE OR A LT-A-101.30 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH - 30 FT (9 m) � /� MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS - 9 //' r lI _' SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-45 3-1-04 REV.2 2. The actuation gas line piping is installed from the 101 remote mechanical release to each R-102 regulated actuator assem- bly. The total length of the actuation gas line from the remote mechanical release to the regulated actuator assemblies must not exceed 100 ft. (30.5 m). 3. A combined ,total of 20 elbows and 9 tees may be used in these lines. Two 450 elbows equal one 900 elbow. See Figure 83. 4. Use only a 101-10 carbon dioxide cartridge in the 101 remote mechanical release. 5. A safety vent relief valve (Part No. 15677) is required in the actuation gas line to relieve residual pressure after actuation. Actuation Gas Line — 5 Tank Maximum — Using 1/4 in. Stainless Steel Hose 1. Maximum hose length cannot exceed 17.5 ft. (5.3 m) 2. Maximum of 5 regulated actuators allowed 3. Actuated with remote actuator {Part No. 32381) only REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY O"ANSULAUTOMAN" REGULATED ACTUATOR REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT *GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED RELEASE ASSEMBLY IN COMBINED TOTALS FIGURE 82 ` 000262 SAFETY RELIEF VALVE EXPELLANT 1/4 IN. ACTUATION LINE - GAS LINE 100 FT (30.5 m) MAXIMUM I Ix Y'k I � I - I I 1 ❑ I ( 1 j I- I I ❑ '► I I 1 1 •© '�� i I ( .,' W 1 A l I ACTUATOR ITREGULATED WITH TANK 1/4 IN. STAINLESS STEEL HOSE OPTIONS SAFETY - RELIEF VALVE I I I I 1 I MAX. SPACING (TYP 1 AGENT TANK 1/4 IN. -STAINLESS 9 TEES MAXIMUM Nl:li MAXIMUM OF FIVE REGULATED ACTUATORS 20 ELBOWS MAXIMUM REMOTE RELEASE MECHANISMS (PART NO. 32381) 5 MAXIMUM REGULATED ACTUATOR WITH TANK ili ► MAXIMUMOFFIVE REGULATED ACTUATORS REMOTE RELEASE MECHANISMS - (PART NO. 32381) 5 MAXIMUM FIGURE 83 000301 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-46 REV.4 3-1-04 ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Expellant Gas Line 1. The expellant gas line piping is installed from the regulated release mechanism in double and multiple -tank systems, and from the regulated actuator assembly in multiple -tank sys- tems. The expellant gas line is the piping between the regula- tor and the tank-enclosure/tank-bracket assembly. The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated release mechanism or each regulated actuator assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank" cartridge, an ' LT-A-101-30 Cartridge, or a 101-30 Cartridge. See Figures 84 ' and 85. EXPELLANT GAS LINE MAXIMUM LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS - 9 _ "ANSUL AUTOMAN" REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY ► FIGURE 84 ► 000776 EXPELLANT GAS LINE MAXIMUM LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS - 9 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY ► FIGURE 85 000777 2. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 900 elbows and one tee. Twq 450 elbows equal one 900 elbow. 3. If two tanks are connected to the regulated release assembly in a multiple -tank system arrangement, the total combined length of the actuation and expellant gas lines must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when using a "double -tank" nitrogen car- tridge, an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge, or a 101-30 carbon dioxide cartridge. See Figure 82. DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS Once the nozzle placement and quantity of tanks has been deter- mined, it is then necessary to determine.the piping configurations between the tank adaptor and each discharge nozzle. This section contains the guidelines and.limitations for designing the distribu- tion piping so that the liquid agent will discharge from the nozzles at a proper flow rate. These limitations should also be referred to when selecting the mounting location for the regulated release mechanism and agent tank. General Piping Requirements 1. All R-102 system piping is straight line. Therefore, the need for critical lengths and balancing is minimized. 2 Two 450 elbows count as one 900 elbow. 3. Each branch line includes the tee or elbow leading to it, and all fittings within the branch line itself. 4. The minimum piping length of Schedule 40; 3/8 in. pipe from the tank outlet to any nozzle protecting a range, fryer, or wok must be 6 ft. (1.8 m). 5. Pipe lengths are measured from center of fitting to center of fitting. See Figure 86. CENTER TO CENTER ' FIGURE 86 000778 ' 6. All distribution piping must be 318 in. Schedule 40 black iron, chrome -plated, or stainless steel. Do not use hot dipped gal- vanized pipe on the distribution piping. 7. All threaded connections located in and above the protected area must be sealed with pipe tape. Tape should be applied to male threads only. Make certain tape does not extend over the end of the thread, as this could cause possible blockage of the agent distribution. 8. Before installing blow -off caps on nozzles, apply a small amount of Dow Corning No. 111 silicone grease across the opeing in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating the exterior of the blow -off cap. This will help keep cooking grease from building up on the cap. — SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-47 I- 3-1-04 REV.3 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Supply and Branch Line Identification SUPPLY LINE The R-102 distribution piping network is broken down into four The Supply Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from specific pipe runs: the Supply Line, the Duct Branch Line, the agent tank outlet to the last branch line (whether a duct, appli- the Plenum Branch .Line, and the Appliance Branch Line. See ance, or plenum branch line). This includes all supply line fittings ► Figure 87, except for the tees or elbows leading to the branch lines. See DUCT ► Figures 87 and 88. BRANCH LINE SUPPLY AA, - =— LINE t PLENUM APPLIANCE BRANCH LINE BRANCH LINE a NOTE: THIS IS A CONCEPTUAL DRAWING ONLY. THIS IS NOT AN ACTUAL INSTALLATION. ► FIGURE 87 000779 END OF _ SUPPLY LINE I NOTE THESE ARE EXAMPLES ONLY. OTHER CONFIGURATIONS CAN BE DESIGNED. t END OF SUPPLY LINE °END OF SUPPLY LINE END OF � �•--. rLINETEE SUPPLY UNEZZLES FOR NUM TECTION) I' Ii END OF Q SUPPLY LINE / ® 9 (NOZZLES FOR SUPPLY , !\\ PLENUM LINE TEE \ PROTECTION) BRANCH LINE CANNOT START AHEAD OF A BRANCH LINECANNOT SUPPLY UNE TEE START AHEAD OF A SUPPLY LINE TEE ;,, ► FIGURE 88 000700 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-48 REV.3 3-1-04 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Supply and Branch Line Identification (Continued) NOTICE Branch lines cannot start ahead of a supply line tee. DUCT BRANCH LINE The Duct Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from the supply line to the duct nozzle(s). This includes all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the branch line. ► See Figures 88 and 89. DUCT BRANCH LINE (ELBOW INCLUDED) DUCT BRANCH LINE (TEE INCLUDED) DUCT BRANCH LINE -', (TEES INCLUDED) FIGURE 89 000781 i PLENUM BRANCH LINE I The Plenum Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from the supply line to the plenum nozzle(s). This includes all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the ► branch line. See Figures 87 and 90. PLENUM BRANCH LINE •'�--•- - (TEE INCLUDED) 1 PLENUM BRANCH LINE (TEE INCLUDED) - I ► FIGURE 90 000782 f APPLIANCE BRANCH LINE The Appliance Branch Line is defined as the length of pipe which runs from the supply line to the appliance nozzle(s). This includes all branch line fittings as well as the tee or elbow used to start the ► branch line. See Figures 88 and 91. 1 1 APPLIANCE BRANCH LINES (TEES INCLUDED) FIGURE 91 000783 i SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN • - UL EX.3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-49 3-1-04 REV.3 _ DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) START OF LAST I Distribution Piping Requirements -1.5 Galion System BRANCH LINE START OF FIRST \ DUCT, PLENUM, AND APPLIANCE PROTECTION BRANCH LINE 1. This option allows for duct protection, plenum protection, appliance protection, or any combination. + SUPPLY 2. When using a combination of plenum and duct protection only, LINE TEE TOTAL LENGTH onlyone duct nozzle, either a 1 W, 1100, or a 2W, may be Y used. MUST NOT EXCEEDS FT. (2.4 m) ' ► 3. The previous Option 2 (using 2WH nozzle for plenum and duct protection) still can be utilized. For detailed design information, see previous version of this manual, Part No. 418087-06. E Note: When using this option, all design parameters must be followed as listed in manual version -06. START LAST BRAN LINE ► 4. All distribution piping, supply and branch, must be 3/8 in. of FIRST Schedule 40 black iron, chrome -plated, or stainless.steel. . BRART BRANCH LINE FIGURE 92 5. Each 1.5 gallon tank allows a maximum of five flow numbers.* oomea ' 6. The pipe length between the start of the first branch line and -- the start of the last branch line must not exceed 8 ft. (2.4 m). 1W NOZZLE p When the supply line is split, the combined length of both legs of the supply line (start of first branch line to start of last branch line) must not exceed 8 ft. (2.4 m). See Figure 92. 7. The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed 22 ft. (6.7 m). See Figure 93. . 1N NOZZLE ► 8. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded:. O . _ a _ - 1NNOZZLE (BRANCH LINES IN BOLD) COMBINED LENGTH MUST T-EXCEED 22 FT. (6.7 m) ► FIGURE 93 0007e5 Duct Plenum Appliance Requirements SUpDIV Branch Line Branch Line Branch.Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 40 ft. 6 ft. 4 ft. 10 ft. (12.2 m) 0.8 m) 0.2 m) (3 m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. -- (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) Maximum 900 Elbow 9 4 ,a 4 6 Maximum Tees 1 1 2 3 Maximum Flow Numbers 5* 2 2 3 ► ` Exceptions: 1. Six (6) flow numbers are allowed when a duct branch line is the last branch line on the piping network and no 1N nozzles are used toprotectwoks or griddles. ► 2. Six (6) flow numbers are allowed when six (6) 1N nozzles are used and none of the nozzles are used to protect woks and griddles: NOTE: Only five (5) flow numbers are allowed 'rf -- a 1 N nozzle is used for wok or griddle protection. "Six 3. (6) flow numbers are allowed when only two (2) 3N nozzles are used. �I' SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN } UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-50 REV.3 3-1-04 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements - 3.0 Gallon System 1. The maximum length between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. ► (7.3 m). See Figure 94. 2. The total length of all branch lines. must not exceed 36 ft. ► (10.9 m). See Figure 94. 3. Use a 3/8 in. union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in. supply line. 4. A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line. 5. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded: SUPPLY TEE ` COMBINED LENGTH OF BOTH LEGS OF SUPPLY LINE MUST NOT EXCEED 24 FT. (7.3 m) ,V 3 BRANCH LINE£ IN NOe 2W NOZZLE -_ 1N NO: 230 NOZZLE 0 245 NOZZLE (BRANCH LINE IN BOLD) COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 36 FT (10.9 m) Duct Plenum Appliance Requirements Supply Line Branch Line Branch Line Branch Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 40 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. 12 ft. (12.2 m) (2.4 m) (1.2 m) (3.7 m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) Maximum 90' 9 4 4 6 Elbows Maximum Tees 1 2 2 4 Maximum Flow 11* 4 2 4 Numbers *Exceptions: 1. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any one tank not containing two -flow appliance nozzles, and/or, a 1N nozzle for wok or griddle protection, and/or, a 1F or range protection, and/or, a 3N nozzle for fryer protection. 2. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any one tank for duct and plenum protection only. 3. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only two -flow appliance nozzles. 4. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only three -flow appliance nozzles. Special Instructions: 1. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed when four (4) Dean Industries GTI'Gas Fryers are protected at low proximity as shown in Figure 58 on Page 4-32. The disc] be as shown in Figure 59 on Page 4-32. 2. For certain McDonald's applications, 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a combination of one (1) 2W duct nozzle, one (1) 1/2N electrostatic precipitator n one (1) 1N plenum nozzle, and four (4) two -flow appliance nozzles. Contact Ansul Applications Engineering. Department for additional information. 7. . I DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements — 6.0 Gallon Manifolded System As an option to piping two (2) 3.0 gallon tanks separately, two (2) 't 3.0 gallon tanks can be manifolded together to share a common agent distribution line. Only (2) 3.0 gallon tanks connected to the same regulator can be manifolded. The following requirements must be met when manifolding: j1. All piping must be 3/8 in. Schedule 40. ► 2. See Figure 96 for tank connections. 3. The length of supply line piping between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not ► exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). See Figure 95. When the supply line is '. split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 T11). _ 4. The combined length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft. ► (10.9 m). See Figure 95. 5. A maximum of 22 flow numbers are allowed. I6. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded. Duct ! Requirements Supply Line .Branch Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 32 ft. 8 ft. (9.7 m) (2.4 m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 0.8 m) 0.2 m) Maximum 900 8 4 Elbows Maximum Tees 2 2 I Maximum Flow 22 4 Numbers ij �r SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-51 3-1-04 REV.3 LENGTH OF PIPING MUST NOT EXCEED 24 FT. 2w 2 FLOW APPLIANCE NOZZLE (BRANCH -LINES IN BOLD) COMBINED LENGTH MUST NOT EXCEED 36 FT. •(10.9m) Plenum Appliance Branch Line Branch Line 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 4 ft. 12 ft. 0:2 m) (3.7 m) . 2 ft. 2 ft. (.6 m) (.6 m) 4 6 2 4 2 4 2LE ZZLE FIGURE 95 000267 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-52 REV.2 3-1-04 DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements - 6.0 Gallon Manifolded ► Distribution Piping Requirements — 6.0 Gallon System with System (Continued) Independent Pipe Runs This configuration consists of two 3 gallon tanks. Both tanks are Independent pipe runs can also be used with the regulated connected to a common manifold tee and are pressurized from a release assembly and the tank/enclosure assembly. See Figure single double tank (Part No. 73022) nitrogen cartridge in the regu- 97. When manifolding is not used, each of the two (2) 3 gallon ► lated release assembly. See Figure 96. Note: A tank mounting P. tanks utilize the piping limitations of a single tank, system. bracket can be utilized instead of the tank/enclosure assembly. ►See Figure 98. 3/8 IN. 3!8 IN. BR 3/81N. BRANCH SUPPLY SUPPLY SEE USE HOSE/ NOTE HOSE/ GROMMET �:�LGROMMET I PACKAGE 3I81N. 3/8 IN BRANCH PACKAGE I -=� V=& (PART NO. SUPPLY (PART NO. SEE 1 418511) 418511) NOTE 1 1 DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN CARTRIDGE OR (LT-A-101-30 CARTRIDGE - REGULATED 3.0 GALLON REGULATED RELEASE ACTUATOR ONLY) ASSEMBLY OR 3.0 GALLON REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY TANKIENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY NOTE 1: THE PIPE CONNECTION FROM TANK CENTER TO TANK CENTER CANNOT EXCEED 8-1/2 IN. (21.5 cm). ALSO, OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY CAN BE UTILIZED WHEN MANIFOLDING 3.0 GALLON TANK, NOTE 2`: ONLY 3 GALLON TANKS CAN BE MANIFOLDED. FIGURE 96 000272 F] 3.0 GALLON 3.0 GALLON - TANK TANK OR OR 1.5 GALLON 1.5 GALLON TANK TANK REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY OR REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY TANKIENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY - DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN CARTRIDGE OR 101-30 CO2 CARTRIDGE (LT-A-101-30 CARTRIDGE - REGULATED ACTUATOR ONLY) FIGURE 97 000766 SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-53 3-1-04 REV.2 • DISTRIBUTION PIPING REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Distribution Piping Requirements - 9.0 Gallon System This optional configuration consists only of three 3-gallon tanks, all ' pressurized from a single double -tank nitrogen cartridge with ► expellant gas hoses connected as shown in Figure 98. Tanks No. l 1 and No. 2 must be connected directly to the regulator with sepa- rate expellant gas hoses and Tank No 3 must be connected to ► Tank No. 2 with a third expellant gas hose as shown in Figure 98. Each tank must be connected to an independent distribution pip- ing network as shown in Figure 98. Distribution require- piping ments for each network must be as follows: 1. The maximum length between the start of the first branch line and the start of the last branch line must not exceed 24 ft. (7.3 m). When the supply line is split, the combined total of both legs of the supply line (from the start of the 9 PP Y first branch line to the start of the last branch line) must not exceed 24 ft. r ► (7.3 m). See Figure 94. 2. The total length of all branch lines must not exceed 36 ft. 3.0 (10.9 m). See Figure 94. GALLON 3.0 GALLON 3.0 GALLON 3. Use a 3/8 in: union to connect the tank adaptor to the 3/8 in. TANK. NO.3 TANK NO.2 TANK NO.1 supply line. 4. A maximum of two nozzles are allowed per duct branch line. i 5. When using this 9.0 gallon system configuration, no mani- folding of distribution piping Is allowed. TWO TANK ENCLOSURE 3 GALLON REGULATED DOUBLE TANK NITROGEN ASSEMBLY PART NO. RELEASE ASSEMBLY, CARTRIDGE OR 6. When an ANSUL AU I UMAN Regulated .Release is utilized in ► 430324 (INCLUDES (2) OR 3 GALLON LT-A-101-30 CARTRIDGE this configuration, additional regulator actuators cannot be HOSES AND (2) REGULATED ACTUATOR (REGULATED ACTUATOR GROMMETS) ASSEMBLY ONLY) used. NOTE: IF TWO TANK ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY, PART NO.430324, IS CONNECTED 7. Only 3 gallon tanks can be Utilized In this configuration. TO THE 3 GALLON REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY, NO ADDITIONAL REGULATED ACTUATOR(S) ASSEMBLIES CAN BE USED. I 8. The requirements of the following table must not be exceeded ► FIGURE 98 for each 3 gallon tank: 000007 Duct Plenum Appliance Requirements Supply Line .Branch Line Branch Line .Branch Line Pipe Size 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. 3/8 in. Maximum Length 40 ft. 8 ft. 4 ft. 12 ft. (12.2 m) (2.4 m) (1:2 m) '(3.7 m) Maximum Rise 6 ft. 4 ft. 2 ft. 2 ft. (1.8 m) (1.2 m) (.6 m) (.6 m) Maximum 900 9 4 4 6 Elbows Maximum Tees 1 2 2 4 Maximum Flow it* 4 2 4 Numbers 'Exceptions: ► 1. Twelve 1121 flow numbers are allowed in any tank not containing two -flow appliance nozzles. and/or, a 1N nozzle for wok or griddle protection, and/or, a IF nozzle or a 1N nozzle for range protection, and/or, a 3N nozzle for fryer protection. 2. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed in any tank for duct and plenum protection ONLY. 3. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only two -flow appliance nozzles. �I 4. Twelve (12) flow numbers are allowed with any one tank using only three -flow appliance nozzles. Special instructions: 1. When four (4) Dean Industries GTI Gas Fryers are protected at low proximity as shown in Figure 59 on Page 4-32, the discharge piping must be as shown in Figure 59 on Page 4-32. 2. For certain McDonald's applications, 11.5 flow numbers are allowed when using a combination of one.(1) 2W duct nozzle, one-(1) 1/2N electrostatic precipitator nozzle, one (1) 1N plenum nozzle, and four (4) two -flow appliance nozzles. Contact Ansul Applications. Engineering Department for additional information. I', SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-54 REV.2 3-1-04 DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Once the fire suppression system design has been determined, a detection system design must be completed. This section contains guidelines and limitations for detection system installation. Detector Identification The two types of detectors are distinguished from each other by their location in the detection system. 1. The Terminal Detector (Part No. 56838, 15375, or 417368) is the last in a series of detectors, or the only detector used in a single -detector system. This detector is thus named because it is at the point at which the wire rope ends, or "terminates" 2. A Series Detector (Part No. 56837, 15373, or 417369) is any detector located in -line between the regulated release mech- anism and the terminal detector. Detector/Pulley Elbow Quantity The quantity of detectors used in the system will vary depending on the style of detector used. 1. Conduit runs, pulley elbows, and number of detectors per sys- tem must be within the approved system guidelines. The fol- lowing requirements must not be exceeded: Maximum Maximum Maximum Number of Number of Length of 112 Detectors Elbows in. Conduit per System per System per System Clip on Style 12 18 125 ft. (38.1 m) Detector Hinge Style 5 8 103 ft. (31.3 m) Detector Scissors Style 15 20 150 ft. (45.7 m) Detector 2. If hinge style detectors are mixed in a system with either clip - on or scissor style, 4 series and 1 terminal is the maximum number allowed. If clip -on style are mixed with scissor style, the maximum allowed is 11 series and 1 terminal. NOTICE When using the "clip -on" style detector, the ter- minal detector may use the "hinged" style mounting bracket with the "clip -on" style linkage. This is only allowed with the terminal detector. No other linkages are allowed to be mixed with other brackets. When using this. option, the total number of "clip -on" style detectors (11 series and 1 terminal) is still allowed. 3. If hinge style detectors are mixed in a system with either clip - on or scissor style, the maximum length of wire rope must not exceed 103 ft. (31.4 m) and the maximum number of pulley elbows must not exceed 8. If clip -on style are mixed with scis- sor style, the maximum length of wire rope must not exceed 125 ft. (3.81 m) and the maximum number of pulley elbows must not exceed 18. 4. If the hazard requires more than 15 detectors, up to five 101 Remote Releases (Part No. 12029) can be used for system actuation. Each 101 remote release allows the use of a maxi- mum of 15 "scissor" style detectors (14 series and 1 terminal) for a total of 75 detectors if needed. Detector Placement Requirements EXHAUST DUCTS Each exhaust duct must have at least one detector installed in the duct entrance, located in the airstream of the cooking vapors, or at ► a maximum of 20 ft. (6.1 m) into the duct opening. See Figure 99. P. 20 FT. (6 m) MAXIMUM FIGURE 99 000271 NOTICE When gas appliances are used and the flue gases from the burner are exhausted into the duct, the detector must be kept out of the air stream of these exhaust gases. These gases can be very hot and could actuate the system unnecessarily. Duct openings that are long and narrow or large enough to require multiple duct nozzles may require additional detectors. ELECTROSTATIC PRECIPITATOR If an electrostatic precipitator is located at or near the base of the exhaust duct, it is necessary to locate a detector below the pre- cipitator, at the base of the duct, and also locate one in the duct, ► just above the precipitator. See Figure 100. When installing the detector bracket and system conduit, make certain they do not interfere with the operation of the precipitator. f b. Detector Replacement Requirements (Continued) COOKING APPLIANCES If the cooking appliance is located under an exhaust duct where a detector has been mounted, it is normally not necessary to utilize another detector for that cooking appliance, provided the detector ► is not more than 1.2 in. (30 cm) into the duct. See Figure 101. APPLIANCE APPUANCE APPLIANCE APPLIANCE REQUIRES COVERED BY COVERED BY REQUIRES SEPARATE DETECTOR DETECTOR SEPARATE DETECTOR UNDER DUCT UNDER DUCT DETECTOR FIGURE 101 000269 Each cooking appliance with a continuous cooking surface not exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. (122 x 122 cm) can be protected by a min- imum of one detector. Cooking appliances with a continuous cook- ing surface exceeding 48 in. x 48 in. can be protected by at least one detector per 48 in. x 48 in. cooking area. Detectors used for ► cooking appliances must be located above the protected appli- ance toward the exhaust duct side of the appliance. The detector should be located in the air stream of the appliance to enhance' system response time. ► Note: For overlapping detector coverage, see Page 4-43 for ► design requirements. Detection Line Requirements CONDUIT Rigid conduit or 1/2 inch EMT thin -wall conduit may be used. Standard steel conduit fittings (compression type are recommend- ed) must be employed to properly install the detection system. All conduit or pipe must be firmly supported. When using pipe, make certain that all ends are carefully reamed, deburred and blown clear of chips and scale before assembly. NOTICE The conduit offset can be used at the top or bot- tom of the regulated release to change direction of the conduit. The conduit offset cannot be used with pulley tees. All other changes in direc- tion must be made by using Ansul approved pul- ley elbows, Part No. 423254 or 415670. See ► Figure 102. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-55 3-1-04 REV.2 FIGURE 102. 000270 Fusible Link Selection When possible, temperature readings should be taken at each detector location to determine correct fusible link temperature rat- ing. Temperature can be recorded using either a maximum regis- tering thermometer, Part No.15240, temperature tape or any other accurate thermometer. �OP1 • TEMPERATURE RATING STAMPED ON FUSIBLE LINK BODY 000,70 K STYLE ML STYLE ooa,,, 500 °F (260 °C) ONLY ► FIGURE 103 Select correct UL Listed fusible link(s) for installation in detector.(s) according to the temperature condition. Two styles are available. See Figure 103. See Component Section for detailed temperature ► ratings. SECTION IV - SYSTEM DESIGN - UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-56 REV.2 3-1-04 MANUAL PULL STATION REQUIREMENTS Metal Stamped Style - Part No. 4835 or 54011 A remote manual pull station allows the R-102 system to be man- Parts that may be used for installation of a metal stamped remote ually operated at some point distant from the regulated release manual pull station are: assembly. The pull station should be installed at a maximum height Description Part No. of 60 in. (152 cm) and located in the path of exit. The pull station Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly* 54011 is the only source of manual actuation of the regulated release Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly 4835 e assembly. Pulley Elbow 423250 _ The total length of the cable used for each manual pull station with- Pulley Elbow 415670 in a system must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). Pulley Tee 427929 The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per pull Assembly includes parts listed below: , station is 20. 1/16 in. Stainless Steel Cable 50 ft. (15 m) 15821 Oval Pressk Sleeves 4596 One pulley tee, Part No. 427929, is allowed per system. RCrimp Glass Break Rod (1) 4834 The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a pull station E is 150 ft. (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows used per MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS side of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the AUTOMAN, An Ansul or Ansul approved mechanical gas shut-off valve system the 150 ft. (45.7 m) maximum must be observed but as pulley can be attached to the R-102 system. -The system works both elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the tee, they must mechanically and pneumatically by use of an air cylinder located be deducted from the available pulley elbows (20) allowed on each inside the regulated release assembly. Upon actuation of the fire side. suppression system, a pneumatically -operated air cylinder assem- Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN bly will mechanically close the gas shut-off valve. ; and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for The total length of the cable for. each mechanical gas valve must ► use on each side of the tee is 10 per side. See Figure 104 for three not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows different examples. (Note: Both must be gas valves or both must that may be used is 20 for each valve. be pull stations. Mixing is not allowed.) One pulley tee (Part No. 427929) is allowed per system. TEE CLOSE TO AUTOMAN (EXAMPLE) The maximum length of cable from the AUTOMAN to a gas valve is PULLEY TEE 1150 ft. (45.7 m) with a maximum of 20 pulley elbows used per side of the tee. As the tee is located farther from the AUTOMAN, the (3 5 150ft. (45.7 m) maximum must be observed but as pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN and the tee, they must be deducted from the available pulley elbows (20) allowed on each side. Example: If 10 pulley elbows are placed between the AUTOMAN AUTOMAN and the pulley tee, the maximum available pulley elbows left for GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULLLL ► use on each side of the tee is 10 side. SFigure 104 for three per See g - _ 149 FT. (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS MAXIMUM different examples.. PER EACH SIDE OF TEE Parts that may be used for installation of a Mechanical Gas Shut - TEE CLOSE TO GAS VALVES OR MANUAL PULL (EXAMPLE) off Valve are: _ Description Part No. N.. 1t4LLEY7TJE� Gas Valve/Actuator 3/4 in. Assembly (Ansul)* 55598 (mm) Gas Valve/Actuator 1 in. Assembly (Ansul)* 55601 Gas Valve/Actuator 1 1/4 in. Assembly (Ansul)* 55604 Gas Valve/Actuator 1 112 in. Assembly (Ansul)* 55607 GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL Gas Valve/Actuator 2 in. Assembly (Ansel)* 55610 AUTOMAN Gas Valve/Actuator 2 1/2 in. Assembly (ASCO)* 25937 149 FT. (45.4 m) AND 20 PULLEY ELBOWS BETWEEN Gas Valve/Actuator 3 In. Assembly (ASCO)* 25938 AUTOMAN AND TEE Pulley Elbow 423250 Pulley Elbow 415670 TEE HALFWAY BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND GAS VALVES OR MANUAL PULL (EXAMPLE) Pulley Tee 427929 75 FT (22.9 m) AND 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 1 /16 In. Stainless Steel Cable 15821 Or 50 ft. 05 m) or 500 ft. (152 m) roll 79653 Oval Press -To -Crimp Sleeve 4596 - 75 FT. (22.9 m) AND 75 FT. (22.9 m) AND Stop Sleeve (2) 26317 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 10 PULLEY ELBOWS 'Assembly includes parts listed below: 1 PULLEY TEE Air Cylinder Assembly 15733 AUTOMAN Air Cylinder 15521 i GAS VALVE OR GAS VALVE OR Tubing Assembly 15529 I MANUAL PULL MANUAL PULL Copper Tubing, 1 /8 in. 15525 ► FIGURE 104 Male Elbow 15523 Male Connector 15522 00,*07 Machine Screw (2) 15421 i Hex Nut (2) 15527 Lockwasher(2) 4141 Visual Inspection Seal (2) 197 i Plenum Protection The R-102 system uses the 1 W Nozzle (Part No. 419336) or the ► 1100 Nozzle (Part No. 430192) or the 1 N Nozzle (Part No. 419335) for plenum protection. The 1 W nozzle tip is stamped with 1 W and ► the 1 N nozzle tip is stamped with 1 N, indicating they are one -flow nozzles and must be counted as one flow number each. When pro- tecting a plenum chamber, the entire chamber must be protected regardless 'of filter length. ► VERTICAL PROTECTION — GENERAL ► One 1 W nozzle or 1100 nozzle will protect 4 linear feet (1.2 m) of plenum. The maximum distance from the end of the hood to the first and last nozzle must be no more than ft. (.6 m). After the first nozzle, any additional nozzles must be positioned at a maximum of 4 ft. 0.2 m) apart down the entire length of the plenum. The I° ► plenum width must not exceed 4 ft. (1.2 m). (The 1 W or 1100 noz- zle can be used .on single or V bank filter arrangements.) See )1 ► Figure 6. 2FT(s ) SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-5 10-1-02 REV.3 20IN.,(51 cm) MAXIMUM 1 IN. (2.5 cm) MINIMUM 20 IN. (51 cm) MAXIMUM 1 IN. (2.5 cm) MINIMUM MAXIMUM ' FIGURE 7 ' 4 FT. 0.2 m) 000199 MAXIMUM ' 4 FT. 0.2 m) 4 FT. 0.2 m) ' Option 2: The 1 W or 1100 nozzle must be placed perpendicular, 2 FT. (.6 m) MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 8-12 in. -(20-30 cm) from the face of the filter and angled MAXIMUM to the center of the filter. The nozzle tip 'must be within 2 in. (5 cm) from the perpendicular center line of the fil- ter. Seefigure 8. 121N. (30 cm) 20 cm) IUM NOZZLE TIF MUST BE WI I HIN FIGURE 6 THIS AREA . 000197 ► When protecting plenums with the 1 W or 1100 nozzle, two options of coverage are available: ► Option 1: The 1100 or 1 W nozzle must be on the center line of the FIGURW02DO single or °V" bank filter and positioned within 1-20 in. . (2.5-51 cm) above the top edge of the filter. See ► HORIZONTAL PROTECTION OPTION 1 ► Figure 7. 1 N NOZZLE— PART NO.419335 —SINGLE BANK PROTECTION One 1 N nozzle will protect 10 linear feet (3.1 m) of single filter bank ► plenum. The nozzle(s) must be mounted in the plenum, 2 to 4 in. (5 to 10 cm) from the face of the filter, centered between the filter height dimension, and aimed down the length.'See Figure 9. 2 - 4 IN. 10 FT43.1 m) (5 - 10 cm) MAXIMUM r 000201 SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-6 REV. 4 10-1-02 Plenum Protection (Continued) HORIZONTAL PROTECTION — OPTION 2 For a plenum, either single or "V" bank, with a linear extension 1100 NOZZLE — PART NO. 430912 —"V" BANK PROTECTION longer than 10 feet (3.1 m), each bank may be protected using one 1 W NOZZLE — PART NO.419336 1 N nozzle every 10 ft. (3.1 m) or less depending on the overall One 1100 or 1 W nozzle will protect 6 linear feet (1.8 m) of "V bank ngth of the plenum. See Figure 12. The nozzles may point in the opposite directions as long as the entire plenum area is protected, plenum. The nozzle must be mounted horizontal) y, positioned 1 /3 the and the 10 ft. (3.1 m) limitation is not exceeded. See Figure 13. The i filter height down from the top of the filter. Nozzles can be located at nozzle positioning shown in Figure 14 is not an acceptable method 6 ft. (1.8 m) spacings on longer plenums. See Figure 10. of protection because the plenum area directly under the -tee is not 1100 NOZZLE OR I NOZZLE within the discharge pattern Of either nozzle. 10FT. (3.1 m) MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF FILTER (H) 6 FT 0.8 m) MAXIMUM 1. Fr. (1.2 m) MAXIMUM (� FIGURE 10 006524 1 N NOZZLE — PART NO. 419335 —"V" BANK PROTECTION Two IN nozzles will protect 10 linear feet (3.1 m) by 4 ft. (1.2 m) wide of "V" bank plenum. The nozzles must be mounted in the plenum, 2 to 4 in. (5.to 10 cm) from the face of the filter, centered between the filter height dimension, and aimed down the length. See Figure 11. �'01' 'i . 2 - 4 IN. (5 - 10 cm) 2 - 4 IN. X (5 - 10 cm) 000203 4 Fr. ( MAXII FIGURE 11 10 Fr. (3.1 m) MAXIMUM 10 FT: (3.1 m) MAXIMUM 10 FT. (3.1 m) MAXIMUM 10F..(3.1 m) MAXIMUM Fr. (9.1 m) 10 Fr. (3.1 m) MAXIMUM Fr. (9.1 m) FIGURE 12 000206 4. f _.s FIGURE 13 000207 r I II i I ' I I FIGURE 14 000208 I I MECHANICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS (Continued) All valves above are UL listed and approved. They may be mount- ed in any position. Pipe threads are type NPT. Ambient operating temperature range of all valves is 32 OF to 120 OF (0 °C to 49 °C). The valves are not weatherproof and must be located indoors in areas approved by the "authority having jurisdiction" ELECTRICAL GAS VALVE REQUIREMENTS A UL Listed electrically -operated gas shut-off valve can be attached to the R-102 system to provide an electrical means of shutting off the gas line at a predetermined point. If an electric gas shut-off valve is used in the system it must be attached with both an electric (snap -action) switch and a manual reset relay. For more information on the types of electric (snap -action) switches, refer to the Electrical Switch, Field Installation section. The manual reset relay is reviewed in this section. All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. The following is a brief explanation of how the R-102 system oper- ates with an Electric Gas Shut-off Valve attached: With the regulated release cocked in the ready condition, the nor- mally closed contacts in the snap -action switch allow current to flow to the manual reset relay. With the relay coil energized, nor- mally open contacts in the reset relay close, allowing the solenoid in the gas valve to be energized. Once the R-102 system is activated, the normally closed contacts in the snap -action switch will open, de -energizing the reset relay. This will, in turn, open the contacts in the relay which will cause the gas valve to become de -energized and close. The system must be re -armed and the "push to reset" button on the reset relay must be operated to reopen the gas valve. it is important to note that a power failure or an electrical power interruption will cause the gas valve to close even though the sys- tem was not fired. In either case, whether in a fired condition or when a power failure has occurred, the manual reset relay and electric gas shut-off valve must be reset to resume a normal operating condition. For resetting, refer to the "Recharge and Resetting Procedures" section in this manual. . Approvals Ansul gas valves listed in this section are UL listed and approved for 110 VAC. If more information is required, refer to the Gas and Oil Equipment List of Underwriters Laboratories, Inca under "Electrically Operated Valves Guide No. 440 A5" or consult Ansul Incorporated, Marinette, Wisconsin 54143-2542. If other gas valves are used, they shall be "UL listed electrically - operated safety valves for natural or LP gas as required, of appro- priate pressure and temperature rating, 110 VAC/60 Hz' "The infor- mation on temperature and type of gas that the valves are suitable for may be found in the Gas and Oil Equipment List of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. under "Electrically Operated Valves Guide No. 440 A5." The electrically operated gas valve must be of the type that needs to be energized to remain open. Parts that may be used for installation of a 110 VAC Gas Shut-off Valve are: SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-57 3-1-04 Description Part No. Electric Solenoid Valve, 3/4 in. NPT* 13707 Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 in. NPT* 13708 Electric Solenoid Valve, 1 112 in. NPT* 13709 Electric Solenoid Valve, 2 in. NPT* 13710 Electric Solenoid Valve, 3 in. NPT* 17643 Manual Reset Relay (110 VAC) 14702 `Valves are normally closed when de -energized. ALARM INITIATING SWITCH REQUIREMENTS The Alarm Initiating Switch can be field mounted within the ANSUL AUTOMAN release. The switch must be used to close a supervised circuit to the building main fire alarm panel when the ANSUL AUTOMAN release actuates. This action will signal the fire alarm panel that there was a system actuation in the kitchen area. The switch kit contains all necessary mounting components along with a mounting instruction sheet. The switch is rated 50 mA, 28VDC. Part No.' Descrption 428311 Alarm Initiating Switch Kit ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS The electric (snap -action) switches for the R-102 system are spe- cially designed to fit the regulated release assembly. The switches are intended for use with electric gas valves, alarms, contactors, lights, contractor supplied electric power shut-off devices, and other electrical devices that are designed to shut off .or turn on when the fire suppression system is actuated. (See 'Figures ► 105 through 107 for reference.) Contractors shall supply "UL listed; enclosed industrial control equipment or magnetic switch having a rating matching that of the cooking appliance, coil 110 VAC/60 Hz or24 VAC/60 Hz" All electrical connections should be performed by a QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN and in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. Electric (Snap -Action) Switches that may be field installed are: Part No. Description 423878 One Switch Kit 423879 Two Switch Kit 423880 Three Switch Kit 423881 Four Switch Kit Each switch has a set. of single -pole, double throw contacts rated at 21 amp, 1 HP, 125, 250, 277 VAC or 2 HP 250, 277 VAC. NOTE: A relay must be supplied by others if the equipment load exceeds the rated capacity of the switch. Electrical wiring and equipment shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) or the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. If a fire alarm system is provided, the fire extinguishing system shall be connected to the alarm system in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code, so,that the actuation of the extinguishing system will sound the fire alarm as well as provide the extinguishing function of the system. If -supervision of the electrical detection, electrical actuation or .electrical power supply circuit is provided, it shall give prompt audi- ble or visual indication of trouble and shall be distinctive from alarms or indicators indicating •operation=or hazardous -conditions as specified in NFPA 17A. SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-58 3-1-04 ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Electric (110 VAC/60 Hz) Gas Shut-off Valve INSTALLATION OVERVIEW POWER SOURCE ELECTRIC SNAP -ACTION SWITCH WIRING SCHEMATIC O MANUAL RESET O RELAY ELECTRIC GAS VALVE JUNCTION BOXES (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) 000273 WIRING SCHEMATIC — RELAY PART NO. 426151 --- BLACK ANSUL SNAP -ACTION SWITCH RED (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL --- AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) BROWN I RESET POWER I INDICATOR 1 GND� I r I A B SCREWI 5 Li 1 I RELAY COIL I 4 I 6 13 9 1 3 12 1 4. 7 �1 I 1 I I I 1 MANUAL RESET RELAY I (PART NO. 426151) 1 I ELECTRIC RATING 1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC GAS VALVE 1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC SEE NOTE 3 13 Amp, 28 VDC NOTE: 1. DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 2. _ _ _ _ _ DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. 3. CONTRACTORS:'UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING ► THAT OF THE COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V/60HZ 4. DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP -ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC. L2NEUTRAL Lt HOT 110 VAC/60HZ 002462 FIGURE 105 j L_ SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-59 3-1-04 ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Electric 010 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load INSTALLATION OVERVIEW POWER SOURCE O MANUAL RESET O RELAY ELECTRIC SNAP -ACTION ? SWITCH CONTACTOR I (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) Ij JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIEDBY ANSUL) ' POWER ON -OFF SWITCH (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) 000276 I WIRING SCHEMATIC WIRING SCHEMATIC — RELAY PART NO.426151 r--- BLACK RED BROWN ANSUL SNAP -ACTION SWITCH --- (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) RESET POWER 1 INDICATOR 1 GNDI nRED_=I A 8 SCREW I 5 I I RELAY COIL L2 NEUTRAL 6 3 L1 HOT 110 VAC/60HZ I g 3 I2 4 vI 7 1 1 i 1 1 CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) POWER ON=OFFSWITCH 1 MANUAL RESET RELAY I I I (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) �- (PART NO.426151) 1 1 ELECTRIC RATING 1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC TO HEATING ELEMENT LOAD 220V1440V �� TO POWER SUPPLY NOTE: 1/2 HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC L--J � J. DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 13 Amp, .28 VDC 002460 2. _ _ _ _ _ DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. 3. GAS VALVES: "UL LISTED ELECTRICALLY -OPERATED SAFETY VALVE FOR NATURAL, OR LP GAS AS NEEDED OF APPROPRIATE PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE RATING, 110V/60 HZ' OR ANSUL GAS VALVES, PART NUMBERS 13707, 13708, 13709, 13710, AND 17643. 4. DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP -ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FIGURE 106 I ► FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT -CIRCUIT'S, ETC. A SECTION IV — SYSTEM DESIGN ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 4-60 3-1-04 ELECTRICAL SWITCH REQUIREMENTS (Continued) Electric 010 VAC/60 Hz) Application with Customer Supplied Contactor and Heating Element Load, and Power Supply Switch INSTALLATION OVERVIEW POWER SOURCE 0 MANUAL RESET O RELAY ELECTRIC SNAP -ACTION SWITCH JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) WIRING SCHEMATIC WIRING SCHEMATIC — RELAY PART NO.426151 r -- BLACK RED ANSUL SNAP -ACTION SWITCH-- BROWN (SWITCH CONTACTS SHOWN WITH ANSUL LLL AUTOMAN IN THE COCKED POSITION) RESET POWER INDICATOR j nGND� RED r I A 8 salal 5 1 1 I RELAY COIL 4 6 1 9 ( 3jr 12 4 7 1 Ir-- I 1 SWITCH OR THERMOSTAT (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) CONTACTOR (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) 000279 L2NEUTRAL 110 VAC/60HZ L1 HOT IL. ---CONTACTOR ( I SWITCH OR THERMOSTAT (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) ( I (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED) r �1 MANUAL RESET RELAY (PART NO. 426151) -------------__J I I ELECTRIC RATING I j 1/3 HP, 10 Amp, 120 VAC 1HP, 10 Amp, 240 VAC TO HEATING TO POWER SUPPLY 13 Amp, 28 VDC ELEMENT LOAD 220V/440V 002461 NOTE: 1. DENOTES FIELD INSTALLATION. 2. _ _ _ _ _ DENOTES FACTORY INSTALLATION. 3. CONTRACTORS: "UL LISTED ENCLOSED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT OR MAGNETIC SWITCH HAVING A RATING MATCHING THAT OF THE COOKING APPLIANCE COIL, 110V/60HZ" ► 4. DO NOT USE BLACK WIRE ON SNAP -ACTION SWITCH IN NORMAL INSTALLATION. BLACK WIRE TO BE USED ONLY FIGURE 107 FOR EXTRANEOUS ALARM, LIGHT CIRCUITS, ETC. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS The installation information listed in this section deals with the lim- itations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those indi- viduals responsible for the installation of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current Ansul certificate in an R-102 training program. Before attempting any installation, the entire system design must have been determined including: Nozzle Placement, Tank Quantity, Actuation and Expellant Gas Piping, Distribution Piping, and Detection System Requirements and an installation sketch should be completed. MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS For successful system performance, the regulated release assem- bly, regulated actuator assembly(ies), and tank-enclosure(s) or tank -bracket assembly(ies) used must be located in areas where the air temperature will not fall below 32 OF (0 oQ or exceed 130 OF (54 °C). Also, the components must be arranged to con- form to the actuation and expellant gas line, and the distribution piping guidelines noted in "System Design" 1. �Ff. Use only an ANSUL AUTOMAN Regulated Release assembly or OEM Release/Bracket Assembly. The regu- lator in this assembly is specifically designed to allow a regulated flow of expellant gas into the agent tank(s). Absence of this regulator could cause the tank(s) to rup- ture or create an improper system discharge. Mount the regulated release assembly, OEM Release Assembly, and each regulated actuator assembly required by completing the following steps: See Figures 1, 2, and 3. a. Select a rigid surface for mounting the enclosure. The i mounting locations must allow the regulated release assembly and the regulated actuator assembly(ies) to be within the limitation of the actuation and expellant gas line lengths and must be able to support the weight of the assembly(ies). When the OEM Release Assembly is mounted inside a .cabinet, clearances shall be provided for unrestricted movement of the release assembly compo- nents within the closed cabinet. b. Detach cover from the enclosure. Remove agent tank from enclosure and the expellant gas line hose from the tank/adaptor assembly. c. Secure enclosure box to selected mounting location using the four mounting holes. Use appropriate type of -fasteners depending on the mounting surface. d. When mounting a 6-gallon manifolded system (or a 6-gal- Ion individual piped system) it is critical that each mounting. box is located as shown in Figure 3a. There must be a 5/16 in. space between each box. Less than 5/16 in. will cause ' interference with the covers, and more than a 5/16 in. will cause a gap between the two hose grommets which will expose the hose to possible tampering or damage. Remove the 7/8 in. knockout in the left side of the ANSUL AUTOMAN release box and remove the 1 in. knockout in the right side of the tank -enclosure box. Install grommets in each (use Ansul hose/grommet package, Part No. 418511). Remove 1.14 in. Plug from baok V019 V R-142 rogular ana install fixed end of secondaryexpellant gas hose (included in hose/grommet package, Part No. 418511) in 114 in. reg- ulator outlet and wrench tighten. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL.EX. 3470 ULC GEx747 Page 5-1 3-1-04 REV.5 If not already done, mount both boxes to a rigid surface using appropriate fasteners. Fill tanks per instructionslisted in Steps 3 and 4 on Page 5-3. Next, route hose through grommets and wrench tighten into 1/4 in. inlet of the adaptor on the tank in the tank/enclosure assembly. Also install hose' to tank adaptor in regulated ► release and wrench tighten. See Figure 96 in "Design. Section" for details of hose -routing. REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY \ 16 1/2IN. (42 cm) 13 13/16 1N. (35 cm) 1 3/81N. (3.5 cm) ' o 23 112 1N. (59.7 cm) I �O O 197/16IN. 71/21N (19 cm) FIGURE 1 000287 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY 16 1/2 IN. (42 cm) 13 13/16 1N. (35 cm) 1 3/81N. o0 o 23 112 1N. (59.7 cm) 19 7/16 IN. } I (49.3'cm) /. 7 1/2 IN. (19 CM FIGURE 000289 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-2 REV. 3 10-1-02 MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued) OEM RELEASE/BRACKET ASSEMBLY 61N. 7 IN. �(15 cm) (18 cm) 45.3 r C�.3881N..7 cm) O 18.5 1N. e a (47 cm) 151N. (38 cm) • / 62 (1.5 cm) .62 0.5 cm) 5.75 IN. 04.6 cm) MULTIPLE TANK ASSEMBLY 6 5/16 IN. (16 cm) 13 13/16 IN. LOCATION OF (35 cm) — GROMMETS ~ I I I19 7/16 IN. (49 cm) FIGURE 3 000707 19 7/16 IN. 1 (49 cm) 6 16 IN. -28 IN. (.7 cm) (.8 cm) HOLE (TYP) FIGURE 3a 000788 FM Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. 2. Mount each tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly by com- pleting the following steps: a. Select a rigid, vertical surface for mounting the enclosure or bracket. (Keep in mind that the 3 gallon tank is taller than the bracket. Allow sufficient space for convenient piping and removal.) b. Remove tank from enclosure or bracket, and secure enclo- sure or bracket to the mounting location using the four mounting holes. Use appropriate type of fasteners depend- ing on the mounting surface. ► 3.0 GALLON TANK BRACKET 3 1 /2 IN. 9 314 IN (25 cm) 7 13/11 (20 cm) ► SINGLE TANK ENCLOSURE P. ► 101 REMOTE RELEASE r 8 5/8 IN. � I (22 cm) g i 000499 9 1N. ,1 (22.9 cm) - 6 5116 IN. 06 cm) I 1 i I 23 1/2 IN. (59.7 cm) 119 7/16 IN: (49.4 cm) 6 (19.1 cm) 000290 FIGURE 4 5 13/16IN. (14.9 cm) 9 3/8 IN. (23.8 cm) (18.1 cm) 18 1/2 IN. (47 cm) 21 1/2 IN. (54.6 cm) I FIGURE 4a bbb484 , I MOUNTING THE COMPONENTS (Continued) 3. Fill each agent tank by completing the following steps: a. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly from tank fill opening. Visually inspect tank adaptor to determine bursting disc is in place and that silver side is away from tank. See Figure 5. ILA FIGURE 5 000291 Safety glasses should be worn during transfer opera- tions of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Avoid contact with skin or eyes. In case of contact, flush immediately with water for 15 minutes. If irritation per- sists, contact a physician. Do not take internally. If taken internally do not induce vomiting. Dilute with water or milk and contact a physician immediately. Place plastic funnel in fill opening and fill tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH ► Liquid Fire Suppressant. See Figure 6 for detailed filling ► tolerances. NOTE: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any foreign material from entering. the tank. See Figure 6. ► During filling, the agent temperature should be 60 OF to 80 OF (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in agent entering gas hoses and regulator potentially causing system malfunction. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-2.1 10-1-02 REV.4 ► ALL STAINLESS STEEL TANKS 1 L 2 1/4 IN. ± 1/8 IN. (57 mm ± 3 mm) FROM THE TOP OF THE COLLAR —f FOR THE 3.0 GALLON TANK T OR 1 3/4 IN. ± 1/8 IN. (45 mm ± 3 mm) FROM THETOP OFTHE COLLAR ► FOR THE 1.5 GALLON TANK 000292 RED PAINTED STEEL TANK 1 IN. TO 1 1/8 IN. (25-29 mm) FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE FILL OPENING FOR BOTH 3.0 GALLON AND 1.5 GALLON TANKS 000292a FIGURE 6 000292 c. Reinstall adaptor/tube assembly to tank by tightening until metal to metal contact is achieved between bottom of adap- tor and tank collar. 4. Place each tank into its enclosure or bracket. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-2.2 REV. 1 7-1-98 NOTES: INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE Before installing any actuation or expellant gas line, the piping design must be determined; and the regulated release assembly, each regulated actuator assembly and each tank -bracket assem- bly should be securely mounted. General Piping Requirements 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot -dipped galva- nized, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. 2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. 3. The piping and fitting connections must be sealed with pipe tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise around the threads, away from the pipe opening. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ► UL.EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-3 7-1-98 REV.2 NOTICE Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe open- ing, as this could cause possible blockage of the gas pressure. Thread sealant or compound must not be used. 4. When connecting actuation or expellant gas line piping, install a 1/4 in. union near the tank inlet for easy disassembly later. Actuation Gas Line Install actuation gas line from the regulated release mechanism high pressure side outlet (side opposite regulated outlet) through the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by completing the fol- lowing steps: 1. Remove the 1/8 in. plug from high pressure side outlet. Install the appropriate fitting for additional equipment attachment as required. A 1/4 x 1/8 in. reducing fitting is -required toconnect the 1/4 in. actuation line. See Figure 7. Typical Arrangements For A One .. ems, - �►� zc �►� ��. Typical Arrangements For A Two Device Connection To Cartridge 000294 Cartridge Typical Arrangements For A Three Device Connection To 1� PIPE (OR HOSE WHEN TO ENCLOSURE ONLY) VTOIN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY TO REGULATED ACTUATOR TO TANK IN (MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY) TO TANK IN BRACKET TO REGULATED ENCLOSUREE BRACKET OR ENCLOSURE ACTUATOR n (MULTIPLE TANKS ONLY) TO PRESSURE 2 IN. NIPPLE SWITCH REQUIRED Q TO TANK IN REGULATED TO TANK IN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY RELEASE ASSEMBLY 0002% TO TANK IN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY SINGLE TANK DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANKS SINGLE TANK WITH DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE PRESSURE SWITCH TANKS WITH PRESSURE 'CONNECTION SWITCH CONNECTION NOTE: ALL PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 401STANDARD WEIGHT) BLACK IRON, HOT -TIPPED GALVANIZED, CHROME -PLATED, OR STAINLESS STEEL. FIGURE 7 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-4 REV. 4 10-1-02 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINE (Continued) Actuation Gas Line (Continued) 2. Run piping up through the regulated release assembly enclo- sure knockout to the inlet on top of each regulated actuator assembly used within the system. 3. The total combined length of the actuation gas line from the regulated release assembly to all regulated actuator assem- blies must not exceed 20 ft. (6 m) when using an LT-20-R nitro- gen cartridge, an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge, a 101-10 CO2 • cartridge, or a 101-20 CO2 cartridge. See Figure 8. ACTUATION GAS LINE WITH AN LT-20-R, LT-30-R, 101-20 OR 101-30 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM LENGTH - 20 FT. (6 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS - 9 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY ANSULAUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY ACTUATION AND EXPELLANT GAS LINES WITH A "DOUBLE -TANK" OR 101-30 CARTRIDGE MAXIMUM COMBINED LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m), \ MAXIMUM COMBINED FITTINGS - 9 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY ANSUL AUTOMAN REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY 4. If an expellant gas line is connected to the regulatedrelease assembly along with an actuation gas line, the total combined length of the actuation and expellant gas line must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m). See Figure 9. 5. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 900 elbows and one tee. Two 450 elbows equal one 900 elbow. REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN ACTUATION GAS LINE LENGTH TOTALS FIGURE 8 000775 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY EXPELLANT GAS LINES NOT INCLUDED IN COMBINED TOTALS REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY FIGURE 9 000298 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE (Continued) Expellant Gas Line From The Regulated Release Assembly Install expellant gas line from the regulated release assembly reg- ulator in the enclosure by completing the following steps: 1. The regulated release assembly is shipped with a -factory- installed regulator. The regulator has two 1/4 in. outlets, one at the back and one at the bottom. The bottom outlet connects the expellant gas hose to the agent tank which is mounted inside the enclosure. The back outlet is sealed with a 1/4 in. plug. 2. Connect expellant gas hose to the agent tank mounted inside the enclosure. If a pressure switch is required, a 1/4 in. x 1/8 in. reducing fitting will be required for connection between the back regulator outlet and the pressure switch. See Figure 7. DOUBLE AND MULTIPLE TANK SYSTEMS: If the expellant gas piping is required because an additional tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly is being installed, the plug installed in the back outlet must be removed. -,(See Figure 6 for proper connections to the regulator.) 3. Pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator back out- let through one of the knockouts provided in the enclosure. The total length of the expellant gas line from the regulated release assembly must not exceed 30 ft. (9 m) when .using a ► "double -tank" nitrogen cartridge or a 101730 CO2 cartridge. See Figure 10. EXPELLANT GAS LINE MAXIMUM LENGTH - 30 Fr. (9 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS - 9 REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY FIGURE 10 000776 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-5 10-1-02 REV. 4 4. If an actuation gas line is connected to the regulated release assembly along with an expellant gas line, the total combined length of the gas lines must not exceed 30 ft: (9 m) when ► using a "double -tank" nitrogen cartridge or a 101-30 CO2 car- tridge. See Figure 9. 5. A combined total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 90° elbows and one tee. Two 450 elbows equal one 900 elbow. Expellant Gas Line From.The Regulated Actuator Assembly Install expellaht gas piping from the regulated actuator assembly regulator through the appropriate knockout in the enclosure by completing the following steps: 1. The regulated actuator is shipped with a factory -installed reg- ulator. The regulator has two .1/4 in. outlets 135' from each other. One outlet is sealed by a 1/4 in. plug and the other con- tains the expellant gas hose for the agent tank which will be mounted within the enclosure. Connect expellant gas hose to the agent tank that is mounted inside the enclosure. 2. Remove the 1/4 in. pipe plug from the regulator side outlet and pipe the 1/4 in. expellant gas line from the regulator through the knockout provided in the enclosure to a tank -enclosure .or tank -bracket assembly. A maximum of one tank -.enclosure or tank -bracket assembly is allowed per regulated actuator assembly. The maximum length of the expellant gas line from the regu- lated actuator to the tank -bracket assembly must not exceed 30 ft..(9 m). See Figure 11. 3. A total of nine fittings may be used in these lines, eight 900 elbows and one tee. Two 45' elbows:equal one 90' elbow. EXPELLANT GAS LINE MAXIMUM LENGTH - 30 FT. (9 m), MAXIMUM NO. OF FITTINGS - 9 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY FIGURE 11 000777 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-6 REV. 2 10-1-02 INSTALLING THE ACTUATION AND EXPELLENT GAS LINE (Continued) Actuation Gas Line From 101 Remote Release(s) to Regulated Actuators Install actuation gas piping from the remote release(s) to the reg- ulated actuators by completing the following: 1. Pipe the 1/4 in. actuation gas line from the 1/4 in. outlet in the remote release receiver, through the knockout provided in the top of the release enclosure, to each regulated actuator assembly. The maximum length of the actuation gas line from the remote release to all regulated actuators must not exceed 100 ft. ► (30.5). See Figure 12. NOTE: Stainless steel hose and fittings ► can be used. See Component Section for detailed information. 2. A maximum of nine tees and twenty elbows are allowed in the actuation piping. Two 45' elbows equal one 90' elbow. See Figure 12. 3. A safety relief valve (Part No. 15677) must be installed in the actuation piping. See Figure 12. SAFETY RELIEF VALVE 1/4 IN. ACTUATION LINE - 100 FT (30.5 m) MAXIMUM EXPELLANT GAS LINE RM[NIN min 9 TEES 20 ELBOWS MAXIMUM MAXIMUM REMOTE RELEASE / MECHANISMS REGULATED AGENT TANK AND BRACKET OR (5 MAXIMUM) ACTUATOR AGENT TANK IN ENCLOSURE (TYP.) WITH TANK (TYR) FIGURE 12 000301 I' I i? I.' I INSTALLING THE DISTRIBUTION PIPING d� 4 Before the following procedures can be -completed; the piping design must already be determined; and the actuation and expel lant gas lines from the regulated release, each regulated actuator, and each tank -enclosure or tank -bracket assembly should already be installed. These installation instructions are identical for single, double, and multiple -tank systems except for the quantity of tanks and hazard areas to be covered. General Piping Requirements 1. Use Schedule 40 black iron, chrome -plated, or stainless steel pipe and fittings. NOTICE Do not use hot -dipped galvanized iron pipe or fittings in the agent distribution piping. 2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. 3. The distribution piping and fitting connections, located in or above the hood or the protected area, must be sealed with pipe tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise around the threads, away from the pipe opening. NOTICE Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe opening as the pipe and nozzles could become. plugged. Thread sealant or compound must not be used as it could plug the nozzles. 4. Distribution piping may be run' independently or two agent tanks; .may be manifolded together and run to the predeter- mined hazard area. Only agent tanks expelled from the same cartridge may be manifolded. NOTICE Closely follow the piping requirements for each size system, as detailed in the "System Design" section, when installing distribution piping. ► Pipe Hanger Recommended Guidelines 1. Space hangers as follows: Maximum Recommended Pipe Size Distance Between Hangers 318 in. 5 ft. (12.7 cm) 2. Hangers should be placed between elbows when the distance ► is greater than 2 ft. (0.6 m). Piping Installation 1. Starting at the tank, pipe directly from the union located on the tank adaptor. A reducing fitting may be necessary to conform to the distribution piping. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-7 10-1-02 REV.3 2.Based on the piping sketch developed in the "System Design" section of this manual, install the supply line and position the tees at points where branch lines must be installed. See figure 13. i r-------------------i -- --- ---------------El FIGURE 13 000302 3. Run all branch lines to the hazard area and connect each noz, zle. (Make certain all fittings are tight and all piping is secure- ly -bracketed. The 1 WS and 1 NS nozzles can be aimed by slipping a 3/8 in. Schedule 40 pipe over the tip, moving the tip to the correct aiming point, and then wrench tightening the retaining ring. 4. All threaded connections located in the protected area, must be sealed with pipe tape. Tape should be applied to male threads only. Make certain tape does not extend over the end i of the thread, as this could ;cause possible blockage of the t agent distribution. 5. Before installing blow -off caps on nozzles, apply a small amount of Dow Corning 'No. 111 silicone grease across the opening'in the nozzle tip and also a small amount coating the i ► exterior of the blow -off -cap. DO NOT FILL -CAP WITH ► GREASE. NOTICE When using a metal blow -off cap, make certain the spring clip rotates freely on the metal cap. P. 6. When a nozzle utilizes a metal blow -off cap, the nozzle tip must be coated with Silicone 111 grease before the ,cap is installed. The grease must be wiped across the tip and around the tip so that a rim of grease will be seen once the nozzle cap is in,place. also, apply grease to the outside of the -cap includ- ing application of the grease between the cap clips and the ► cap ► 7. Make certain a blow -off cap is in place over each nozzle tip. These blow -off caps are designed to keep grease from build- ing -up on the nozzle orifice and inhibiting the agent flow.°See Figure 14. 000303 000304 000305 FIGURE 14 SECTION V INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 . Page 5-8,, REV 2 3-1-04 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM Before the following procedures can be completed, the detection design must already be completed. These installation instructions are identical for single, double, and multiple -tank systems except for the number of hazard areas to be covered. NOTICE Inform customer that fusible links should not be exposed to ammonia -based chemical cleaners or steam. 1. Based on the requirements listed in the "System Design" sec- tion, mount the detectors in their predetermined locations. 2. Run 112 in. conduit from the regulated release mechanism trip hammer assembly knockout hole to locations selected for mounting the detectors. NOTE: Before assembling the conduit and fittings, make cer- tain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. When changing the direction of conduit, use only Ansul pulley elbows, except, at the top of the regulated release, it is accept- able to use the "Conduit Offset Assembly' (Part No. 79825). Ansul offers three styles of detector bracket assemblies. Part No. 56837 and 56838 are the "clip -on" style series and termi- nal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a "clip -on" style linkage assembly and do not require the wire rope to be threaded through the linkage assembly while it is being fed through the detection system. Part No. 15373 and 15375 are the "hinged" style series and terminal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a detector linkage assembly which requires the wire rope to be threaded through each linkage assembly while the rope is being fed through the detection system. Part No. 417368 and 417369 are the "scissor" style series and terminal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a detector linkage assembly which does not require the wire rope to be threaded through the linkage assembly while it is being fed through the detection system. Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two 112 in.. steel compression fittings on the series detector bracket or the single 1/2 in. steel compression fitting on the terminal detector bracket. See Figure 15. COMPRESSION FITTING NUT 112 IN. STEEL / COMPRESSION FITTING FIGURE 15 000306 NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- tors on the detection conduit lines as these will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the plenum area. 2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening, secure both sides of the detector bracket -with conduit, as shown in Figure 16. FIGURE 16 000307 3. Starting at the regulated release assembly, feed the wire rope through the hole in the regulated release mechanism locking clamp, allowing the excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 17. LOCKING CLAMP FIGURE 17 000309 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued) 4. From the regulated release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector brackets to the terminal detector. NOTICE If wire rope requires splicing, make certain splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid inter- ference.. 5. Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket as shown in Figure 18 or as shown in Figure 19 if the terminal detector is mounted within a duct or header opening, and install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8 cm) from the end of. the wire rope. See Figure 20. Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool. (Stock No. 51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the stop sleeve. FIGURE 18 000310 FIGURE 19 000311 2-3 1N. e, FIGURE 20 000312 SECTION V INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-9 7-1-98 REV.1 6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installation of the detector linkage, hang a vice grip or other weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- quate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device. NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 im (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for proper installation. Example: If the system has six detectors; there should be approximately 1.8 in. f46 cm) of excess wire rope between the locking clamp . and the ,weighted device, which will be utilized when the linkage is put in place. 7. Starting at the terminal detector, place the small tab of the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure 21. FIGURE 21 000313 8. With the tab positioned on thew ire rope, press and snap the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure 22. FIGURE 22 000314 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-10 REV. 1 7-1-98 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued) 9. Place the tab of the other half of the detector linkage on the opposite side of the wire rope and press the linkage until it snaps onto the rope. See Figure 23. FIGURE 23 000315 NOTICE The hook portions of the detector linkage should now face away from each other. 10. Next, rotate both halves of the detector linkage upside down, with the detector linkage groove over the wire rope. See Figure 24. FIGURE 24 000316 11. After fitting the pivot point of the two detector linkage halves together, squeeze the two halves and place the correctly rated Ansul approved fusible link over both detector hooks. See Figure 25. FIGURE 25 000317 12. Position the assembled linkage onto the detector bracket. See Figure 26. (For optimum detection, make certain the solder joint is in the down position.) BRACKET FIGURE 26� 000316 NOTICE. When positioning the linkage in the bracket, it is recommended to, locate the linkage slightly off center, toward the terminal detector side. 13. Install the linkage and,the correct Ansul approved fusible link in the remainder of the detector brackets. 14. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of the regu- lated release mechanism, with the movable. flange resting securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver and - spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the regulated release mech- anism. See Figure 27. COCKI KING PIN FIGURE 27 000319 ' INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued) 15. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise cocking pin until the trip lever indented surface moves underneath the pin and locks the pin in the "UP" position. See Figure 28. 1 � 0 8 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-11 7-1-98 REV.1 17. Make certain tension • lever is in the "UP" position. See Figure 30. IP, H� 0 TENSION LEVER IN "UP" POSITION FIGURE 30 000322 18. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, 0 is in the detector bracket, located slightly toward the terminal detector side. ' NOTICE Due to the close adjustment between the trip FIGURE 28 hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only -- -- 000320 the particular fusible link(s) selected for installa- I 16. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on tion in each .detector, including terminal detec- left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting tor, to ensure correct adjustment when perform - stud extensions,. and slide bar forward into locking position. ing Steps 19 and 20. (The regulated release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor 19. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 112 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), -pull all can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking removed.) See Figure 29. clamp. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ' ULC CEx747 Page 5-12 REV.3 7-1-98 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Clip -On" Style Linkage (Continued) 20. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is ► a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 31. (If ► clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 19 and 20.) T A IN. MINIMUM 4 mm) in. MAXIMUM 5 mm) TRIP HAMMER BASE FIGURE 31 000323 ® • Do not install cartridge at this time as an accidental actu ation could cause system discharge. 21. Test detection system in accordance with the "Testing and Placing in Service," Testing Detection System section of this manual. .22. When testing has been completed, cut off excess wire rope in the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two 1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector brack- et or the single 112 in. steel compression fitting on the terminal detector bracket. See Figure 32. COMPRESSION FITTING NUT 112 IN. STEEL / COMPRESSION FITTING FIGURE 32 000306 NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- tors on the detection conduit lines as these will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the plenum area. 2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening, secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as shown in Figure 33. 002463 002464 FIGURE 33 3. Starting at the release assembly, feed the wire rope through the hole in the release mechanism locking clamp, allowing the excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 34. LOCKING CLAMP FIGURE 34 000309 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) 4. From the release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector brackets to the terminal detector. NOTICE If wire rope requires splicing, make certain splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid interfer- ence. 5. Feed the wire rope through the terminal detector bracket as shown in Figure 35 or as shown in Figure 36 if the terminal detector is mounted within a duct or header opening, and install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8 cm) from the end of the wire rope. See Figure 37. Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool -(Stock No. 51-C-887) or equal to properly crimp the stop sleeve. FIGURE 35 000310 FIGURE 36 000311 2-3 IN. (5-8 cm) FIGURE 37 000312 6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installation of the detector linkage, hang a vice .grip or other weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- quate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-13 7-1-98 REV.1 NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for proper installation. Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) 4of excess wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device, which will be utilized when the linkage is out in place. 7. Install detector scissor assembly as shown in Figure 38. Note that the ANSUL AUTOMAN release is located on the left side of the detector bracket. Slightly crimp the two assembly "boot - hooks" over the cable with pliers so the cable is captured under each hook but the whole assembly can move from side to side. Center the assembly in the detector bracket. "ANSUL AUTOMAN" M w u FIGURE 38 000503 8. Hook the fusible link on the ANSUL AUTOMAN release side of the hook assembly, then pull the fusible link to the opposite side and complete the hookup as shown in Figures 39 and 40. The top of the hook assembly must be inside the bracket stiff- eners. The hook assembly with the fusible link in place must be located toward the terminal detector side of the bracket. FIGURE 39 000504 FIGURE 40 000324 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ' ULC CEx747 Page 5-14 REV.2 8-1-01 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) 9. ,Install the linkage and the correct Ansul approved fusible link in the remainder of the detector brackets. Make certain all detector linkages are positioned against either the front or back upper lip of the formed detector bracket. See Figure 40a. FIGURE 40a OM429 10. Insert cocking lever (Part No.14995) on left side of the release mechanism, with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver and spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the release mechanism. See Figure 41. COCKI FIGURE 42 >? 000320 12. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting stud extensions, and slide bar forward into locking position. (The release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor can enclo- sure cover be replaced until the lock bar is removed.) See Figure 43. K BAR �PERLY INSTALLED KING PIN FIGURE 43 000321 FIGURE 41 000319 11. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise cocking pin until the trip lever indented surface moves underneath the pin and locks the pin in the up position. See Figure 42. 13. Make certain tension lever is in the "UP" position. See Figure 44. TENSION LEVER IN'UP" POSITION FIGURE 44 000322 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) "Scissor" Style Linkage Installation (Continued) 14. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, is in the detector bracket, located fully toward the terminal detector side. NOTICE Due to the close adjustment between the trip hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only the particular fusible link(s) selected for installa- tion in each detector, including terminal detec- tor, to ensure correct adjustment when perform- ing Steps 15 and 16. 15. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 112 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking clamp. 16. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is ► a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a maximum of 3/8 in. I (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 45. (if ► clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16.) I Make certain the hook assembly with the fusible link in place is located toward the terminal detector side of each bracket. Failure to do so may restrict travel of detection L -f line, causing system to malfunction. I IN. MINIMUM 4 mm) Iin. MAXIMUM 5 mm) TRIP HAMMER BASE '. �CAUTIC FIGURE 45 000323 Do not install -cartridge at this time as an accidental actu- ation could cause system discharge. 17. Test detection system in accordance with the Testing and Placing in Service Section, Page 7-1 — 7-3, of this manual. 18. When testing has been -completed, cut off excess wire rope in the regulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-15 8-1-01 REV.2 Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using 112 in. steel compression fittings. Thread, the compression fitting into the detector bracket and then secure by using the Pock nut sup- plied with the fitting. See Figure 46. 1 /2 1N. STEEL COMPRESSION FITTINGS f 112 IN. COMPRESSION FITTING NUT FIGURE 46 000330 NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connec- tors on the -detection conduit lines as zinc will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the plenum area. 2. Starting at the regulated release assembly, feed wire -rope up through hole in regulated release mechanism locking clamp, allowing excess wire rope to hang down. (Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time.) See Figure 47. LOCKING CLAMP FIGURE 47 000309 3. From the regulated release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley -elbows and to the first detector. 4. Before continuing on -past the detector bracket, feed the wire rope through the detector linkage assembly."See Figure 48. 5. Continue running the wire rope through the conduit and pulley elbows and feed it through each detector linkage assembly at each additional bracket. 6. At the terminal detector, feed wire rope through the terminal detector clamping device. Allow 2-3 in. f5-8 cm).of wire rope to extend beyond the-clamping.device and wrench tighten the set screws. See Figure 48. 2-3 1N. (5-8 cm) RGURE 48 000332 7. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during positioning of the -detector linkage(s), hang a vise grip or other weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an ade- quate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS . UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-16 REV. 1 7-1-98 INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage (Continued) NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for proper installation. Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device, which will be utilized when the linkage is put in place. 8. Starting at the terminal detector, squeeze the linkage togeth- er and place the correctly rated Ansul approved fusible link over both detector hooks. For optimum detection, make cer- tain the solder joint is in the down position. Locate the linkage in the center of the detector bracket. See Figure 49. FIGURE 49 000333 9. Proceed to install the remainder of the Ansul approved fusible links on the detector hooks and position the linkage in the cen- ter of each bracket. 10. Insert cocking lever (Part No. 14995) on left side of regulated release mechanism with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of cartridge receiver and spring housing, with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the regulated release. See Figure 50. KING PIN FIGURE 50 000319 11. With a downward motion of .the cocking lever, raise the cock- ing pin until trip hammer indented surface moves underneath the pin. See Figure 51. FIGURE 51 000320 12. Remove the cocking lever and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985) on left side of cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting stud extensions, and slide the bar forward into the locking position. (The regulated release mechanism cannot be actu- ated, nor can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is removed.) See Figure 52. NSTALLED FIGURE 52 000321 i INSTALLING THE DETECTION SYSTEM (Continued) Installing "Hinged" Style Linkage (Continued) 13. Make certain tension lever is in the "UP" position. See Figure 53. TENSION LEVER IN "UP" POSITION FIGURE 53 000322 14. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, is approximately centered in the detector bracket. NOTICE Due to the close adjustment between the trip hammer and cable lever. assemblies, use only the particular fusible link(s) selected for the installation in each detector, including the termi- nal detector, to ensure correct adjustment when performing Steps 15 and 16. 15. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in..(9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all, slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screw on locking clamp. 16. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position and inspect the base of wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm). and a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5mm) clearance between the base of trip hammer assem- bly and cable lever assembly. See Figure 54. (If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16.) SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-17 3-1-04 REV.2 IN. MINIMUM l mm) in. MAXIMUM i mm) TRIP HAMMER BASE FIGURE 54 000323 CAUTIC Do not installcartridge or do not remove lock bar at this time as an accidental actuation could cause system dis- charge. 17. Test detection system in accordance with the "Testing and Placing in Service," Testing Detection System section of this manual. 18. When all testing has been completed in the "Testing and Placing in Service" section, cut off excess wire rope in the reg- ulated release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 ..cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. ® • Make certain tension lever is in the "DOWN" position after completing all tests. Failure to put the tension Lever in the "DOWN" position will cause the system to not operate properly. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 , ULC CEx747 Page 5-18 REV. 4 10-1-02 INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION To install a remote manual pull station complete the following steps: 1: Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within the regu- lated release mechanism. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release assembly and that the regulated release assembly is, in the cocked position. If regulated release assembly does not have lock bar inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following installation steps. 3. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and location of pull station should be determined in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull sta- tion within a system must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per each manual pull station is 20 of Part No. 423250 or 415670. A maximum of two (2) manual pull stations can be connected to each AUTOMAN Release. 4. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) junction box to wall or in wall where pull station is to be mounted, with mounting screws positioned so that when pull station cover is positioned in place, the printing will appear right side up and readable. ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION: a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing on back of each cover assembly. See Figure 54a. b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at selected loca- tion so that printing is right side up and readable. WALL PULLEY ELBOW r �JF BELL SHORT PIECE REDUCINGOF CONDUIT PULL COUPLING STATION (MOUNT TO WALL) FIGURE 54a 002465 5. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if required), and pulley elbows from each pull station to regulated release assembly as necessary. See Figure 55 or 56. See Figure 56a for optional methods of installing wire rope when utilizing a pulley tee, Part No. 427929. REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION SINGLE APPLICATION WIRE ROPE Z .1 OVAL SLEEVE CABLE LEVER PULLEY ELBOW RELEASE MECHANISM REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION BREAK ROD LOCK BAR p ` PULL SIDE 8. STUD JUNCTION BOX (NOT RING HANDLE SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) FIGURE 55 001090 REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION DUAL APPLICATION PULLEY TEE PULLEY ELBOW /OVAL f SLEEVE RELEASE IMECHANISM CABLE LEVER -� LOCK �L\ BAR 1 \'� JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL) WLL 1 000305 REMOTE / MANUAL PULL STATION 006527 E CAN D IN 'ION RELEASE MECHANISM FIGURE 56 L r INSTALLING REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION (Continued) PULLEY TEE, PART NO. 427929 ONLY No ELBOWS ALLOWED IN THIS AREA OVAL SLEEVE, PART NO. 4596 CONNECT TO AIR CYLINDER FOR GAS 004909 VALVES AND CONNECT TO RELEASE TRIP LEVER FOR PULL STATIONS CONTINUOUS WIRE ROPE OF) OVAL SLEEVE, PART NO. 4596 m� (2) OVAL SLEEVES, r PART NO.4596 NO ELBOWS ALLOWEDF CONNECTTO WHERE TWOWIREm) ♦—AIR ROPES ARE PRESENT CYLINDER FOR GAS SCONTINUOUS WIRE VALVES AND RROPE 4PULLEY CONNECTTO RELEASE TRIP LEVER FOR PULLEY TEE, PART PULL NO.427929 ONLY STATIONS EITHER BOTH MUST BE GAS ALVES OR BOTH MUST BE PULL STATIONS. MIXING IS NOT ALLOWED. 00a910 FIGURE 56a 6. Feed wire rope from each pull station through conduit and each pulley elbow to cable lever located at regulated release assembly. NOTICE Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley sheave. If the 50 ft..(15 m) wire rope has been spliced to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within 6 in, (152 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. 7.. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if junction box is used). 8. Slide oval crimp sleeve onto wire rope. Loop wire rope through cable lever guide holes and back through the oval crimp sleeve. See Figure 55. 9. Pull slack out of each wire rope and crimp sleeve: (Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool Stock No. 51-C-.887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) See Figure 55. SECTION V - INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-19 . 10-1-02 REV.4 INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE NOTICE Mechanical gas valves'are designed for indoor installation only. To install each Mechanical Gas Shut-off Valve complete the fol- lowing steps. (All gas valve installation and testing shall be made in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction.) NOTE: Mechanical gas valve air cylinder(s) can be installed in reg-. ulated release assemblies and also regulated actuator assemblies. Installation in either is the same. 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted in the regulated release mechanism. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the cocked position. If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar insert- ed or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual Mainten- ance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps and 3 before completing the following instal- lation steps. 3. Remove plug from cartridge receiver. See Figure 57. CARTRIDGE RECEIVER PLUG FIGURE 57 000339 4. Locate air cylinder and bracket assembly over the two 7/32 in. (.6 cm) holes on right side of the enclosure. Assemble with screws, lockwashers, and nuts. Wrench tighten. See Figure 58. Air cylinder(s) can also be mounted in the inverted posi- tion, allowing for direct exit out the knockouts) in the bottom of the enclosure. See figure 59. FOR MOUNTING ONE MECHANICAL GAS VALVE WIRE ROPE / STOP SLEEVE MOUNTING BRACKET AIR CYLItDER 11 ROD ` I 1/8 IN. COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS FIGURE 58 000W SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-20 REV.2 8-1-01 INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) TOP KNOCKOUTS O MECHANICAL GAS VALVE AIR CYLINDER BOTTOM KNOCKOUTS 02 REGULATED LEASE ' FIGURE 59 000341 ,-NOTE: Two air cylinders are necessary only if the old style pulley tee, Part No. 15342, is utilized. If new style pulley tee, Part No. 427929, is utilized, only one air cylinder is required. Individual wire ropes can be run from each gas valve to a sin- gle air cylinder, See Figure 60. 5. To install second mechanical gas valve shut-off system, locate second air cylinder and bracket assembly adjacent to first assembly and over the two remaining 7/32 in. (.6 cm) holes provided on right side of the enclosure. Assemble second cylinder with screws, lockwashers, and . nuts as required. P. Wrench tighten. See Figure 60. WIRE ROPE STOP SLEEVES ' (SYSTEMS USING AIR CYLINDER PULLEY TEE, RODS ► PART NO.15342) CT MOUNTING BRACKETS LJ 000342 1/8 IN. COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS (SYSTEMS USING ' PULLEY TEE, PART NO. STOP 427929) / SLEEVES \ (2) NOTE: NO ELBOWS ARE ALLOWED \ / BETWEEN AUTOMAN AND PULLEY TEE M rY 004655 FIGURE 60 ► 000342 �r INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued). 6. Install the necessary 1/8 in. copper tubing and fittings for each air cylinder to the accessories piping arrangement on the reg- ulated release mechanism. See Figures 58 and 60. NOTICE j f Do not kink 1 /8 in. copper tubing or form a bend - too close to a fitting. Secure each fitting without over tightening. Over tightening could result in pressure leakage or line separation at actuation. 7. • To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting the gas valve. Install mechanical gas valve to its selected location in gas line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined appliances being protected upon actuation of the system. Mechanical gas ,- valves may be mounted in any convenient horizontal or verti- ► Cal position. See Figure 61. I a. Use new pipe, properly reamed and cleaned of metal chips. _ b. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow shown on gas valve. To avoid cracking the gas valve cast- ing, do not overtighten pipe connections. If pipe tape, paste, spray, or similar lubricant is used, extra care should be taken to avoid overtightening. Apply lubricant to male threads only. c. Wrench tighten pipe to gas valve. DO NOT. USE GAS VALVE AS A LEVER WHEN INSTALLING OR VALVE ► DAMAGE MAY OCCUR. See Figure 61. d. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer.ahead of gas valve. e. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction. f. The total length of wire rope allowed for each valve must not exceed 150 ft. (46 m). g. The maximum number of pulley elbows allowed for each gas valve is 20. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL'EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-21 8-1-01 REV.2 ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVES CORRECT WAY: VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. 000343 CORRECT WAY: WRENCH APPLIED NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. 0003" ASCO MECHANICAL'GAS VALVES CORRECT WAY: . VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. i WRONG WAY: WRENCH APPLIED AT THIS POINT STRAINS VALVE BODY. T WAY: APPLIED NEXT 3EING INSERTED FS EXCESS )N VALVE BODY. WRONG WAY: WRENCH APPLIED AT THIS POINT STRAINS VALVE BODY. 0. FIGURE 61 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ' ULC CEx747 Page 5-22 REV.3 3-1-04 INSTALLING MECHANICAL GAS VALVE (Continued) 8. Install 1/2 in. conduit, and pulley elbow(s) from the mechanical gas valve to regulated release assembly enclosure as neces- sary. 9. Beginning at the regulated release assembly, thread the end of the wire rope through hole provided in air cylinder rod. See Figure 58. 10. Feed end of wire rope through conduit and each pulley elbow. Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley sheave. If the 50 ft. (15 m) wire rope has been spliced to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within 12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. 11. Remove side cover on gas valve and thread end of wire rope through hole in cocking lever. Slide stop sleeve (Part No. 26317) on to wire rope and crimp. (Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) Make cer- tain crimp is on top of trigger, with wire rope curled under lever. See Figure 62. 3E ROPE TRIGGER FIGURE 62 000347 12. With the end of wire rope already threaded through hole in air cylinder rod, slide stop sleeve (Part No. 26317) onto wire rope and leave loose. Do not crimp stop sleeve at this time. See Figure 58. 1,13. Cock mechanical gas valve as shown in Figure 63. Note A ► valve cocking tool is available. Order Part No. 416018. ANSUL MECHANICAL GAS VALVE COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION ASCO MECHANICAL GAS VALVE I COCKED OPEN POSITION FIRED CLOSED POSITION - FIGURE 63 - 14. Raise air cylinder rod "UP" to its maximum extended position. See Figure 58. 15. Manually pull wire rope to remove excess slack. NOTICE DO NOT ACTUATE THE MECHANICAL GAS - - VALVE. Each Mechanical Gas Valve System must have gas valve cocked and air cylinder rod extended "UP" to its maximum extension before completing next step. 16. Slide stop sleeve against air cylinder; rod, make certain all slack is removed from wire, and crimp stop sleeve. See Figure 58. 17. Cut off any excess wire rope approximately 3/4 in. (2 cm) from end of stop sleeve. 18. NOTE: If utilizing a pulley tee to operate a single mechanical gas valve from two (2) ANSUL AUTOMAN releases, see Figure 64 for installation instructions. Maximum length of wire rope to each ANSUL AUTOMAN release must not exceed 150 ft. (45.7 m) and maxi- mum number of elbows must not exceed 20. I TO "ANSUL AUTOMAN"TIPAIRT RELEASE NO.2TO 'ANSUL MAN" RELEASE NO.16 IN. (152 mm) MINIMLEY ELBOWS FROM CRIMP SLEEVED WHERE TWO TO PULLEY TEEOPES ARE PRESENT2 O (51 IM MINIMTWO FROM CRIMP SLEEEEVES,TO COMPRESSIONO.4596 f FITTING FIGURE 64 001091 1 I i INSTALLING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES NOTICE Electric gas valves are designed for indoor installation only. The following instructions and schematics illustrate methods of procedures for installing 110 VAC Electric Gas Shut-off Valves. 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within the regu- lated release mechanism. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the cocked position. If regulated release mechanism does not have lock bar insert- ed or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual Mainten- ance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following instal- lation steps. 3. ® ON To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, make certain that the gas line is turned off before connecting the gas valve. Install each electric gas valve to its selected location in gas line so that it ensures safe shut-off to all predetermined appli- ances being protected upon actuation of the system. Refer to ► manufacturer's instructions (if provided). See Figure 65. a. Use new pipe properly reamed and clean of metal chips. b. Install valve so that the actuator is above the horizontal pipe line with no more than a five degree (Y).lean either way. c. Make certain gas flow is in the same direction as arrow shown on gas valve. d. If strainer is utilized, attach strainer ahead of gas valve. e. If necessary, install drip leg in gas line in accordance with . authority having jurisdiction. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-23 8-1-01 REV.3 CORRECT WAY: VISE GRIP ENDS NEXT TO PIPE BEING INSERTED. PREVENTS EXCESS STRAIN ON VALVE BODY. 001092 CORRECT WA WRENCH APP BEING INSERT EXCESS STRF AY: 4PPLIED AT T STRAINS W. FIGURE 65 4. Install and secure 112 in. conduit from each electric gas valve to manual reset relay enclosure. 5. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each electric gas valve. Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. Refer to Figures in "Design" sec- tion for typical wiring diagrams. 6. Before working on any electrical wiring, make certain main power has been disconnected. Failure to disconnect main power could cause personal injury or death if,contact is made with energized wires. Connect electrical wiring to manual reset relay along with any contactor, or contractor supplied devices needed. Refer to manufacturer's instructions and proper figure listed for assis- tance. 7. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- dance with authority having jurisdiction. 8. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit from the regulated release assembly enclosure to manual reset relay enclosure. If snap -action switches have not been attached, go to "Electric ► Switch" section and install them at this time by completing Steps 3 through 8. 9. Tag and connect electrical wiring to each.electric (snap -action) switch. Then, feed wire through conduit to manual reset relay. 10. Connect wiring from each electric (snap -action) switch to manual reset relay terminals. Refer to manufacturer's instruc- tions (if provided) and proper figure for assistance. 11. Tape -or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- dance with authority having jurisdiction. 1.2. Properly return -electrical power to the system. SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 - ULC CEx747 Page 5-24 REV.4 3-1-04 INSTALLING ELECTRICAL SWITCHES The procedure for field installing an electric (snap -action) switch is as follows: ® ON. Unused wire leads will become "hof when the system is oper- ated. Failure to adequately cover exposed wire end(s) will cause electric shock if touched. 1. Make certain that regulated release assembly enclosure cover is detached with lock bar properly inserted within the regulat- ed release mechanism. NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from regulated release assembly and that the regulated release mechanism is in the cocked position. If regulated release mechanism . does not have lock bar inserted or cartridge removed, refer to the "Semi -Annual Maintenance," Page 8-1, in "Maintenance Examination" section, and complete Steps 2 and 3 before completing the following installation steps. If regulated release mechanism has a factory installed sole- noid, it will also have a factory installed switch. 3. Press each wire assembly onto the 3-terminals located on the switch(s). Be sure that the connector is pressed tight against the switch. See Figure 66. BLACK SNAP -ACTION SWITCH r COMMON RED J �— _ BLACK O N.O. �i- BROWN -- BROWN -- N.C. J \ PRESS CONNECTOR TIGHTLY AGAINST SWITCH \ NOTE: SWITCH SHOWN IN NORMAL POSITION ACTUATING ARM FIGURE 66 001621 4. Install switch(es) to the mounting bracket using provided fas- teners and tighten securely. 5. If more than one switch is being installed, it is necessary to attach the trip lever extension stud to the trip lever. See Figure 67. Using the provided fasteners, securely install the extension stud. 6. Raise switch actuating arm squarely over the cam surface of the trip lever. This will allow the trip lever, when actuated, to force the actuating arm "UP," thus reversing the normal condi- tion of the switch. See Figure 67. For multiple switch installations, make certain switch actuating arms are positioned on trip lever extension stud. Before proceeding with Step 7, test electric (snap -action) switches: a. Remove lock bar. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the cocked or ready position, press the lever of each switch up. If the switch is working properly there should be an audible click. b. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press the lever of each switch up, there should be no audible click. When installing multiple switches, make certain all ,switch- es transfer when the release operates. If they do not, read- just their position. c. If an audible click is heard in the fired position several adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin can be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is pointed up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that position. If this doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the screws holding the switches, apply a small counterclockwise torque on the switches and retighten the screws. If necessary, a final adjustment can be made by removing the snap action switch and bending the lever slightly. d. After adjustments repeat steps a and b. Then, recock ANSUL AUTOMAN and install lock bar. ACTUATING ARM m ® , MOUNTING HOLE FOR TRIP LEVER EXTENSION 001624 031,4101 5E main TT FT FIF 7 TRIP LEVER EXTENSION STUD 002298 FIGURE 67 ► 7. The switch may now be connected to compatible components that are predetermined to shut off or turn on. Refer to compo- nent manufacturer's instructions for proper wiring connections to compatible components. ► 8. Tape or place a wire nut on any unused wire leads in accor- dance with authority having jurisdiction. NOTICE Do not connect power source to any relay, con- tactor, or contractor supplied devices until all other electrical connections are made. Refer to proper section or manufacturer supplied instruc- tions for rpcommended installation procedures for these devices. ► 9. Turn off power source and connect power line to any relay, contactor, or contractor supplied devices where used. INSTALLING ALARM INITIATING SWITCH The Alarm Initiating Switch Kit, Part No. 428311, consists of: • Alarm Initiating Switch Assembly — Rated 50 mA 28VDC • Spacer • Mounting Screw with Nut (2) • Extension Pin • Extension Pin Nut • Instruction Sheet The Alarm Initiating Switch is mounted in the ANSULAUTOMAN Release on the. same mounting plate where the current snap - action switches are mounted. If the alarm initiating switch is used alone, the enclosed extension pin and pin nut are not needed.. When mounting the switch, the spacer must be installed first, between the ANSUL AUTOMAN mounting plate (or existing switches) and the alarm initiating switch. See NFPA 72, "National Fire Alarm Code," Initiating Devices section, for the correct method of wiring connection to the fire alarm panel. After the switch is properly mounted, follow the steps listed in the installation section of the Design, Installation, Recharge, and Maintenance Manual for correct positioning of the switch lever on the ANSUL AUTOMAN cam surface. SPACER TOWWHEN SPACER AND AUTOARD MAN SWITCH ARE PROPERLY . MOUNTED, THIS DIVIDER MUST BE BETWEEN THE N.O. AND N.C. TERMINALS COM N.O. ALARM INITIATING SWITCH N.C. 0. FIGURE 68 ' 004890 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-25 3-1-04 REV. 4 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL FIRE ALARM END -OF -LINE RESISTOR CONTROL PANEL ------------ INITIATING CIRCUIT i 004891 ALARM INITIATING SWITCH INCORRECT II 11 II It I T 004905 IN OUT CORRECT - SEPARATE INCOMING AND OUTGOING CONDUCTORS FIGURE 69 SECTION V — INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 5-26 REV.4 3-1-04 WIRING 24 VDC REGULATED RELEASE ASSEMBLY (ULC APPROVED ONLY) Refer to the following notes and wiring diagram for instruction on wiring the 24 VDC regulated release assembly. Notes: 1. To be connected to a nominal 12 VDC or 24 VDC releasing cir- cuit. Input power: 450 mA at 12 VDC or 750 mA at 24 VDC. Solenoid on time: Approximately 50 milliseconds. 2. Polarization: Observe polarity when connected to a release circuit; Terminal 4 positive, Terminal 8 negative. 3. All interconnecting wiring must be 18 AWG minimum. 4. S1 contact rating: 15A, 1/3 HP, 125 or 250 VAC resistive; 1/2A, 125 VDC; 1 /4A, 250 VDC; 5A, 120 VAC inductive. 5. SOLD coil resistance: 28 OHMS +/- 10% at 77 OF (25 °C). 6. Install the in -line supervisory device SD, across terminals No. 4 and No. 5. Refer to the releasing panel installation instruc- tions for supervisory device requirements. If an in -line super- visory device is not required, install jumper J2 across terminals No. 4 and No. 5. THESE SWITCH CONTACTS TRANSFER UPON ,j ACTUATION OF RELEASE /, I HIGH TB, J I iY 2 s, NC I LOW S �� c+) 4 c.) UL LISTED' OR So NC SUPERVISED RELEASING---- G I /. CONTROL UNIT (-) J, IN -LINE 7 / SUPERVISORY DEVICE TZ, / c—) 8 SOL, VOLTAGE I I TRANSIENT SUPPRESSOR L J AUXILIARY ALARMING DEVICES, SEE S, RATINGS FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE, BLOWER MOTOR, DOOR CLOSER, ETC., SEE S, RATINGS. FIGURE 70 002300 7.. After the system has been completely installed, and BEFORE INSTALLING THE CARTRIDGE, the system must be tested at the regulated release assembly. TESTING MANUAL PULL STATION To test each remote manual pull station, complete the following steps: 1. With the expellant gas cartridge removed, remove lock bar from regulated release assembly cable lever. 2. On metal stamped pull station, remove glass break rod from pull station by removing set screw on side of stud and slide glass break rod out. On molded plastic pull station, seal will be broken during test and must,be replaced. 3. Pull ring handle on pull station. If the regulated release assem- bly is tripped easily, the remote manual pull station is properly installed. If the regulated release assembly does not trip, remove pulley tee (if provided) and each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on the pulley sheave. If this does not cor- rect the problem, there is too much slack in the line and it must . be retightened: 4.. Cut off any excess wire rope 3/4 in. (2 cm) above oval sleeve. 5. Recock regulated release assembly using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985) 6. On metal stamped pull station, slide glass break rod through stud and ring handle. Tighten set screw into stud. On molded plastic pull station, replace seal. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed ► to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. TESTING MECHANICAL GAS VALVES To test each mechanical gas shut-off valve complete the following steps: ► 1.. To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas. Turn gas line on. 2. Manually push each air cylinder rod to full "DOWN" position. The gas valve should close. If mechanical gas valve does not trip, remove each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on each pulley elbow sheave. If this does not correct the problem there may be too much slack in the line and it should be retightened. 3. Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu- tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections where leaks appear and repeat test again to make certain no .other gas leaks exist. 4. If no gas leak is found, pull air cylinder rod to full "UP" position. 5. Recock mechanical gas valve. SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6-1 3-1-04 REV. 2 6. Check burners for gaseous. odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, MANUALLY RUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO THE FULL "DOWN' POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any further. 7. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited -at this time. 8. Reinstall side covers to gas valve housing. Make certain roll pin is positioned within both sides of the valve housing slot. Connect visual inspection seals .(Part No. 197) on Ansul type valves. See Figure 1. 'ECTION NO. 197) FIGURE 1 OOM59 9. Make certain the regulated release mechanism is -cocked with lock bar in place. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed to Page'6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ' ULC CEx747 Page 6-2 REV.2 3-1-04 TESTING ELECTRICAL GAS VALVES TESTING ELECTRIC SWITCH To test each Electric Gas Shut-off Valve complete the following The procedure for testing a field installed Electric (Snap -Action) steps: Switch is as follows: 1 To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechanical devices that are capable of igniting gas. Turn gas line on. 2. Make certain electric (snap -action) switch is properly wired. 3. Make certain all other devices connected to the manual reset relay are properly wired. Refer to typical wiring diagrams in ► Figures 106, 107, and 108 in Design" section. 4. Test for gas leaks by painting connections with a soap solu- tion. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Tighten connections where leaks appear. Repeat test again to make certain no other gas leaks exist. 5. If no gas leaks are found, turn power source on and depress the reset button on the manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON) to energize (OPEN) electric gas valve. 6. Remove lock bar from regulated release mechanism. CAUTI • F not install cartridge at this time or system may be uated. 7. Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull sta- tion. (It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod prior to operating pull station.) Manual reset relay (RED LIGHT OUT) will de -energize (CLOSE) the electric gas valve, thus shutting off the gas line. If this does not happen, turn power source off. Then re-examine all wiring connections for proper ► hookup. Refer to Figures 106, 107, and 108 in "Design" sec- tion for typical wiring diagram. 8. If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism. using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985). Depress reset button on manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON). 9. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any further. 10. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed ► to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. NOTICE If an electrical gas shut-off valve is attached to system, perform proper test procedure for the. gas valve first, before completing the following steps. 1. Turn power source on and if installed, depress reset button on manual reset relay (RED LIGHT ON). All electrical devices should be operating at this time. 2. Remove lock bar. ®CAUTION Do not install cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. 3. Manually actuate the system by operating the remote pull sta- tion. It may be necessary to remove the glass break rod prior to operating pull station. (If installed, the manual reset relay will de -energize the electric gas valve; thus shutting off the gas line.) All electrically -operated devices predetermined to shut off or turn on should do so. If this does not occur, turn power source off and make sure all wiring is properly connected and ► retest. Refer to Figures 106, 107, and 108 in "Design" section for typical wiring diagram. 4. If test is successful, recock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and reinstall lock bar (Part No. 14985). If a manual reset relay,is installed, depress the reset button (RED LIGHT ON). It will also be necessary to re -light any pilot lights on the cooking appliances. NOTICE If no other devices are being attached, proceed ► to Page 6-3, Step No. 1, and test the detection system. TESTING DETECTION SYSTEM 1. Test detection system by completing the following steps: a. Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the "UP" position. b. Remove the fusible link from the terminal detector and install a test link (Part No. 15751). See Figure 2. O TEST LINK FIGURE 2 000363 c. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket. For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly toward termination end of detection run. For°scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the way toward termination end of detection run. d. Lower regulated release mechanism tension lever to "DOWN" position and remove lock bar. e. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. f. If system actuates successfully, go to Step 4. 2. If the regulated release mechanism does not actuate, check the following components and remedy any disorder as follows: a. Check the detector linkage for correct positioning. b. Check the wire rope for knotting or jamming. c. Check pulley elbows to see that wire rope is free and cen- tered in pulley sheaves. If any evidence of pulley elbow deformation is found, replace the pulley elbow. d. Make certain that lock bar is removed. e. Make certain that regulated release mechanism is cocked. f. Make certain that tension lever is in "DOWN" position. 3. Re -test the system by completing the following steps: a. Make certain regulated release is cocked and lock bar is inserted. b. Raise the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the "UP" position. c. Install a new test link (Part No. 15751) on the terminal detector. d. Lower the regulated release mechanism tension lever to the "DOWN" position. e. Check for 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maxi- mum clearance between the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. f. Remove the lock bar. g. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 U.LC CEx747 Page 6-3 10-1-02 REV.2 4. Upon successful actuation of the system, complete the follow- ing steps: a. Raise tension lever to "UP" position and install a properly - rated fusible link in the terminal detector. b. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985). c. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. d. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket. For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly toward termination end of detection run. For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the way toward termination end of detection run. e. Make certain the 1/4 in.. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance was maintained between the base of the trip hammer assemblyand the cable lever assembly. NOTICE Reset any electrical equipment that may have been affected by the system actuation. f. Install appropriate cartridge into the regulated release mechanism receiver and each regulated. actuator receiver. Hand tighten firmly. g. Remove the lock bar. h. Install cover on regulated release assembly and each reg- ulated actuator assembly and secure with appropriate fas- teners or visual inspection seal. -Insert seal (Part No. 197) in each upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If system is install in an OEM enclosure, attach enclosure cover and secure with appropriate hardware or procedure. i. Record installation date on tag attached to unit and/or in a permanent file. SECTION VI — TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 6-4 REV. 2 10-1-02 NOTES: - ►The recharge information listed in this section deals with the limi- j , tations and parameters of this pre engineered system. Those indi viduals responsible for the recharge of the R-102 system must be trained and hold_ a current Ansul certificate in an R-102 training ► program. For continued_ fire protection, the R-102 restaurant fire sup- pression system must be recharged immediately after use. Recharge procedures for single, double, and multiple -tank sys- tems are as follows. CLEANUP PROCEDURES Although there is no unusual cleanup procedure of ANSULEX or ANSULEX Low pH agents, due, to the alkaline nature of these agents, they should be cleaned from kitchen surfaces within 24 hours after system discharge. The reaction from the wet chemical agent on cooking grease or oil produces a foamy bi-product that can be wiped up with a cloth or sponge. The following procedures should be followed: Before attempting any cleanup, make certain that all fuel sources to the equipment to be. cleaned have been shut off. Make certain that the exhaust hood and all appliance electrical controls have been de -energized to avoid any chance of elec- trical shock resulting from the cleaning process or from electri- cally conductive alkaline liquid agent and/or its residue. Make certain all surfaces to be cleaned have cooled down to room temperature. Do not use water to clean any appliances that contain hot grease or cooking oils. Doing so may result in violent steaming and/or spattering. 1. The agent is non -toxic; however, food product and cooking. grease/oil that has come in contact with the agent will no longer be suitable for human consumption and should be dis- carded. 2. Sponge up as much of the agent as possible using sponges or clean rags. Dispose of these sponges or rags in a local san- itary land fill site in accordance to local authorities. Note: Wear rubber gloves during cleanup as sensitive skin may become irritated. If the ANSULEX agent or its residue comes in contact with skin or eyes, flush thoroughly with clean water. 3. Using hot, soapy water and either a clean cloth or sponge, wipe away all foamy residue and thoroughly scrub all surfaces that have come in contact with the agent. Note: Wear rubber gloves during cleanup as sensitive skin may become irritated. If the ANSULEX agent or its residue comes in contact with skin or eyes, flush thoroughly with clean water. 4. After thoroughly cleaning all affected surfaces, adequately rinse and allow to completely dry before re -energizing the equipment. SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES ► UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7-1 7-1-98 REV.1 RECHARGE NOTICE Determine the cause of system discharge and correct immediately before performing system recharge. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly 2. From tank in regulated release enclosure: Disconnect the expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. From tank in mounting bracket or mounting enclosure: Disconnect expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line(s). 3. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor out- let line(s). 4. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage bracket band,.and remove each tank. 5. Remove each tank, adaptor/tube assembly and complete the following: a. Remove O-ring and inspect for damage. b. Clean and coat O-ring with a good grade of extreme tem- perature grease and reinstall into adaptor groove. "See Figure 1. c. Remove 1 /4, in. vent -plug. d. Clean and inspect for free movement and corrosion. Replace if necessary. e. Reinstall vent plug into.adaptor body. FIGURE 1 000364 6. ® CAUTION Do not flush pipe with only water or other non -approved material, as this could cause internal corrosion, leading to possible improper discharge. Piping system must be flushed to remove any wet chemical residue. To prepare the system for flushing: ► a. Pour the complete contents of one 32-oz. bottle of Ansul Flushing Concentrate (Part No. 79656) into an empty R-102 agent tank. One complete bottle is used for either size tank, the 1.5 gallon or the 3.0 gallon. b. Fill the tank approximately half full with warm, clean water. Agitate the tank for a few seconds and then add more warm water to bring the fill .level to within approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm) from the bottom of the fill .opening. 11 SECTION VII — RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7-2 REV.5 3-1-04 RECHARGE (Continued) _ c. Install adaptor/tube assembly and tighten. 7. To perform the flushing procedure, either secure heavy-duty plastic bags to each nozzle (See Figure 2) or remove each nozzle tip and strainer and attach plastic tubing. See Figure 3. If using plastic bags, secure bags and proceed to Step 9. If using plastic tubing, proceed to Step 8. VENT HOLES NOZZI FITTIN HEAVY GAUGE PLASTIC BAG FIGURE 2 001739 NOZZLE TIP AND RETAINER �- NOZZLE BODY HIGH PRESSURE PLASTIC TUBING 1/2 IN. NPT COMPRESSION FITTING/THREADED ADAPTOR LJ FIGURE 3 001740 8. If using the plastic tubing option, utilize 112 in. (1.3 cm) O.D. plastic tubing with wall thickness not to exceed .062 in. 0.6 mm), and make certain it can withstand the pressures of at least 90 PSI (620.6 kPa) expelled during the flushing and blowdown procedures. Also required is a container with some means of securing tub- ing to it such as a five -gallon plastic pail and cover that snaps onto the pail. I To prepare the plastic tubing: a. Cut as many tubing lengths as required, making them long enough to reach the container from each nozzle outlet. b. Using a 1 N nozzle tip and retainer, (Part No. 56930), slide a length of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) plastic tubing over the rib on the nozzle tip and secure with a 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) adjustable hose clamp. See Figure 4. This nozzle tip will be connected to the nozzle body left installed in the distribution piping. c. In the pail cover, drill the number of holes required, large enough to, insert 1/2 in. NPT fittings, with one additional hole that can be used for venting. d. Secure 1/2 in. compression fitting/threaded adaptors to the pail cover, using 1/2 in. conduit nuts. See Figure 4. 1 N NOZZLE TIP RIB ON NOZZLE AND RETAINER (PART NO. 56930) 1/21N.TUBING,-► 1/2 IN. ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP TUBING - 1/2 IN. COMPRESSION INSERT FITTING/THREADED �- - ADAPTOR 1/2 IN. CONDUIT NUTS PAIL COVER FIGURE 4 000367 e. Attach the tubing ends to the compression fittings. Tubing inserts will be required. See Figure 4. f. Install nozzle/tubing ends to nozzle bodies in discharge piping. g. Make certain each length of tubing is fastened to the pail cover with the cover snapped securely to the pail. 9. Complete the following steps in the flushing procedure: ► a. Connect discharge piping and expellant gas line to agent tank adaptor. b. Cock ANSUL AUTOMAN Release Mechanism and insert lock bar. c. Install LT-30-R Cartridge; hand tighten. d. Remove lock bar. e. if regulated actuators are included in the system, also install LT-30-R cartridges in them. f. Actuate system via pull station. g. Wash out all system nozzles and strainers in warm soapy water, rinse and return all nozzles and strainers to their appropriate locations in the discharge piping. h. Remove empty tank. RECHARGE (Continued) 10. Fill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Supptessant. NOTE: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any foreign material from entering the tank. See Page 5-2.1, Figure 6, for detailed filling instructions. During filling, the agent temperature should be'60 OF to 80 OF (16 °C to 27 °C). DO NOT FILL WITH COLD AGENT. DO NOT OVERFILL. Overfilling may result in agent entering gas hose and regulator potentially causing system malfunction. 11. Replace bursting disc, Part No. 416974, in adaptor assembly. Make certain silver side of disc is away from tank. 12. Replace adaptor/tube assembly and tighten into place. Return and secure each tank in regulated release assembly and mounting bracket/enclosure. Reconnect expellant gas and dis- tribution piping as required. 13. Raise tension lever to,"UP" position. 14. Cock regulated release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and install lock bar (Part No. 14985). 15. Remove empty cartridge from regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly as required. ® 0 Do not install replacement cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. 16. Install properly -rated fusible links in all detectors except the terminal detector. NOTICE If actuation was caused by a fire situation, all fusible links must be replaced. 17. Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector. 18. Lower tension lever to "DOWN' position. 19. Remove the lock bar. 20. Using wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. NOTICE If regulated release mechanism does not actu ate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of the "Testing Detection System" portion of the "Testing and ► Placing In Service" section, Page 6-3, of this manual. 21. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP" position. 22. Install properly -rated,. Ansul approved, fusible link in terminal detector. 23. Cock the regulated release mechanism and install lock bar (Part No.14985). 24. Locate detector linkage and correctly position in each bracket. 25. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. SECTION VII - RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 7-3 3-1-04 REV 4 26. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain there. is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. NOTICE If -clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" position, raise trip hammer 3/8- 1/2 in. (9.5-12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps 25 and 26. 27. Remove lock bar. 28. Manually test the regulated release mechanism by operating the remote manual pull station. 29. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock bar. 30. Reset all devices which were affected by the system actua- tion. Refer to "Resetting" section, Page 7-3 and 7-4. RESETTING Resetting Remote Manual Pull Station Metal Stamped Style Reset each remote manual pull station bycompleting the following steps: 1. If necessary, remove set screw that is retaining the break glass rod. 2. If necessary, carefully remove any remaining broken glass from station. 3. Press and position ring handle in proper location against cover and slide the replacement glass break rod (Part No. 4834) through stud and handle. 4. Tighten set screw into stud. 5. If no other resetting is required, refer .to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page 7-4, and complete steps 1 through 5. Molded Plastic Style 1. Position pull ring in vertical groove of pull station cover. 2. Insert break -away seal, Part. No. 79029, through holes in cover and snap in place. SECTION V11 — RECHARGE AND RESETTING PROCEDURES ► UL EX: 3470 ' ULC CEx747 Page 7-4 REV.2 7-1-98 RESETTING (Continued) Resetting Mechanical Gas Shut -Off Valve Reset each mechanical gas shut-off valve by completing the fol- lowing steps: To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open flames and turn off all burners and any electrical or mechani- cal devices that are capable of igniting gas. 1. Remove side cover from gas valve housing. 2. Extend air cylinder rod to full "UP" position. Air cylinder is located inside the regulated release assembly enclosure. 3. Recock gas valve by pulling valve stem up so pin in stem engages in cocking lever. 4. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, MANUALLY PUSH THE AIR CYLINDER ROD TO THE FULL "DOWN' POSITION IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the mechanical gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any fur- ther. 5. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. 6. Reinstall side cover to gas valve housing. On Ansul type valve, make certain roll pin is positioned within both sides of the valve housing slot and secure visual inspection seal (Part No. 197). 7. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replacement," Page 7-4, and complete steps 1 through 5. Resetting Electrical Switch (Snap -Action) Reset the electric (snap -action) switch by completing the following steps: 1. Make certain the power source is on. 2. Electric (snap -action) switch is reset automatically when the. regulated release mechanism is recocked. 3. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5. Resetting Electrical Gas Shut -Off Valve Reset each electric gas shut-off valve by completing the following steps: To reduce the risk of explosion due to leaking gas, before the gas line is turned on, make certain to extinguish any open ? flames and turn offall burners and any electrical or mechani- cal devices that are capable of igniting gas. 1. Make certain the power source is on. 2. Depress reset button on manual reset relay (red light on). Gas valve will resume its normal operating (open) position. 3. Check burners for gaseous odor. IF GASEOUS ODOR EXISTS, TURN OFF POWER SOURCE IMMEDIATELY. This will cause the electric gas valve to shut the gas line off. Open any doors and/or windows to clear the area of gaseous fumes, then correct the gas leak before proceeding any further. 4. If no gaseous odor exists, pilot light may be ignited at this time. 5. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5. Resetting Pressure Switch Reset the pressure switch by completing the following: 1. Depress the reset button(s) on the pressure switch cover. The pressure switch assembly(ies) is located on the right side of the regulated release enclosure. An 'audible click will be heard to verify the pressure switch has resumed its normal (non - actuated) condition. 2. If no other resetting is required, refer to "Cartridge Replace- ment," Page 7-5, and complete steps 1 through 5. REPLACEMENT CARTRIDGE To complete the recharge and resetting procedures: 1. Remove shipping cap and weigh replacement cartridge. Replace if weight is 112 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. 2. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed. Then, install replacement cartridge into the regulated release assembly, and each regulated actuator receiver and hand tighten. 3. Remove lock bar. 4. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actuator assembly, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) in upper and lower cover hole and secure. 5. Record recharge date on tag attached to unit and/or in a per- manent file. The maintenance information listed in this section deals with the limitations and parameters of this pre-engineered system. Those individuals responsible for the maintenance of the R-102 system must be trained and hold a current Ansul certificate in an R-102 training program. Maintenance is required semi-annually. At the 12 year interval, along with the normal maintenance exam, the tank(s) must be hydro -tested and the regulator(s) must be flow tested. ► Prior to performing the required maintenance steps, verify that the design of the system protects all of the original hazards when first installed. Make certain no additional hazards (appliances) have ► been added. SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION Semi-annual maintenance procedures for single, double, and mul- tiple -tank systems are as follows. NOTICE Under certain circumstances hood and duct cleaning operations may render the fire sup- pression system. ineffective due to a coating of cleaning chemical left on the detection equip- ment or mishandling of the system by cleaning service personnel. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that the R-102 system be completely inspected and serviced by an authorized Ansul distributor immediately following any such cleaning operations. 1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly. 2. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated release mechanism. See Figure 1. FIGURE 1 000321 3. Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping cap, and set aside in a safe location. 4. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for. elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat gas- ket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s). 5. From tank in regulated release assembly: Disconnect the expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. From tank in bracket/enclosure assembly: Disconnect the expellant gas piping union at each tank adaptor inlet line. 6. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor r out- let line. SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-1 3-1-04 REV.7 7. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. Keep in upright position to avoid spilling the agent. From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright position to avoid spilling the agent. 8. Remove tank adaptor/tube assembly 'from each tank. See Figure 2. FIGURE 2 000291 9. Make certain that each tank is filled with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 {11.6 L) gallons of only ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. See Figure 3. See Page 5-2.1, Figure 6, for detailed filling tolerances. 10. Examine threads on each tank adaptor and tank ,collar for nicks, burrs, or cross -threading. Clean and coat O-ring with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. See -Figure 3. Remove 1/4 in. vent plug and clean and inspect for free move- ment and corrosion (replace if necessary). Reinstall vent plug. Make certain .bursting disc is in place and silver side is away from tank. Clean seating surface and return adaptor/tube assembly to each tank. Tighten securely. SILVER SIDE OF DISC AWAY FROM TANK O-RING FIGURE 3 000364 11. Place fully charged tanks in enclosures and/or brackets and secure. 12. Carefully assemble and wrench tighten all expellant gas and agent distribution piping. 13. Remove blow -off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow -.off cap and replace if deteriorated. On metal blow -off caps, make cer- tain spring clip rotates freely on -cap. NOTICE Rubber blow -off caps that have been installed in the system for one year or more must be replaced. SECTION Vill - MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-2 REV. 2 10-1-02 SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 14. Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking grease build-up and have a covering of clean silicone grease on the orifice. Reinstall blow -off caps. 15. Remove the lock bar and manually test the regulated release assembly by operating the remote manual pull station. Check pull station cover for damage or wear. Replace cover if cable has worn a groove in the cover as deep as the diameter of the cable. 16. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever ► (Part No. 14995). See Figure 4. Before proceeding with Step 18, test electric (snap -action) switches: a. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the cocked or ready posi- tion, press the lever of each switch up. if the switch is work- ing properly, there should be an audible click. b. With the ANSUL AUTOMAN in the fired position, press the lever of each switch up, there should be no audible click. c. If an audible click is heard in the fired position several adjustments can be made. The trip lever extension pin can be rotated so the peak of one of the hex points is pointed up against the switch levers. Tighten it in that position. If this doesn't resolve the problem, loosen the screws holding the switches, apply a small counterclockwise torque on the switches and retighten the screws. If necessary, a final adjustment can be made by removing the snap action switch and bending the lever slightly. d. After adjustments, repeat Steps a, and b. Then, recock ANSUL AUTOMAN and insert lock bar. FIGURE 4 000320 ► 17. Raise tension lever to "UP" position. See Figure 5. TENSION LEVER IN "UP" POSITION FIGURE 5 000322 18. Install test link (Part No. 15751) in terminal detector. 19. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. See Figure 6. TENSION LEVER IN "DOWN" POSITION ► FIGURE 6 0010% 20. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. NOTICE If regulated release mechanism does not actu- ate, refer to Steps 2 and 3 of "Testing Detection System" in "Testing and Placing in Service," Section 6, Page 6-3. 21. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP" posi- tion. 22. Clean and return properly -rated, Ansul approved, fusible link to terminal detector. NOTICE Fusible links installed in system for one year or more must be replaced. Ansul recommends replacement of links every six months. SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 23. Remove, clean, and return additional fusible links to series detector linkage(s). (Fusible links loaded with grease and other extraneous material can result in excessive delays in actuation.) 24. Inspect wire rope at all detector locations, pulley elbows, pul- ley tee and at ANSUL AUTOMAN release. If wire rope shows signs of wear or fraying, replace entire length. 25. Lower the tension lever to "DOWN" position. 26. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert the lock bar. 27. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a max- imum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 7. TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY E 1/4 IN. (6.4 mm) MINIMUM 3/8 IN. (9.5 mm) MAXIMUM TRIP HAMMER BASE FIGURE 7 000329 NOTICE If clearance is not between 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" posi- tion, raise trip hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5- 12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps 24 and 26. 28. Locate detector linkage and properly position in each bracket. For "clip on" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket slightly toward termination end of detection run. For "scissor" style linkage, locate linkage in bracket all the way toward termination end of detection run. SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-3 3 1 04 REV. 4 29. If a mechanical gas valve is installed, begin the test procedure by removing both side covers. 30. At the regulated release, push the air cylinder rod fully down. 31. The gas valve should operate. 32. Pull the air cylinder rod to its fully extended position. 33. Re -cock the gas valve by pulling the valve stem up until the pin in the stem engages the cocking lever. 34. Reinstall side covers on the gas valve and connect the visual indication seal. 35. Test pressure switch by completing Steps No. 1 through No. 9 on Page 6-3 in Section 6 —"Testing and Placing In Service" 36. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment by referring to appropriate section of "Recharge and Resetting Procedures," Section 7. 37. Remove shipping cap and weigh each cartridge. Replace if weight is 112 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. 38. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into regulat ed release mechanism and each regulated actuator receiv- er(s) and hand tighten. 39. Remove lock bar. . ® 6AUTION Make certain tension lever is in the "DOWN" position after completing all tests. Failure to put the tension lever in the "DOWN" position will cause the system to not operate ► properly. 40. Snap cover on regulated release and each regulated actuator, insert visual seal (Part No. 197) through holes in cover and box, and secure. 41. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag attached to unit and/or in a permanent file. } SECTION Vill — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-4 REV. 4 10-1-02 0 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION Twelve-year maintenance procedures for single, double, and multiple -tank systems are as follows. NOTICE Under certain circumstances hood and duct cleaning operations may render your fire sup- pression system ineffective due to a coating of cleaning chemical left on the detection equip- ment or mishandling of the system by cleaning service personnel. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that the R-102 system be completely inspected and serviced by an authorized Ansul distrib- utor immediately following any such clean- ing operations. At twelve-year intervals, the liquid agent tank(s) must be hydrostatically tested and refilled with a fresh charge of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. The date of manufacture is stamped on the bottom of the agent tank. 1. Remove the enclosure cover from the ANSUL AUTOMAN regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly. 2. Insert the lock bar (Part No. 14985) on the cocked regulated release mechanism. See Figure 8. LOCK BAR PROPERLY INSTALLED FIGURE 8. 000321 3. Remove cartridge from regulated release assembly and each regulated actuator assembly, install safety shipping cap, and set aside in a safe location. CAUTION F onot reinstall cartridge at this time or system may be ctuated. 4. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in regulated release mechanism and each regulated actuator. Check gasket for elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat gas- ket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver(s). 5. From tank in enclosure: Disconnect the expellant gas hose from each tank adaptor assembly. From tank in bracket assembly: Disconnect expellant gas pip- ing union at each tank adaptor inlet line. 6. Disconnect distribution piping union at each tank adaptor out- let line. 7. From tank in enclosure: Remove tank. From tank in bracket assembly: Loosen wingnut, disengage bracket band, and remove each tank. Keep tank in upright position to avoid spilling the agent. 8. Loosen tank adaptor/tube assembly and remove. 9. Safety glasses should be worn during transfer operations of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. Avoid con- tact with skin or eyes. In case of contact, flush immediate- ly with water for 15 minutes. If irritation persists, contact a physician. Do not take internally. If taken internally do not induce vomiting. Dilute with water or milk and contact a physician. Pour the liquid agent from the tank into a clean, plastic con- tainer. and flush tank with clear water. 10. At this point, each liquid agent tank, including the 1/4 in. gas hose assembly, must be HYDROSTATICALLY TESTED to ► 330 psi -(2275 kPa). Refer to "Hydrastatic Test Instructions," ► F-7602, for test adaptors and instructions. Verify date stamped on cartridge. The cartridge must be hydrotested at intervals not greater than 12 years. If cartridge date indicates the need for hydrotesting, the cartridge must be bled down through nor- mal ANSUL AUTOMAN release operation, returned to Ansul for credit, and replaced with a charged, replacement cartridge. NOTICE Cartridge bleed down can, be used to verity pneumatic accessories operation. 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 11. The regulator must be flow tested at 12 year intervals. Check the date code stamped on the regulator body to determine if the regulator(s) requires the 12 year testing (see data code table). If regulator does not require testing, proceed to step 12. Flow test the regulator(s) per the. following: Date Code Table Month — Code Year — Code January A 1981 K February B 1982 L March C 1983 M April D 1984 N May E 1985 P June F 1986 R July G 1987 S August H 1988 T September J 1989 U October K 1990 V November L 1991 W December M 1992 Y 1993 Z 1994 A 1995 B 1996 C 1997 D 1998 E 1999 F 2000 G 2001 H a. Regulated Release Mechanism For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from tank. Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to hose. See Figure 9. I - SECTION Vlll — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-5 10-1-02 REV.3 For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at union. Remove union from expellant gas piping and install pipe cap to prevent cartridge pressure from escaping during test. See Figure 10.. FIGURE 10 W0370 Pressure Switch: if pressure switch is provided, it should remain connected as part of system maintenance test. NOTICE For multiple -tank systems, one test kit (Part No. 56972) is required for each regulator in the system. b. Regulated Actuator For First Tank: Disconnect expellant gas hose from tank. Connect regulator test kit (Part No. 56972) to hose. See Figure 11. FIGURE 11 . 000371 SECTION Vlll — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-6 REV. 4 10-1-02 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) For Second Tank: Disconnect expellant gas piping at union. Remove union from expellant gas piping and install pipe cap to prevent cartridge pressure from escaping during ► test. See Figure 12. I- 0 0. E FIGURE 12 000372 NOTICE Make certain valve is closed on regulator test kit or pressure will escape before test can be performed. c. Install either a nitrogen or CO2 cartridge into release mechanism and each regulated actuator provided with the system. (Cartridge should be conditioned to approximately 70 OF (21 °C) before test.) NOTICE Before continuing with Step d, make certain valve on test kit is closed. d. Remove lock bar and operate remote manual pull station to actuate the.regulated release and supply pressure to each test kit. Two styles of regulators are used with the R-102 release mechanisms. The diaphragm style (see Figure 13) was used in R-102 systems up to approximately 1988. The pis- ton style (see Figure 13) has been used since 1988. Each style requires a slightly different flow test procedure. Use the appropriate flow test procedure as stated in Step e. DIAPHRAGM STYLE PISTON STYLE (USED UNTIL 1988) (USED AFTER 1988) FIGURE 13 002301 e. Flow test each regulator by completing the following steps: Diaphragm Style — The correct pressure should read 90 to 110 psi (6.2 to 7.6 bar) with the valve on the test kit closed and 80 psi (5.5 bar) with the valve on the test kit opened. Keep the valve .opened to completely empty the pressure cartridge after pressure test has been verified. Piston Style - Open the valve on the regulator test kit. The correct pressure should read between 95 to 125 psi (6.6 to 8.6 bar). Keep the valve open to completely empty the pres- sure cartridge. If necessary, continue to flow test at each additional regu- lated actuator. Test each regulated actuator by repeating Step e. f. Cock release mechanism using cocking lever (Part No. 14995) and insert lock bar (Part No. 14985). g. Remove empty nitrogen cartridge(s) from release mecha- nism and each regulated actuator. h. Remove test kit(s) from release mechanism and each reg- ulated actuator. i. If regulator test was not successful, replace regulator. j. Reconnect all expellant gas lines. k. Reset all additional equipment that was operated by release mechanism. 12. Examine threads on each adaptor and tank collar for nicks, burrs, or cross -threading. Clean and coat O-ring with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Make certain bursting disc is in place and silver side is away from tank. See Figure 14. FIGURE 14 WONA SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-7 10-1-02 REV.3 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) ► 19. Raise the tension lever to "UP" position. See Figure 16. 13. Refill each tank with 1.5 (5.8 L) or 3.0 (11.6 L) gallons of only new ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant. NOTE: Use a funnel with a screen to stop any foreign material from enter- ing the tank. See Page 5-2.1, Figure 6, for detailed filling tol- erances. 14. Clean seating surface and return each adaptor/tube assembly to tank. Firmly tighten. NOTICE Do not reinstall any tank at this time. 15. Remove blow -off caps from nozzles. Inspect each blow -off cap and replace if deteriorated. On metal blow -off caps, make cer- tain spring clip rotates freely on cap. NOTICE Rubber blow -off caps that have been installed in the system for one year or more must be replaced TENSION LEVER IN "UP" POSITION 16. Check all nozzles to ensure that they are free of cooking ' FIGURE 16 000362 grease build-up and have a covering of clean silicone grease on the orifice. Reinstall blow -off caps. 20. Install test link (Part No.15751) in terminal detector. 17. Remove lock bar and manually test the regulated release ' 21. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. See Figure 17 assembly by operating the remote manual pull station. 18. Cock the regulated release mechanism using cocking lever ► (Part No. 14995). See Figure 15. TENSION LEVER IN "DOWN" POSITION 1�1 ► FIGURE 17 001096 22. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. NOTICE If regulated release mechanism does not actuate, refer to Steps2 and 3 of "Testing Detection System" in "Testing and Placing in Service," Section 6. FIGURE 15 .23. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to "UP" 000320 position. 24. Clean and return -properly-rated, Ansul approved, fusible link to terminal detector. NOTICE Fusible links 'installed in system for .one year or more must be replaced. 25. Remove, clean, and return additional fusible links to series detector linkage(s). (Fusible links loaded with grease and other extraneous material can result in excessive delays in actuation.) SECTION VIII — MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 8-8 REV. 1 10-1-02 12-YEAR MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) ► 37. Install cover on regulated release assembly and each regulat- 26. Lower tension lever to "DOWN" position. ed actuator assembly and secure with appropriate fasteners or visual inspection seal. Insert seal (Part No. 197) in each 27. Recock the regulated release mechanism and insert lock bar. upper and lower cover hole, if applicable. If system is installed 28. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make in an OEM enclosure, attach enclosure cover and secure with certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) and a max- appropriate hardware or procedure. imum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the ► 38. Record date of 12 year maintenance examination on tag trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See attached to enclosure and/or in a permanent file. ► Figure 18. TRIP HAMMER I ASSEMBLY f- -� 114 IN. (6.4 mm) MINIMUM -7 3/8 IN. (9.5 mm) I MAXIMUM TRIP HAMMER BASE FIGURE 18 000329 NOTICE If clearance is not between 1 /4 in. (6.4 mm) or 3/8 in. (9.5 mm), raise tension lever to "UP" position, raise trip hammer 3/8-1/2 in. (9.5- 12.7 mm), tighten set screws, and repeat Steps 26 and 28. 29. Locate detector linkage and properly position in each bracket. 30. Make certain additional devices have operated as intended. 31. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment by referring to appropriate section of "Recharge and Resetting Procedures," Section 7. 32. Place each fully charged tank in enclosure and/or bracket and secure. 33. Reconnect all distribution piping and expellant gas piping unions as required. Wrench tighten. 34. Check each gas cartridge by removing shipping cap and weighing cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. 35. Make certain regulated release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed, then screw replacement cartridge into regulat- ed release mechanism and each regulated actuator receiv- er(s) and hand tighten. 36. Remove lock bar. r .. SECTION IX - APPENDIX ° UL EX. 3470 ULCCEx747 Page 9-3 10-1-02 REV. 5 --= SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued) ► Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen. Flow No.* Quantity System Type of Hardware Cartridge Reauired Cartridge Required 78-82 8 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) LT-307R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 78-82 8 Multiple Remote Mechanical. Release 101-10 (423439) - - _ (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443) LT-A-1.01-30 -(423491) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101.-30 (423443)*** LT-A=1-01-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) i 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 83-88 8 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) LT-30-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank I' (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 83-88 8 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) i 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)** LTA-101-30 (423491) - 3.0'Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*"* LTA-101-30 (423491) t 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 10 Gal. Reg. Actuator ' 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 89-99 9 Multiple Remote Mech. Release 101-10 (423439) N/A (3) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (3) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (3) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 89-93 9 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- • (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101=30 (423443)*** LTA-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LTA-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 1-01-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) 94-99 9 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LTA-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LTA-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0-Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101 -30(423443)*** LT-A-1.01-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. " If tanks are manifolded, only a "double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. I I ► "` If tanks are manifolded, either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. i ° I SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-6 REV. 4 10-1-02 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) Part No. Description 419346 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1N) Includes: 25 1N Nozzles (Part No. 419335) 25 Blow -Off Caps 430913 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1100) Includes: 25 1100 Nozzles (Part No. 430912) 25 Blow -Off Caps 419349 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (3N) Includes: 9 3N Nozzles (Part No. 419338) ► 9 Blow -Off Caps 419348 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2W) Includes: 25 2W Nozzles (Part No. 419337) 25 Blow -Off Caps 419350 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (230) Includes: 25 230 Nozzles (Part No. 419339) 25 Blow -Off Caps 419351 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (245) Includes: 25 245 Nozzles (Part No. 419340) 25 Blow -Off Caps 419352 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (260) Includes: 9 260 Nozzles (Part No. 419341) 9 Blow -Off Caps 418353 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (290) Includes: 9 290 Nozzles (Part No. 419342) 9 Blow -Off Caps 419354 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (2120) Includes: 9 2120 Nozzles (Part No. 419343) 9 Blow -Off Caps 419344 Nozzle Shipping Assembly (1 F) Includes: 9 1 F Nozzles (Part No. 419333) 9 Blow -Off Caps 423572 Swivel Adaptor Shipping Assembly Includes: 25 Swivel Adaptors (Part No. 418569) 77695 Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly (Spare) Includes: 50 Blow -Off Caps 79745 Metal Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly Includes: 10 Blow -Off Caps For Standard Non -Swivel Nozzles 415568 Metal Blow -Off Cap Shipping Assembly Includes: 10 Blow -Off Caps for Swivel Nozzles ► 551265 Nozzle Aiming Device 56837 Series Detector Package ("Clip -On") 56838 Terminal Detector Package ("Clip -On") Includes: Test Link 15373 Series Detector Package ("Hinged") 15375 Terminal Detector Package ("Hinged") Includes: Test Link 417369 Series Detector Package ("Scissor") Part No. Description 417368 Terminal Detector Package ("Scissor") Includes: Test Link 415671 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly (Socket End) — to 700 OF (371 °C) Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 415670) 423251 Pulley Elbows Shipping Assembly (Compression End) — to 700 OF (371 °C) Includes: 50 Elbows (Part No. 423250) ► 427929 Pulley Tee 15821 Wire Rope (50 Feet (15 m)) 79653 Wire Rope (500 Feet (152 m)) 24919 Stop Sleeve Package. Includes: 10 Stop Sleeves (Part No. 26317) 24918 Oval Sleeve Package Includes: 10 Oval Sleeves (Part No. 4596) 78196 1/4 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals"(Part No. 78195) 77285 3/8 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part, No. 77284) 77287 1/2 in: "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 77286) 77289 3/4 in. "Quik-Seal" Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Quik-Seals" (Part No. 77288) 79149 1/4 in. "Compression -Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No. 79148) 79151 . 3/8 in. "Compression -Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No. 79150) 79147 1/2 in. "Compression -Seal" Pipe Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No. 79146) 79153 112 in. "Compression -Seal" EMT Conduit Adaptor Package Includes: 24 "Compression -Seals" (Part No. 791.52) 423253 Hood Seal Adaptor Shipping Assembly Includes: 6 Hood Seals 13707 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Solenoid Valve — 3/4 in. 13708 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Solenoid Valve — 1 in. 13709 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Solenoid Valve — 1 1/2 in. 13710 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve — 2 in. } .' -- SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) Part No. Description 17643 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz) Includes: Fluid Power Gas Valve — 3 in. 14702 Gas Shut-off Equipment (Electrical 110 VAC, 60 Hz). _ Includes: Relay— Manual Reset - 423878 One Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: Electric Switch (SPDT), Mounting Hardware -_ 423879 Two Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: 2 Electric Switches (SPDT), i Mounting Hardware _. 423880 Three Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: 3 Electric Switches (SPDT), Mounting Hardware _ 423881 Four Electric Switch (Field Mounted) Kit Includes: 4 Electric Switches (SPDT), Mounting Hardware ► 428311 Alarm Initiating Switch. Kit 4 55598 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve - 3/4 in. 55601 Gas Shut=off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 1 in. 55604 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) ,s Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 1 1/4 in. ' 55607 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) ' Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 1 1/2 in. 55610 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (Ansul) Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 2 in. 25937 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO) !� Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 2 1/2 in. 25938 Gas Shut-off Equipment Mechanical (ASCO) _1 Includes: Mechanical Gas Valve — 3 in. "-' 15733 Gas Shut-off Equipment Includes: Air Cylinder and Tube Assembly 4835 Remote Manual Pull Station — Metal Stamped ' Includes: Remote Manual Pull Station Assembly 50 ft. (15 m) of Wire Rope 24915 Break Rod Package ' Includes: 10 Glass Break Rods (Part No. 4834) (Replacement) ►427074 Trim Rings (Pack of 10) 31809 16 in. (41 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose i 32335 20 in. (51 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose 'r 32336 24 in..(61 cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose 1-430815 42 in. -(107.cm) Stainless Steel Actuation Hose 423429 Recharge Equipment Includes: LT720-R Cartridge SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC'CEx747 Page 9-6.1 10-1-02 REV.3 Part No. Description 423435 Recharge Equipment Includes: LT-30-R Cartridge 423493 `Recharge Equipment Includes: Double System Cartridge 423491 Recharge Equipment Includes: LT-A-101-30 Cartridge 423439 Recharge Equipment Includes: 101-10 ,C.artridge 423441 Recharge Equipment Includes: 101-20 Cartridge 423443 Recharge Equipment Includes: 101-30 Cartridge 79372 Recharge Equipment Includes: 3:O Gallon (11.4 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid Fire Suppressant 79694 Recharge Equipment Includes: 1.5'Gallon (5.7 L) Container of ANSULEX Low pH Liquid'Fire Suppressant 417911 Recharge Equipment Includes: Package of 10 Tank Adaptor Bursting Discs 77695 Recharge Equipment Includes: 50 Blow -Off Caps 24916 Recharge Equipment Includes: 10 Test Links (Part No. 15751) 415739 Recharge Equipment Includes: Fusible Link 165 OF (74 °C) 415740 Recharge Equipment Includes: Fusible Link.212 °F (100 °C) 415744 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 fusible Links 280 OF (138 °C) (Part No. 415741) 415745 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 Fusible Links 360 of (182 °C) (Part No. 415742) 415746 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 Fusible Links 450 OF {232 °C) (Part No. 415743) 73867 Recharge Equipment Includes: 25 Fusible Links 500 OF (260 °C) (Part No. 5681-6) SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-6.2 REV. 2 10-1-02 SYSTEM COMPONENT INDEX (Continued) Part No. Description 79651 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket —"Clip -On" 53771 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Linkage —"Clip-On" 79651 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket —"Scissor" 415817 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Linkage —"Scissor' 15344 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket —"Hinged" 15343 Recharge Equipment Includes: Detector Bracket Linkage —"Hinged" 14985 Recharge Equipment Includes: Lock Bar 14995 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever 26310 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever for ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C 15618 Recharge Equipment Includes: Cocking Lever and Lock Bar Assembly 15240 Recharge Equipment Includes: 500 °F (260 °C) Exhaust Duct Thermometer 197 Recharge Equipment Includes: Lead and Wire Seal 418087 Recharge Equipment Includes: Installation Manual No. Description — Regulated Release Shipping Assembly - 1 Mounting Box ' 2 Basic Release w/Regulator Basic Release w/Solenoid, Switch, and Regulator 3 Self -Tapping Screw, -- 4 Spacer 5 Tension Spring 6 Lever and Bracket Assembly ► 7 Machine Screw 8 Lockwasher 9 Hex Nut 10 Caution Label 11 Gasket 12 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly ► LT-30-R/101-20 (Ordered Separately) ► Double Tank/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 13 Safety Shipping Cap 14 Tank Assembly 1.5/3.0 Gal. (Ordered Separately) 15 Hose Assembly ► 16 Enclosure Cover (Includes Label ► 17 Solenoid Assembly 18 Electric Snap -Action Switch 19 Cover Screw 20 Speed Nut i iI I, j i SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-7 10-1-02 REV.3 5 7 Mechanical Electrical Part No. Part No. 429853 429856 419293 419293 79140 - - 79288 71342 71342 76555 76555 79094 79094 79300 79300 14973 14973 7310 7310 14732 14732 57652 57652 181 181 423435/423441 423435/423441 423493/423443 423443/423443 77251 77251 429864/429862 429864/429862 79007 - 79007 423744 423744 — 423575 — 423878 15362 15362. 423479 423479 SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-8 REV. 3 10-1-02 REGULATED ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY 10 (ORDERED SFPARATFLY) 12 Figure No. Description — Regulated Actuator Assembly 1 Mounting Box 2 Pneumatic Actuator Assembly Including Regulator 3 Hex Jam Nut A Hole Adaptor (2) 5 Lockwasher 6 Gasket 7 Expellant Gas Cartridge Assembly ► LT-20-R/101-10 (Ordered Separately) LT-30-R/101-20 (Ordered Separately) Double Tank/1 0 1 -30 (Ordered Separately) ► LT-A-1 01 -30/101-30 (Ordered Separately) 8 Safety Shipping Cap ► 9 Label 10 Tank Assembly 1.5/3.0 Gal. (Ordered Separately) 11 Hose Assembly ► 12 Enclosure Cover (Without Labels) 13 Cover Screw 14 Speed Nut T 3 5� ✓4 V 9 ; �.J 2 I i s ° 8 e 11 000374 13, 14 ° Part No. 429850 419293 79340. 67990 _ 423277 69521 181 423429/423439 423435/423441 423493/423443 423491 /423443 17251 426953 429864/429862 79007 419294 15362 423479 I I ,- I' F' ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY A I i I, ' Ia ' 2 -► � C Figure No. Description - Enclosure Shipping Assembly 1 Enclosure 2 Cover ' 3 Nameplate 4 Screw 5 Speed Nut I j 5 SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-9 8-1-01 'REV.3 Part No. 429870 419296 419296 429871 15362 423479 r--- - ---- -- -- - - ---- - - -- - -- - - SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-10 REV. 3 10-1-02 BRACKET ASSEMBLY 4 ► Figure No. Description Bracket Shipping Assembly 1 Bracket Assembly 2 Grommet 3 Grommet ►4 Wing Nut 000376 1 3.0Gallon Part No. 429878 14089 8688 12065 '. Figure ,No. Description Tank Assembly a 1 Tank Adaptor Shipping Assembly - 2 Pickup Tube Assembly 3 Vent Plug Assembly ' 4 O-Ring 5 Union .Nut 6 Union Tail Piece 7 Burst Disc 8 Shell .9 Nameplate 000375 1.5 Gallon Part No. 429864 430096 429883 74247 56909 417705 417706 418974 429861 N/A SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-10.1 3-1-04 REV.2 3.0 Gallon Part No. 429862 79522 417700 74247 56909 417705 417706 418974 429860 N/A SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-10.2 REV.1 10-1-02 REMOTE RELEASE 13 Figure 2 19 (ORDERED SEPARATELY) 12 4 17 006528 No. Description Part No — Remote Release 32381 1 Mounting Box 15954 2 Cover 17441 3 Ring Pin Assembly 15368 4 Pop Rivet 15053 5 Spring 79094 6 Speed Nut 12042 7 Machine Screw 14973 8 Hex Nut 14732 9 Lockwasher 7310 10 101 Release 15443 11 Spacer 14970 12 Screw 15834 13 Machine Screw 15362 14 Tension Lever and Bracket Assembly 15956 15 Bushing 14972 16 Cap Screw 79280 17 Angle Bracket 15396 18 Gasket 181 19 101 Cartridge (TC/DOT) 423439 (DOT) 15850 SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-1 10-1-02 REV.5 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE NOTE: System options do not cover all conceivable variations. They are listed here as a general guideline to show the most common type arrangement for multiple systems, Based on certain system designs utilizing manifolding, non-manifolding, 3-tank systems, etc., other tank/cartridge combinations can be designed. The combinations below are based on 11 flow, .3.0 gallon tanks and 5 flow, 1.5 gallon tanks. More competitive designs may be available by utilizing 12 flow and .6 flow. systems when appropriate. ' Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No.* Quantjjy. System Type of Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required 1-5 1 Single 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429) 6-11 1 Single 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) 12-16 2 Double 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double(423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 17-22 2 Double 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 23-33 3 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 23-27 3 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 •(423439) LT--20-R (423429) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 28-33 3 Multiple 3.0.Gal. Reg. Release N/A Double .(423493) (Optional) (2) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tanks 34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423435) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30 {423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 34-38 4 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double •(423493) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 1,01-30 (423443)*** LT-A401-30.(423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) 3.0 gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-1,01-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 39-44 4 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double•(423493) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 45-49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A LTA-101-30 (423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 45-49 5 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank ' Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. " If tanks are manifolded, only a "double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493)can be used. - - "' It tanks are manifolded, either an LT-A-101-30 nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. SECTION IX - APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ' ULC CEx747 Page 9-2 REV. 5 10-1-02 SYSTEM SELECTION GUIDE (Continued) ►Total Tank Type of Carbon Dioxide Nitrogen Flow No.* Quantity System lype of Hardware Cartridge Required Cartridge Required 50-55 5 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank .3.0 Reg. Actuator N/A LT-A-101-30'(423491) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 50-55 5 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 56-60 6 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443) Double. (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30-(423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 61-66 6 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-30 (423443)** Double (423493) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)**" LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)**" LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 67-71 7 Multiple 1.5 Gal. Reg. Release 101-10 (423439) LT-20-R (423429) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 67-71 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -'- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443) LT-A-101-30 (423491) 1.5 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441)*** LT-30-R (423435) 72-77 7 Multiple 3.0 Gal. Reg. Release 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) (2) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator N/A (2) LT-A-101-30 (423491) (2) Double 3.0 Gal. Tank Box 72-77 7 Multiple Remote Mechanical Release 101-10 (423439) -- (Optional) 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)**" LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)*** LT-A-101-30 {423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-30 (423443)**'' LT-A-101-30 (423491) 3.0 Gal. Additional Tank 3.0 Gal. Reg. Actuator 101-20 (423441) LT-30-R (423435) ` Based on 5 flow numbers for a 1.5 gal. system and 11 flow numbers for a 3.0 gal. system. " If tanks are manfolded, only a "double tank" nitrogen cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. "* If tanks are manifolded, either an LT-A-101-3o nitrogen cartridge (Part No- 423491) or a double tank cartridge (Part No. 423493) can be used. -- Multiple Nozzle Fryer Protection Calculation Examples Example No.1 — Donut Fryer Without Dripboard. This fryer has a frypot that measures 26 in. in depth x 28 in. in length (66 x 71 cm). Because the frypot exceeds the maximum dimensions for one nozzle, multiple nozzles will be required. Procedure: Find the area of the fryer by multiplying the 26 in. depth x the 28 in. length (66 x 71 cm) which equals 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm). Using the 3N nozzle (approved for fryers with the longest side of 25 3/8 in. (64 cm) and a maximum of 370.5 sq. in. (2390 sq. cm) in area), divide the total area of 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm) by 370.5 sq. in. (2390 sq. cm) to find the number of nozzles needed. 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm) divided by 370.5 sq. in. (2390 sq. cm) per nozzle = 2 nozzles required. Then verity the maximum longest side dimension of 25 3/8 in. (64 cm). Doing this will require doubling the 3N nozzles to = a total of 4 nozzles, if we are to protect the 26 in. (66 cm) depth and the 28 in. (71 cm) length of the fryer with this 3N nozzle option. See Figure 1. Using the same process, but utilizing the 3N nozzle approved for fryer protection with the longest side of 27 5/8 in. (70 cm) and the maximum of 324 sq. in. (2090 sq. cm) in area, the calculation will change to 728 sq. in. (4697 sq. cm) divided by 324 sq. in. (2090 sq. cm) per nozzle = 3 nozzles. Because this 3N. nozzle option will protect 27 5/8 in. (70 cm) on the. longest side, it will protect the 26 in. (66 cm) side in.. this example, thus eliminating the need for extra noz- zles. Utilizing this option, in this example, will require a total of 9 flows, but allows less nozzles and less nozzle drops*. See Figured. *Note: 2-flow appliance nozzles can also be used. This option requires a total of 4 nozzles (728 sq. in. divided by 210 sq. in. per nozzle = 4 nozzles, or 8 total flows). Using this option .requires that the noz- zles be placed over each quadrant of frypot area pro- tected and aimed to the center of the modules. This option may be desirable if minimizing total system flows is important. 14 IN. 9 3/8 IN. 19 3/8 IN. 19 1/41N. (23.8 cm) (23.8 cm) (23.5 cm) (35.6 cm) I 1 1 13� (33 cm) • I • I I I 26 IN. --_ --r---- (66 cm) I • I • I • 26 IN. (66 cm) • I • I I � I I 28 IN. (71 cm) i 28 IN. (71 cm) FIRST 3N NOZZLE OPTION SECOND 3N NOZZLE OPTION FIGURE 1 002466 SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-11 10-1=02 REV.5 ' Example No. 2 — Fryer With Dripboard. This fryer. has an overall fry vat, including a dripboard; that measures 24 in. (61 cm) in depth x 20 in. (51 cm) in length. The actual frypot measures 20 in. x 20 in. (51 -cm x 51 cm)_ Because both the frypot and the overall fry vat including the dripboard exceed the maximum dimensions for one nozzle, multiple nozzles will be required. Procedure: Divide the fryer cooking area from left to right.or from front to back into modules that do not exceed single nozzle area limitations and longest side limitations as described in the table for "Fryer Multiple Nozzle Protection" located in the Design Section. 'The example fryer can either be divided from left to right into two modules, each measuring 10 in. x 24 in. (25.4 cm x 61 cm), or it can be divided from front to back. See Figure 2. If the fryer is divided from front to back, two 2-flow nozzles may be adequate. To determine this, first protect as much of the rear portion of the vat (the fry - pot area) that is allowed with 2-flow appliance noz- zles using the maximum area of 210 sq. in. (1355 sq. cm) per nozzle with the maximum longest side of 21 in. (53 cm) for multiple nozzles. See Figure 2. In the example, the frypot is 20 in. .(51 cm) from -side to side. Use the maximum area of 210 sq. in. (1355 sq. cm) allowed for one nozzle and divide it by 20 in. (51 cm), a total of 10 112 in. (27 cm) of the frypot can be protected with one 2-flow nozzle (210 sq. in. divid- ed by 20 in. = 10.5 in.). See Figure 2. This leaves the remainder of -9 112 in. (24 cm) of frypot and the entire dripboard yet to protect. One 2-flow appliance nozzle will protect up to 10 1 /2 in. (27 cm) of frypot, therefore, there is no need to verity the remain- ing 9 112 in. (24 cm). There is only the overall of 9 112 in. (24-cm) remaining plus the dripboard to verify. The dripboard measures 4 in. x 20 in. (10 cm x 51 cm), with an overall remainder of frypot + dripboard area size of 13 1 /2 in. x 20 in. (34 cm x 51 cm) = 270 sq. in. (1742 sq. cm). Reviewing the "Multiple Nozzle fryer Table," a 2-flow appliance nozzle can protect an area, including dripboard, of 294 sq. in. (1897 sq. cm) with a longest side of 21 in. (53 cm). Because the area is less than the maximum of 294 sq. in. (1897 sq. cm) and the longest side is less than the maxi- mum of 21 in. (53 cm), a 2-flow nozzle will be suffi- cient. See'Figure 2. Adding the protection required for the back of the fry - pot to the front protection requires two 2-flow appli- ance nozzles as a minimum. See Figure 2. (� 20 IN ' I' (51 cm) } I 20 IN. (51 cm) 24 IN. l (61 cm) I t 41N• 10 IN._ (25.4 cm) (10 cm) DIVIDED LEFT TO RIGHT 201N. (51 CM) T 10 1 /2 IN. d27 cm) • 1 7 -4— ------ 24 IN. 9 112 IN. (61 cm) '(24 cm) s 4IN.'(Mcm) DIVIDED'FRONT TO BACK FIGURE 2 002467 SECTION IX — APPENDIX UL EX. 3470 ULC CEx747 Page 9-12 REV. 3 10-1-02 ► NOTES: RECEIVED 0(,0 " COF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION APR 5 2000 Permit # : t Date: � t Job Address: %�� /Ll t/cr5/f,+eT �LL90 Lifx/,—W.0 i=L J.9 7%1 Description of Work: ��fiLG .S" ✓�CCif16c - 4�� S,S09, Total Square Footage Historic District: Zoning: Value of Work: $ �� 1�11�Otl St6N Permit Type: Building Electrical Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole _ Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Cale. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines # of.Gas Lines Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial _ Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Industrial Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required ) Owners Nanmne & Address: 1e" �/ • ��« ��I>?G ✓� p /� /�.3/ GLA-N !;/;e 1'. / /�x.L'ISCJ . �i�% /�/� Phone: Contract o Name & Address: //✓.�YD/�i4T/�%F �lG�T1/+fS Sir �15 /V e ///,, — /Nib .4Y . /--L. z�3F1.3 State �License Number: Phone & Fax: �6. f/�% �.�5�� f%% .1�0-%15?% Contact Person: e'll /"1,91-l'/l / H Phone:,,6.3 6i16 S d S J Bonding Company: /1114 i Address: Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect/Engineer: A11W Phone: Address: Fax: Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the re uirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there m e ditional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of per t is verifi ion that I will not th owner//of t e property of the requireme is of Floridan La , FS 1 Signature of Owner/Agent Oate Signat re of Contractor/Agent Date tr� Owner/Agent's Name / Prmtt Co�actor/Agent's Name / ature of Notary -State of Florida Date ature of Notary -State of Florida D "°" GINGER R. CHENIER w w MY COMMISSION N 00483111 EXPIRES: October 18, 2009 Owner/Agent is ✓ Personally Known to Me to N ov Fl. Notary oi...X r gent is (/Personally Known to Me or Produced ID ed ID APPROVALS: ZONING: 04 k/ ' O L UTIL: FD: ENG: BLDG: Special Conditions: Rev 03/2006 -0 n c N 0 � � s t ^ 6r is k .1„ rns%fl Il9 �h .walk VIA)�d % ,� /22 base a^ PIa r , 9� iA over -Lit hC' 44 AICI 1 S` 5t4back Qn p0 tag fce} 'LEO Stri�O I�„ �C1 i IGul to tiakl sa ei utti -i!f i--. w Mi Ni rN 11 Uri 1t a to a Va 1 iEA NOTICE OF COMMENCENi PIE MORSE, CLERK OF CIRCUIT COURT SCMINf1k.E` r,CIIJN'rY Permit No. IK W16. Rq 1569; (1Fjq) Parcel ID NO:. 28-19-30-506-0000-02A CLERK' S # 20060F G 144RECORDED 04/25/2006 11:14:33 AM RECORDING FEES 10: 00 STATE OF FLORIDA RWINDI D BY L McKinley COUNTY OF SEMINOLE THE UNDERSIGNED hereby gives notice that improvement will be made to certain real property and in accordance with Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, the following information is provided in this Notice of Commencement. 1. Description of property (legal description of property and address, if available) 1831 Rinehart Rd, Sanford, FL. LEG PT OF LOT 24 DESWC AS BBEG 15 FT E&_ 79.79_-FT N OF W 1/4 COR RUN N 186.37 FT E 547.2 FT S 131.54 FT S 2. General Description of improvements SIGNAGE COPY. n SE BAR t 3. Owner Information I . ARED {'Y Y `CIRCUIT COURT a. Name and Address IRV H. LICHTENWALDCLERK OFi�r IIf0. FLORIDA b. Interest in property OWNER c. Name and address of fee simple titleholder (if other then owner) Contractor (name and address) Innovative Lighting Systems, Inc., 1167 Clearoointe Way Lakeland FL 33813. nnA[ Surety N/A a. Address b. Amount of Bond Lender (name and address) 7. Per3on within State of Florida designated by owner upon who notices or other documents may be served as provided by Section 731.13(1)(a)(7), Florida Statutes a. Name and address N/A S. In addition to him or herself, owner designates N/A of to receive a coov of the Lienor's Notice as provided by Section 731.13(1)(b), Florida Statutes. 9. Expiration date of Notice of Commencement recording unless otherwise specified). STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF SAN FRANCISCO (the expiration date is one year from the date of Signature of Owner OWNER Title The following instrument was acknowledged before me this day of February, 2006, by IRV H. LICHTENWALD _ who is personally known to me or produced California Drivers License as identification. After recording, return to: Address Citv_ _- 1/1, 4/ 2/ 2, Notary Signature: j b-e4l Name (print) �5 }-1 u Z e ?--T Ff Serial No., if any 634 `/ 3 cf 7 My commission expires At F-f, 2 `'l 1 2 00 L SHUBERT YEE Commission # 1349: Z @My Notary Public - Calitomia San Francisco County Cur an. E pirc . Apr 29, 2006 Iry H. Lichtenwald 1131 Clay Street San Francisco, CA 94108-1405 City of Sanford, FL To Whom It May Concern: Please be advised that we hereby authorize Innovative Lighting Systems, Inc. or its designated agent, William Monteith to act on behalf of Iry H. Lichtenwald, owner of the real estate located at 1831 Rinehart Road, and also owner of Uncle Irv, Inc., dba Big Boy Restaurants, for the purposed of securing necessary permits and performing the construction and installation of signage at ,Ihe following project: Big Boy Restaurant 1831 Rinehart Sanford, FL 32771 Should you have any questions, please feel free to contact the undersigned. Very truly yo , Irv... I ichtenwald President Uncle Irv, Inc. (415) 931-7983 Sworn to and subscribed before me this 1d of 1:::�P'J rH 012006, who is personally known to me or has produced California drivers license. ,�h,361?7- r6,T Notary Public Commission Expires: aeR , Zqj 260c� Signature of Ap i tee (seal)_ by Iry H. Lichtenwald SHUBERT YEE Commission #b 1349347 Z Notary Public - Calffomia i San Francisco County My Conw. Expires Apr 29, 2008 RECEIVED FEB 131006 4 Page 1 of 1 Steve Hollis From: Iry Lichtenwald [irvlichtenwald@msn.com] Sent: Monday, February 13, 2006 2:44 PM To: Steve Hollis Cc: 'John DiNunzio' Subject: Re: Big Boy Sanford, FL Hi guys The Legal Description is a follows: Tract G2; FL-AGSHIP-PARK, according to the plat thereof as recorded in Plat Book 69, Page 1-3, in the Public Records..of_Serninole-County..,_.Florida_ That's it! ----- Original Message ----- From: Steve Hollis To: 'Iry Lichtenwald' Cc: 'John DiNunzio' Sent: Monday, February 13, 2006 9:44 AM Subject: Big Boy Sanford, FL Irv, I received your package today, thanks. The city requires the Legal Description as recorded on the deed. Please forward to me at your earliest convenience. 2/13/2006 SITE PLAN m FLAGSHIP DRIVE Fl� HYD HYD d F, I R']II}l ALL 11UIEN91UN511) Bk PIMA %HNIFl6U PBIOR I TO INIM.I.Knos SIGNAGE REQUESTED FOR THIS SITE OILLUMINATED WALL SIGN OILLUMINATED CHANNEL LETTERS 0 LIGHTED LED STRIPING OI ILLUMINATED M PYLON SIGN _ SITE PLAN PROVIDED BY: YVTERPLAN o1lBlpi(yg,:rl roa,tn .alp „wpf nmont�D wove n e f121 FA I RM O N T K�f x � M)11le��WDN YIIII:rvN fa. )I))M OM1 NORTH ELEVATION 00 1 2Q SOUTH ELEVATION 76'-8" 1; O ILLUMINATED WALL SIGN 80.45 SgFt 11'-3 5/16 " 7'-0" ' CHANNEL LETTERS: 39 SgFt 4 - - - - - - 110190 OF EAST ELEVATION t� WEST ELEVATION 2" 17' SIGNAGE DIMENSIONS SIDE VIEW DETAIL: _-1 8" ALUMINUM qoNsACKERS WITH 1/2"rRIMCAP LENGTHWISE VIEW OF LED LIGHT BAND UNITS: 5 7/16" 'BIG AVAILABLE IN LENGTHS OF: BOY' FIGURE - REVERSE CHANNEL MOUNT TO FACE OF BLUE CIRCLE 1', 21, 41, 8' and 10' �'�Lf�(a� Fit i MOUNTING BRACKETS FLAT PLASTIC LETTER FACE W/ 2nd SURFACE VINYL IN CORRESPONDING COLOUR AND PRINT FLUORESCENT LAMP i INTERNAL ILLUMINATION 13mm RED NEON INTERNAL ILLUMINATION CT CHANNEL LETTER CAN EXTENSION FLAT PLASTIC LETTER FACE W/ 2nd SURFACE RED VINYL PIGTAILED POWER CORD 31 '-9 1 /8" SIDE VIEW DETAIL: ` 5" y ALUMINUM RETURNS �TRIMCAP — FLAT PLASTIC LETTER FACE ALUMINUM— W/ 2nd SURFACE VINYL LETTER NEON TUBE SUPPORTS BACKS 13mm WHITE NEON INTERNAL ILLUMINATION aLl l oa PIGTAIL D POWER CORD 97'-2 1/4" ILLUMINATED D/F MONUMENT SIGN 36 SgFt SEE SITE PLAN FOR SIGN LOCATION 6' 1.'-4 3/4" 1 T-0" PLANTER DONE BY OMER OR THEIRS 4" 1 I I V CUSTOMER DATE 22 M arch : 2.0 0 G GRC JOB �5453 ENGINEERING, INC. �1m 5544 W 147TH STREET OAK FOREST, ILLINOIS:60452 A. BIG- B'OY Lighthouse Printing. Inc.708 479 7776 3/22/2006 GRC Engineering, Inc. WIND LOAD CALCULATION -- Other Structures j Reference:C:\a frank folder\MathCAD\frank modules\units defined.mcd 1 set design height above grade 0 Reference:C:\a frank folder\MathCAD\frank modules\ASCE values.mcd basic wind speed (3-second gust) [mph] exposure categoryei'raai velocity pressure exposure coefficient topographic factor wind directionality factor Table 6-4 JON structure importance factor j�� -47 Obwekl g Q qZ = [(0.00256) KZ K K,VI I] (psf) < ASCE 7 § 6.5.13 > 2545 sf velocity pressure height 'z' above level at ground Ge 0 85 gust effect factor, rigid structure;.natural frequency greater than 1 Hz � E net force coefficient Pw ASCE = C9zC(C'_get)•Cf�]w ASG3 UU270If i Pwind:= C0'(MM(Pw ASCE,0•psf)) zd,, = 42.50 ft effective wind pressure wui��4�02'70ksf; CUSTOMER DATE G i" "1 JOB � ENGINEERING INC. 43 I 5�44 W. 147TH STREET OAK FOREST, ILUNOIS 60452 . SECT �-o( • �I)wo,a she t � Lighthouse Printing, Inc, 708.4797776____—___—_..._ CUSTOMER DATE G R.0 JOB ENGINEERING, INC. 5544 W. 147TH STREET OAK FOREST, ILLINOIS 60452 Lighthouse Printing,, Inc.708479 7776 'GRC-� ENGINEERING, INC. 5544 W. 147TH STREET OAK FOREST, ILLINOIS'60452 Lighthouse Printing, Ine.708-479 7776 Nm 3% �"5pjctr�J ir I I, P--wd No .4 m mi ©[lid VA-m lwArAll 3 G R-C ENGINEERING, INC. 5544 W. 147TH STREET OAK FOREST, ILLINOIS 60452 CUSTOMER DATE JOB Lighthouse Printing, Inc.708 479 7776 CUSTOMER MOO GRC ENGINEERING, INC. 5544 W 147TH STREET OAK FOREST, ILLINOIS 60452 Lighthouse Printing, Inc.708.479 7776 CUSTOMER DATE G R C _ JOB ENGINEERING, INC. \ 5544 W. 147TH STREET OAK FOREST, ILLINOIS 60452 Lighthouse Printing, Inc.708 479 7776 ,11 O I in Undisturbed soil (150 psf/ft required) 6'-0" 3'-0" 3'=0" es 4.;50"0 x .237" pipe Sign cabinet (by others) Pole cover (by others) I 5'-0" SIGN FACE ELEVATION scale: 3/8"=1 '-0" 8.625"0 x .322" pipe Concrete foundation Undisturbed soil (150 psf/ft required.) SECTION B-B II NOTES -Design conforms to the :2004 Florida Building; Code. • Design winds: — 130' mph'. (3—sec gust), Exposure C. • Wind Importance 'Factor Iw = 0.77 • Pipe shall conform to ASTM A53 grade iB. • Structural steel shall conform to ASTM A315, except. widei flange beams which, shall conform to ASTM A992. • Wedding shall be in accordance with AWS standards. -Concrete :shall attain al 28 day compressive strength of f'c: = 3000 psi; • Structural steel shall be fabricated and erected according to, the latest AISC specifications and standard practices. • The :contractor shall verify all dimensions andl conditions in they field and notify the engineer of any discrepancies. • GRC Engineering Inc. will not be supervising or monitoring the 3/4„ plate„ 12'x 14 erection/installation of this structure. (lower) ;(,gas :cut) THIS IS AN ORIGINAL UNPUBLISHED 'DRAWING,,rr IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, COPIED OR EXHIBITED IN ANY FASHION WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF IFAIRMONT SIGN COMPANY.. 3/4" plate„ 8, 1 /2"x 14" (upper) (gas cut) 3/8" gusset plates, 5% fit . 3/4" 0 A325 bolts 8.6250 x .322" pipe; (underside of lower :plate) 4.50"0 ;x .237" pipe 1/4 V — 8625"x .322" pipe D 0 Concrete foundation D 4'-0" SECTION A -A %ft 1049,�i No 21334 �7;0 STATE OF . �. S4 0 R 1 O ..-�`�:�� S Big Boy', 61_0" x 6'-0"_Sign Cabinet 15, 0" Overall Height --Colurnwand Foundation -Design.- 2004 Florida Build ng Code ; 130 m :h. 3-sec ust - Ex sure Cat ;p i 9 ), , po egory C _ Importance -Factor -- h„-= 0.77 -- Sanford, FL G• �i w No ;iP , 21334 CIC STATE 31712006 GRC Engineering, Inc. WIND LOAD CALCULATION -- Other Structures 0 Reference:C:\a frank folderWathCAD\frank modules\units defined.mcd set design height above grade t 2s Q Reference:C:\a frank folderWathCAMfrank modules\ASCE values.mcd i v 4.w � crr c� N sfiowl � basic wind speed (3-second gust) [mph] �r exposure category terrain "flat and open" g4q velocity pressure exposure coefficient Cf� 12 topographic factor wind directionality factor Table 6-4 structure importance factor qz:=[(0.00256)•KZ•K4-Kd'VI2•I]•(Psf) < ASCE 7 § 6.5.13 > qZ 24 04 Psf velocity pressure at height Y above ground level gust effect factor, rigid structure, natural frequency greater than 1 Hz net force coefficient Pw ASCE = [qz C(G_gei)-Cf�] Pw ASCE _ 0 0245k Pwind:= C0-(ma4Pw ASCE,O•PSf)) ides = 15.00 fteffective wind pressure ....... Pvind i30245 ksf 31712006 GRC Engineering, Inc. SIGN STRUCTURE SUPPORT FORCES R Reference:C:\a frank folder\MathCAD\frank modules\units defined.mcd 0 Reference:C:\a frank folder\MathCAD\frank modules\pipe colA design.mcd (OWL HSS Pwind'(DIA,.tA) o)WL HSS = 0.009klf O)DL HSs:= WtcotA wDt. ass = 0.017k1f Lpro� 0' ft Htrib Hsign Wtrib Wsign Atrib Htnb' Wtrib DLtnb Atrib'Pdead WLtnb Atrib'Pwind LX flag :_ (0)' Wsign 1 Lz_trib := Lproj + 2 'Hsign LHSS := Lproj + Hsign Wstgn 6 00 ft.. Ht.;b=6.00ft Wtrib = 6.00 ft A,,.ib = 36.00 f2 DLt�,b = 0.43 kips WLtnb = 0.88 kips L, _flag = 0.00 ft Lz t<ib = 3.00 ft M.WL = WLtrib'(Lz 1 trib) + 2'wWL HSS'Lproj 2 MyyDL DLtnb'(LX flag) M.WL:= WLtrib'(Poff Wsign) VyWL = WLtnb + O)WL_HSS'Lproj NZDL = DLtrib + O)DL HSS'LHSS ,pall 0 20 Iv,IX� -:2 65.ft;ktps;. 3/7/2006 GRC Engineering, Inc. PIPE COLUMN DESIGN 0 Reference:C:\a frank folder\MathCAD\frank modules\units defined.mcd ast£ IEUU allowable stress increase factor ,�� outer diameter design wall thickness y L colA b 00g ft p 10 member design length �;;T 25 ft kip design WL moment Mflkt}i design DL moment 1v1 1 4i6ft ki s x ' n design torsional moment _P Alilii& d$ %p p �iX '� gISA an design shear force 'y PsK desi n axial force g ❑� Reference:C:\a frank folder\MathCAD\frank modules\pipe colA design.mcd 0 93 xj�pr�s JcalA st tnom tdes = 0.220 in MDES := M,2 + Myy2 MDES = 2.6 ft•kips MDES fb_colA = bending stress fb_eolA = 10.52ksi ScolA Py2 2 + PX fv_colA_A := shear stress A fv_colA_A = 0.594ksi 6v'AcolA MzzRADcolA fv_colA_B = shear stress B fv_cotA B = 2.10 ksi JcolA Use sect = "Pipe" D1Ae0jA = 4.500 in x tnom = 0.237 in ( Fy colA = 35 ksi ). -= — ce..« ,., _.. ,�, K;2 -- — .. Lighthouse Printing, Inc.706 479 7776 3/7/2006 GRC Engineering, Inc. PIPE COLUMN DESIGN Q Reference:C:\a frank folder\MathCAD\frank modules\units defined.mcd 10�0 allowable stress increase factor asif outer diameteril-11-11 W�� design wall thickness co A U0 ftu member design length � L"x 15 5 fr ki p design WL moment design DL moment 1E R" toes = 0.299 in -; s ", design torsional moment : ��'P a ?# P 9$kips p ps design shear force . ,�, design axial force �, �R Y.zT�Sx`.'vT�"' TRY DlAcoiA8 625tn Xtnom 0 322tn g�� 0 Reference:C:\a frank folder\MathCAD\frank modules\pipe colA design.mcd MDEs := M,a + Myy fb_colA :_ MDES bending stress ScotA FPy2 + PXZ A fv_co]A_A :_ shear stress 6vAco]A M RADcOtA shear stress 8 fv_cotA_B := JcolA PZ fa_co]A _ axial stress AwtA XcolA = 28.80 KLRcotA = 128.33 Fb_cotA = 23.10ksi Fv_co1A = 14.00 ksi Fa COLA = 9.07 ksi MDEs = 15.5 ft•kips fb com = 11.80 ksi fv colA A = 0.506 ksi fv colA B = 0.82 ksi fa co,A = 0.179ksi pipecotA 'compact" WNW,: Q 027 k1£` 1colA 68 01n4 U�w axial = 'Ruler" 2 fb_colA fv_ cotA_A + fv_colA_B + fa_colA 5.70 r ICcoIA :_ + ICcotA 0 5�5 Fb colA Fv_colA Fa_colA 3.72 Use sect = "Pipe" DIAcotA = 8.625 in x tnom = 0.322in ( Fy_cotA = 35 ksi 2004 FBC - RECTANGULAR PIER DESIGN ❑a Reference:CAa frank folder\MathCAD\frank modules\units defined.mcd asif 100 allowable stress increase factor ng 00 L:�k.. foundation width (i.e. parallel to sign face) foundation depth foundation thickness design moment at grade design shear at grade M 0 ft hbar := gade + ignr hbaz = 7.83 ft Vgade 50 ksf�b2A assumed lateral bearing capacity of soil �y 2004 FBC Sl := [(0.33)•(DEPTH�N + ignr)]-(asif)•[(1bif)•LATALL] Sl = 0.545ksf SALL:=min[Si,[(0.33)•(12.0•ft)]•(asif)•[(Ibif)•LATALL]] 8A,LL=054ksf b := 4WIDTH,N2 + THICKFDN2 b = 5.66 ft (2.34) • Vgrade A A_= 1.50ft SALL•b A (4.36)•hb dregd :_ —=1 + 1 + dreqd = 4.41 ft 2 A IC := dregd identity check DEPTHFDN I (WIDTHFDN — 6 • in 2 MCL (2)-SALL-( 2 •(FT) McL = 0.83 ft-kips moment per FT depth 1(1.7)•MCLI � ;= AS = 0.0071 in steel REQD per FT depth (0.90)•Fy y,WF•(THICK,N - 7-in) USE (1) • WIDTHFDN = 4.00 ft X DEPTHFDN = 5.50 ft X THICKEN = 4.00 ft ak with WWF = "not required" J 317/2006 MATCH PLATE BOLTED CONNECTION Q Reference:C:\a frank folder\MathCAD\frank modules\units defined.mcd INPUTS as1fR4 i allowable stress increase factor �11"6 design forces and bolt pattern at connection ICI t y� � �6)RIM (offset distance (offset distance from x-axis) from y-axis) I,,x:= (4)-(d_xxo)2 + (0)-(d_aotl)2 + (0)-(d_xx2)2 Iyy (4)'(d_'Yo)2 + (0)'(d_'Yl)2 + (0)'(d_'YY2)2 d_?LKo d__yyo Msoc WL Mri_DL Tb WL d—xcl I — Tb_DL := d_'yl - I d_�2 . d_'YY2 YY 2.45 0.00 Tb WL = 0.00 kips Tb DL = 0.00 kips 0.00 0.00 2 PY_WL �Izz_tors' (d_xxo) + (d_yyo). Vb_A'— N 1 Vb_B := + T b xx 'YY Tb_DES fT . Ab Vb_DES 1 fv . Ab TRY DIAL 0 750tn bolts 5.53 fT = 0.00 ksi 0.00 fv = 1.55 ksi FT A325N (44.ksi.aSif)2 — (4.39)'fv2 FT A325N = 43.88 ksi I,x = 42.25 in Iyy = 144.00 in Tb_coll 0-kips = N b tensile load Vb_A = 0.22 kips Vb_B = 0.47 kips USE { Nbolts . "--4--" } DIAb = 0.750 in bolts "A325 N" w Tr .. -----`=--===---===---�-------===—=--=---="==--- --- --- J 3i7i2006 TRIANGLE BRACKET PLATE DESIGN design tension flow to gusset and length of design moment arm i:= 0..2 M—gusi := (P—gus;)•(a_gusARM;) design gusset moment ratio; := b—gusi z := 1.39 — (2.2)•(ratio) + (1.27)•(ratio)2 — (0.25)•(ratio)3 a_gusi 25.00 19.00 14.00 ratio (1 DO' 1 00 1 00 ) z = (0.210 0.210 0.210) (M—gusi)•(6) 0.119 t_onei := t_one = 0.000 in [(0.60)•Fy_„S•(asif)]-(a_.tsi + 0•in)2 0.000 P-gusi 0.108 t two :— t two = 0.000 in (zi) •[(0.60) •Fy.,' (asif )] •(b_gusi) — / 0.000 `` max(t—onei,t—twoi) IC_'gusi := ICJgus 0 00 tguss 11 2 2 (o.so> 1.16 [(1.0)•M_gusj P�gusi kips f weldAi := + f weldA =�0.00 0.00 j — S weldTi A_weldi �� — in FIR,,, (P)'Tbolt kips bW = 2.75 in f weldB := f weldB = 0.89 — — b — in t_we1dREQDi :_ max(f weldAi,f weldB) (0.30) • [(0.707) • 70• ksi] • (asif ) IC_weld — t_weldREQD min(tw, tw_max) w 0.078 t weldREQD = 10.0601 in tw_max := PQ'tguss 0.060 0 3'1 0 24 3/7/2006 MATCH PLATE DESIGN design match plate thickness a—PL — 1.19 m (1.94 gZ 1 00 load to gusset or column member M PL:= 1 •a PL •r(qJ)•Tb_DES Tb_DEso = 2.4kips M PL = (0.39ft kips — 1 — L — 0.24) (0.75) •Fy_36' (aSIf) (2.75 bPL:= 2•(t�late) + Fb FbrL=_ (0.75)•Fy36•(asif) b PL = 2.75) in Fb PL =(27.00 27.00)ksi ........... _... _............. ....._..._....__..._....... ..................... _ _ .... i .= 0.. 1 t PL; := M_PL; •(6) PL (0.484 (t—PL;�SS t = := l (Fb_PLi)•(b_PL;) — in IC—PL,. (t_plate;)" E '— (edge = as cut", L25 1.75 edge — if ( g "gas ) EDie := (Ed e)•(DIAb) ED`re m4hcolm + 1.000•in,2 d_xxp + EDre s 8 31 PL min := — Inin 2 d yyp + ED !1 U 1%. [OW&Y4iIry . IN 0.7501 , . 8.50 , .. . �y USE t�late = 11 (0.750 in x PL min = in ( edge = "gas cut" ) J �J Use 3/8" gusset, 5" x fit [1 pQ] (parallel to sign face, 1 1/2-inches from bolt) with 1/4" fillet welds (both sides, typ) 1/4" fillet weld, plate to pipe Permit Job Address: Description of Work: A1iLJ�w 4119, Historic District: Zoning: CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION ! / �7 Date: T' G1- GC0 KJ Total Square Footage Value of Work: $ �0�0 C'• �o Permit Type: Building Electrical .,'— Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures _ Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets _ Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Cale. Required) # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Industrial Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required ) Owners Name & Address: Phone: Contractor Name &Address' State /License Number: EF60000 7 l Phone & Fax: D .52 21 4P Q7 Contact Person: %DL.-PhoneAC7,S2Z 7ZDd Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect/Engineer: Phone: Address: Fax: Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the property of the re#uiremAtseFlMa eiien�aw, FS 713 Signature of Owner/Agent Owner/Agent's Name Date Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date Owner/Agent is _ Produced ID Personally Known to Me or of Contractor/Agent c FLoaQ. s 421.06 Date Signature o No+ to of $IE BLA►rJTOWate MY COMMISSION # DD 188491 ExPIRES: February 25, 2007 I -aoo i-NOTARY FL Notwy DiscoiNit ASSOC. CO' Contractor/ gent is ersorwily Kpo to Me 9r Produced ID 1 APPROVALS: ZONING: UTIL: FD: ENG: BLDG: Special Conditions: Rev 03/2006 INTEPPL 933 LEE ROAD, FIRST FLOOR ORLANDO, FL 32810 PH 407.645.5008 FX 407.629.9124 March 14, 2006 Commercial Plan Review City of Sanford Department of Planning and Community Development Building Department Post Office Box 1788 Sanford, Florida 32772 Reference: Building Permit Revisions IP # 2005.0097 Big Boy Restaurant @ Sanford, Florida3 To Whom It May Concern: At the request of the project's owner, some revisions have been made to the construc- tion documents for the above referenced project. Here is a brief outline of the hrrr�r7o 1, ARCHITECTURAL. Sheet LS - 1 has been revised to specify and locate the fire extinguishers as per the comments from the Fire Prevention Division dated 10/13/05. These revisions are included in this submittal, even though the original comments did not require a re -submittal. Also, sheet Al. l was added to illustrate a new walk-in cooler that was added to the rear of the building. One additional building sign was added to the building elevations. 2. ELECTRICAL. The size of the electric service has increased from 600 amps to 800 amps, We have made revisions in the way the temporary generator hook-up is configured. Because of clearance issues the electrical panels have been relocated. There were minor revisions to light fixture specs and locations. A new circuit has been added for the new walk-in freezer added to rear of the building, 3. PLUMBING. We have decided to fully sprinkle the building. A standard riser diagram and design criteria have been added to the drawings, The fire line was already on the approved site utility plan as it was previously approved. We also added one exterior hose bib to the dumpster enclosure area. See sheets P0, P1, P2, P3 for the revisions, F:\A-J\BigBoy\2005.0097\Correspondences\PerinitO6.doc ARCHITECTURE a ENGINEERING ■ PROJECT MANAGEMENT ■ INTERIOR DESIGN • AA 003420 ■ CA 8660 ORLANDO DALLAS CHICAGO ATLANTA development services for restaurant, retail, hospitality and commercial programs • www.interplanorlando.com j INTERPLAN LLC Big Boy @ Sanford page 2 March 14, 2005 4, CIVIL. We have also included revised C1 sheets which illustrates minor building revision that have taken place since the Site Plan approval process, The location of the northern emergency exit was moved to avoid exiting into a drive aisle, An additional walk-in freezer has been added to the rear of the building, Most of the above described revisions in the building drawings have been clouded, keyed to delta 5, labeled as "CLARIFICATIONS"', and dated 01/13/06. Additional build- ing revisions have been keyed to delta 6, labeled as "OWNER REVISIONS', and dated 2/20/06; or keyed to delta 7, labeled as "CORRECTIONS', and dated 02/20/06. The Cl sheet revision has been clouded, keyed to delta 3, labeled as "CLARIFICATIONS', and dated 1 1 /08/05. Please feel free to call if we can answer any questions or provide ad- ditional materials to assist in your review of our revised plans for this project. Thanks. Sincerely, INTERPLAN LLC Truman Gee Project manager Enclosures: Revised Plans cc: Iry Lichtenwald; Bemmie Eustace; Stuart Anderson; Louise Craver; Monica Ran- som; File F:W-J\BigBoy\2005 0097\Correspondences\Permit06.doc ORLANDO DALLAS CHICAGO ATLANTA development services for restaurant, retail, hospitality and commercial programs • www.interplanorlando.com 933 LEE ROAD, FIRST FLOOR ORLANDO, FL 32810 PH 407.645.5008 FX 407.629.9124 March 14, 2006 Commercial Plan Review City of Sanford Department of Planning and Community Development Building Department Post Office Box 1788 Sanford, Florida 32772 Reference: Building Permit Revisions IP # 2005,0097 Big Boy Restaurant @ Sanford, Florida To Whom It May Concern; At the request of the project's owner, some revisions have been made to the construc- tion documents for the above referenced project. Here is a brief outline of the changes; l . ARCHITECTURAL. Sheet LS - 1 has been revised to specify and locate the fire extinguishers as per the comments from the Fire Prevention Division dated 10/13/05. These revisions are included in this submittal, even though the original comments did not require a re -submittal. Also, sheet Al, I was added to illustrate a new walk-in cooler that was added to the rear of the building. One additional building sign was added to the building elevations. 2, ELECTRICAL. The size of the electric service has increased from 600 amps to 800 amps. We have made revisions in the way the temporary generator hook-up is configured. Because of clearance issues the electrical panels have been relocated. There were minor revisions to light fixture specs and locations, A new circuit has been added for the new walk-in freezer added to rear of the building. 3. PLUMBING. We have decided to fully sprinkle the building. A standard riser diagram and design criteria have been added to the drawings. The fire line was already on the approved site utility plan as it was previously approved. We also added one exterior hose bib to the dumpster enclosure area, See sheets P0, Pl , P2, P3 for the revisions. F:\A-J\B igBoy\2005.0097\Correspondences\Permit06.doe ARCHITECTURE ■ ENGINEERING ■ PROJECT MANAGEMENT • INTERIOR DESIGN ■ AA 003420 ■ CA 8660 ORLANDO DALLAS CHICAGO ATLANTA development services for restaurant, retail, hospitality and commercial programs • www.interplanorlando.com INTERPLAN LLC Big Boy @ Sanford page 2 March 14, 2005 4, CIVIL. We have also included revised Cl sheets which illustrates minor building revision that have taken place since the Site Plan approval process, The location of the northern emergency exit was moved to avoid exiting into a drive aisle. An additional walk-in freezer has been added to the rear of the building, Most of the above described revisions in the building drawings have been clouded, keyed to delta 5, labeled as "CLARIFICATIONS"", and dated 01/13/06. Additional build- ing revisions have been keyed to delta 6, labeled as "OWNER REVISIONS', and dated 2/20/06; or keyed to delta 7, labeled as "CORRECTIONS', and dated 02/20/06, The Cl sheet revision has been clouded, keyed to delta 3, labeled as "CLARIFICATIONS', and dated 1 1 /08/05, Please feel free to call if we can answer any questions or provide ad- ditional materials to assist in your review of our revised plans for this project, Thanks, Sincerely, INTERPLAN LLC ell Truman Gee Project manager Enclosures: Revised Plans cc: Iry Lichtenwald; Bemmie Eustace; Stuart Anderson; Louise Craver; Monica Ran- som; File F: \A-J\Big Boy\2 005 . 009 7\Correspondences\PermJ06. doc ORLANDO DALLAS CHICAGO ATLANTA development services for restaurant, retail, hospitality and commercial programs • www.interplanorlando.com RECEIVED r; MAR 16 2006 =� REVISIONS PERMIT #Ao ® 2 5 DATE March 13, 2006 ADDRESS 1831 Rhinehart Road CONTRACTOR GW Hayes c/o Interplan Phi # (407) 645-5008 FAX # (4o7) 629-9124 DESCPRITION OF REVISION: see a arhFrl letters UTI FIRE LcDf e -n/3d 0/, RECEIVED Permit # Job Address: Description of W CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION I.-, CITY O's Date: ART ROAD, SANFORD, FL 32771 APR 0 5 200& rc'r INSTALL AWNINGS Historic,pistrict: Zoning: Value of Work: S 3, 200. 00 IV o'y V'l Permit TYP es;�Bu;4,ilding,_X t '-•°'Electrical Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Electriea *"N` ew Service — # of AMPS Add ition/AIteration Change of Service Temporary Pole Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Cale. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial X Industrial Total Square Footage: Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required for other than X) 28-19-30-506-0000-024A Parcel #: (Attach Proof of Ownership & Legal Description) Owners Name & Address: IRV LTCHTENWALD 113.1 CLAY STREET,-SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94108-1405 Phone: Contractor Name & Address: ENTERPRISE TARPAULIN PRODUCT'S, INC dba B&B AWNINGS 2350 PLAZA DRIVE, ENTERPRISE, AL 36330 State License Number: AC# 2044668 Phone & Fax: 334-347-9177 Contact Person: ROBERT M. CRUMPLER Phone; 334-347-9177 Bonding Company: The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company Address: 9450 Seward Road Fairfield, OH 45014 Mortgage Lender: N / A Address: Architect/Engineer: Interplan LLC Phone: 407-645-5008 Address: 933 Lee Road 1st Floor Orlando, FL 32810 Fax: 407-629-9124 Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the r this county, and there may Acceptance of permit is erit v Signature C . W CTYn Print Owner/Aeet of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of ermits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. I will notify the owner of the property of the requirements ofFlorida Lien L 713. 3/24/06 p-Gci yj 3/22/06 (Agent) Date Signature of Con tractorhA'g-rng Date es ROBERT M. CRUMPLER of Notary -State of Flori Owner/Agent is X Persongl Produced ID I... APPLICATION APPROVED BY: Bldg: _ Special Conditions: 3/24/06 Date JAIME R. PEARCE Me cwm„A 000270eu AV —KW tlw (GW)43247 P ' t Contractor/Agent's 3/2..2/06 Slignature of Notar�Stato of,Fdlcrida Daft Nu -.,:_.,.-,, Al— Sia`e at Large C11y !.'il)mlil. Expdres Oet. 19, 2669 Contractor/Agent is X Personally Known to Me or Produced ID _ F rida Notary Assn., Inc i .. ....................... Zoning: i f( 4- 11. OL Utilities: (Initial & Dale) (Initial & Date) � k OrbLits, $) ✓lad S�k Pk.--. (Initial & Date) FD: (Initial & ate) I - '111 - .- I or 0 IiEC EI ve MAR 2 4 2006 C'"UCCWrH,A YE OIV CoMPgNV ..,,,>...,,...>»..,,>...>»>..............>.. 8 : jAAJ 2 2 ,,'AiAL g 9�tB4�TL}�«ur>� :�Eb�JE�t,�'0Vj crr• hr.3turo�3 - ,� � I ur W FS , —ff"Im— Division of Enterprise Tarpaulin Products Inc. 2350 Plaza Drive Enterprise, Alabama 36330 PH: (334) 347-9177 Fax: (334) 393-0013 Jobsite: Big Boy Restaurant Date: 03-29-06 Address: 1821 Rinehart Rd. Sanford FL 32771 Description: Three 3 Conventional Awnings WINDOW FRAME WELD ON PEGS — TYPICAL ,I „ 2 —0 In in 1 /4" STAINLESS STEEL OR ZINC COATED HILTI SELF TAPPING SCREWS (TYP.) 30" Max WINDOW FRAME/ MULLION- 1 /4" STAINLESS STEEL OR ZINC COATED HILTI SELF TAPPING SCREWS (TYP.) SPECIFICATIONS: I: AWNINGS A. Height = 2'-0" B. Projection = 4'-0" C. Valance = N/A D. Widths = '1 0 10'-8"; 1 ® 17'-2"; 1 0 11'-2" ll: FRAMEWORK A. Main body = 1" square aluminum (.063) B. Rafters = 1" square aluminum approx. 30" o.c. (.063) C. Lace bar = i" round aluminum D. Weld on pegs = 1 J" x 1" x J" approx. 24" o.c. III: FABRIC A. John Boyle Patio 500 #566 Sunflower B. Fabric on ends IV: INSTALLATION A. Frame to be anchored into window mullions with i" self —tappers. B. Vertical legs to be anchored thru frame into window mullions with self —tappers. C. Seal top with clear silicon caulk. D. Awning cover to lace on with no lacing exposed to exterior view 6" nylon). Perlin @ approx. \/"4-�2'-2 3/4" 1 @ 10'-8' REVISIONS: 1 @ 17'-2" NO. DATE REMARKS 1 @ 11'-2" DESIGN CRITERIA WIND SPEED 120 MPH WIND PRESSURE 25 PSF WIND UPLIFT(NET) 35 PSF > SNOW LOAD N/A CODE F.B.C. 2004 THIS CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE FLORIDA BASIC BUILDING CODE, 2004. CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION ^ f _ Permit #: Date: �Z 1 c� P Job Address: Description of Work: 6r CXNM i_4w—)1— Total Square Footage �� "� �'� I� C�00 Historic District: ► oning: Value of Work: $ Permit Type: Building Electrical Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole Mechanical: Residential Non-Residential—1!bi Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Calc. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Industrial Construction Type: -- # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required) Owners Name & Address: Tn_0 LA CkA 1 I_Vj U-0A-iI> I3 ` LI A -�1 ST' Sr�`-� �q ►"►�tQ • Col (� PLh1one: Contractor Name & Address: a l� — t'(., C�i1.i ��''T1 W—� t I �I�`�"� uop >fol9�� .- �� S(� State L"ic�ense�N er: ,ii�,� �j�j§� ,f Phone & Fax: 2 Contact Person: 1 lC� ✓I-� (�QPhone: ` 01H65P34-- Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect/Engineer: JA Phone: Address: Fax: Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the property of the requ emen o F ri ieDLaw;FS 713. Signature of Owner/Agent Date Si re of Contractor/ gent ontractor/gentt ate aih-iLA jt5/ Print Owner/Agent's Name Tint Contractor gent's Name 31211De Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date Signature of Notary -State of Florida •••v d • I��1 na B.roadaway _.* Commission # DD490613 Expires December 30, 2009 •1r,. fliat •,BondedTroy Fain -Insurance,Inc 800.38&7019 Owner/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Contractor/Agent is Personally Known to Me or Produced ID Produced ID APPROVALS: ZONING: Special Conditions: Rev 03/2006 UTIL: FD: ENG: BLDG: Iry H. Lichtenwald 1131 Clay Street San Francisco, CA 94108-1405 (415) 931-7983 May 9, 2006 city of Sanford Dan Florian, Building Official PO Box 1788 Sanford, FL 32727-1788 RE: Prepower Inspection Request for 1831 Rinehart Road, Sanford, FL To Whom it May Concern: This letter is written to request a prepower inspection for the address referenced above. Please be advised that such building will not be occupied until the Certificate of Occupancy has been released. Sincerely, RECEIVE® 15 2006 Iry H. Lichtenwald Owner Signed by Mr. Iry H. Lichtenwald on May 9, kn n by No ary $ o�,rr rye ConMi� 00027pN� ;fjBonded Quu (800 M-4261 FloAde Wotn Aeen Inc r . .......................u7iu...:iuu. 2006, personally RECEIVE® MAY 15 2006 CW HAYES CONSTRUCTION COMPANY {plNNas i �as�r+.s• a stYv 'N4 a a Q